I!23 
 BSZ 
 
 
THE GIFT OF 
 .yQ./...../^=fe*dtcrtj,*i<s*f*{^.!^^ 
 
 A .f 3 5;^_3 ^ifl'lf^r... 
 
CORNELL UNIVERSITY LIBRARY 
 
Cornell University 
 Library 
 
 The original of this book is in 
 the Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://archive.org/details/cu31924063501179 
 
aOTfllC &BAMAE 
 
 WITH SELECTIONS FOR READING AND A GLOSSARY 
 
 WILHELM BRAUNE. 
 
 TRANSLATED 
 FROM THE SECOND GERMAN EDITION 
 
 BY 
 
 G. H. BALG. 
 
 LONDON 
 
 SAMPSON LOW, MARSTON, SEARLE, & RIVINGTON 
 
 1883. 
 

 V LJSHARY 
 
TO 
 
 WILLIAM FRANCIS ALLEN, a. m., 
 
 PROFESSOR IN THE UNIVERSITY OF WISCONSIN, 
 
 THIS TEANSLATION IS DEDICATED WITH HEAETFELT 
 
 GRATITUDE FOR MANY ACTS OF KINDNESS 
 
 BY HIS FORMER PUPIL, 
 
 THE TRANSLATOR. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 In the course of my lectures on Gothic Grammar I long ago 
 felt the need for an outline being in the hands of my hearers, 
 in order to enable them to take up the study of the Gothic lan- 
 guage for themselves. There was required for this a clear re- 
 presentation of Phonology and Etymology, giving a view of the 
 language as far as possible by itself without admixture of scraps 
 from Comparative Grammar. For, an understanding of the Ger- 
 mano-Gothic Grammar from a scientific point of view can certainly 
 not be obtained from an outline, and unsystematic remarks must 
 needs confuse the beginner, quite irrespective of the fact that in 
 the manuals commonly used the science of language stands on a 
 rather antiquated basis. 
 
 The present Grammar will thus also enable him who is igno- 
 rant of Comparative Grammar to learn Gothic. Pre-historic ques- 
 tions have therefore been as far as possible avoided, or when 
 this could not entirely be done, treated ordy from a purely Gothic 
 point of view. Reference has rather been made to another Ger- 
 manic dialect, e. g. the Old High German. It has been found 
 necessary to leave over for lectures the scientific explanation of 
 the facts stated in the Grammar. It is also another purpose of 
 this book to serve as a basis for these lectures, and' to this in 
 its preparation constant attention has been given. It will be seen 
 that the somewhat detailed treatment of Phonology is largely in- 
 fluenced by this consideration, since, for instance, such examples 
 under the Consonants have been chosen as can be made use of 
 in the demonstration of the " Laulverschiebung*)" . In treating 
 
 *). Shifting or Permulalion of Consonanis. The former term is 
 used by March, the latter by Whitney. 
 
VI 
 
 of the Vocalism, an opportunity has like/vise been given of showing 
 iy examples the transformation of the Indo- Germanic Vocalism 
 into that of the Germano-Gothic. — 
 
 The Reading Exercises and Glossary will be sufficient for 
 all immediate needs, since they provide material for the appli- 
 cation of what has been learned in the Grammar. They will 
 also furnish sufficient material for the exercises in Gothic con- 
 nected with the lectures. 
 
 I tvould like to advise the beginner who may learn Gothic 
 from this book, at first simply to read over the chapters on pho- 
 nology, but to give more particular attention to those on inflection 
 (omitting however in every case the Notes) and then at once to 
 proceed to read a text. A more extended learning of the Grammar 
 must accompany this exercise, and of course the analysis of the 
 texts, which must be carefully executed, will require a constant 
 reference to the Grammar. 
 
 The above remarks which formed the preface to the first 
 edition of this book on its appearance in 1880 apply to the second 
 edition also, for the plan and disposition of the whole have not 
 been changed. 
 
 In this edition the most obvious deviation from the first is 
 in the transcription of the Gothic alphabet, inasmuch as I have 
 introduced w for v of the first edition and similarly q and hr 
 for kv and hv respectively, of which signs q and hr correspond 
 to the uniform original signs. When the first edition appeared, 
 the sign q was already in common use: my reason for employing 
 kv instead in that edition was that no uniform sign for hv sug- 
 gested itself to me, and in my opinion whoever writes hv mu^t 
 also use kv. After the facts stated by Collitz in his review of 
 this book (Zs. fdph. 12, 480 — 82), I could no longer employ the 
 signs kv and hv, but was compelled to see about getting new signs 
 for both. Following Collitz's proposal, I had the ligature hy cut 
 in place of hv, which so recommends itself that its suitability 
 needs no discussion but will certainly be acknowledged by all 
 fellow-workers. The w very improperly used by Gdbelentz-Lobe 
 for hr, 7 could now give its proper place, that of v. In this 
 , respect also I think I ame sure of general approval, for w 
 has been fully established in Anglo-Saxon orthography. 
 
Vll 
 
 The text of the Grammar is essentially that of the first 
 edition, hut there are a few slight additions and other emetidations 
 that seemed necessary to myself, or the necessity for which had 
 been pointed out by friends. 1 have also availed myself of sug- 
 gestions thrown out during the public discussion of the book, in 
 so far as 1 could agree with them. The Reading Exercises re- 
 main the same. The Glossary has however been enlarged by the 
 incorporation therein of all words occurring in the Grammar, 
 whereas previously it contained only the vocabulary of the Reading 
 Exercises. The citations from the chapters on Inflections have 
 been given in full, those from the chapters on Phonology in every 
 case where a word does not stand merely as an arbitrarily chosen 
 example. The Glossary may therefore also serve as an Index. 
 
 Thus, I think I may fairly hope that the second edition of 
 this unpretending little work will be received no less favorably 
 than its first, and that it also will be found a useful guide in the 
 study of Gothic. 
 
 Giessen, October 1882. 
 
 Wilhelm Brsiune. 
 
TRANSLATOR'S PREFACPl 
 
 This translation was made from the revised proof-sheets of 
 the second German edition, and it was expected that they would 
 have appeared simultaneously. The translator — a student him- 
 self — hopes that those, both teachers and students, who may 
 use it, will forgive its baldness: he has tried to reach a true 
 rather than an elegant version, and moreover owing to delays and 
 disappointments on the part of the printer had to prepare it in 
 the mindst of his academic work, instead of finishing it before the 
 beginning of the session, hi those circumstances errors are likely 
 to have crept in, and it will greatly oblige the translator to have 
 them communicated to him. 
 
 Al first it was intended to supply the reading exercises with 
 explanatory and comparative notes. These have been omitted for 
 the present, as the translator wishes to have the opinion of those 
 experienced in. such matters, whether they would be desirable. 
 
 The pronunciation of some Gothic sounds has been indicated 
 by the corresponding English letters within square brackets. Much 
 care has been taken in preparing the glossary. The Gothic text 
 as well as various other versions of the Sible both in modern and 
 ancient languages have been compared, in order to render the 
 German both as literally and correctly as possible. The works 
 of Stamm, Skeat, and Schulze have been used wherever they were 
 applicable. Modem English words akin to the Gothic have been 
 chosen whenever they suggested themselves to the translator, and 
 it is likewise hoped that the words in {) are not out of place. 
 
 Should the student not be acquainted with any of the scien- 
 tific terms, he may apply to works like March's ..Comparative 
 Grammar of the Anglo-Saxon language,,. 
 
 The translator is much indebted to prof. Braune and Mr. 
 Bickerton for their kind suggestions and informations of misprints 
 and other errors. 
 
 Freiburg, December, 1882. 
 
 Tr. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Phonology. Pag, 
 
 Chap. I. Letters (§§ 1—2) 1 
 
 Chap. II. Vowels (§§ 3—27) 3 
 
 Chap. m. View of the Gothic Vocalism (§§ 28—36) .... 14 
 
 A. Phonetic System (§ 28). 
 
 B. Historical System (§§ 29—36). 
 
 Chap. IV. Consonants (§§ 37—82) 17 
 
 A. Sonorous Consonants (§§ 38—50). 
 
 B. Noise Sounds (§§ 51—78). 
 
 Labials (§§ 51—56). 
 Gutturals (§§ 57—68). 
 Dentals (§§ 69—78). 
 Appendix. General Remarks on the Consonants 
 (§§ 79-82). 
 Inflections. 
 
 Chap. I. Declension of Nouns (§§ 83—120) , 35 
 
 General Remarks (§§ 83—88). 
 
 A. Vowel (strong) Declension (§§ 89 — 106). 
 
 B. N-Declension (weak declension) (§§ 107 — 113). 
 
 C. Miscellaneous Inflections (§§ 114—118). ' 
 Appendix. Declension of Foreign Words 
 
 (§§ 119-120). 
 Chap. IL Declension of Adjectives (§§ 121— 139) ' 47 
 
 A. Srong Adjectives (§§ 122—131). 
 
 B. Weak Adjectives (§132). 
 
 C. Declension of Participles (§§ 135- 13.0). 
 
 D. Comparison of Adjectives (§§ 135—1.39). 
 
 Chap. IIL Numerals (§§ 140—149) ........... 54 
 
 Chap. IV. Pronouns (§§ 150—166) 56 
 
 Chap. V. Conjugation (§§ 167—200) .......... GI 
 
 L Strong Verbs (§§ 169^182). 
 
 II. Weak Verbs (§§ 183-195). 
 
 III. Irregular Verbs (§§ 196—209). 
 
 Chap. VL Particles (§§ 210— 219) 80 
 
 Appendix. Sources. Editions, Grammatical and Lexical Aids 
 
 (§§220—222) 8'3 
 
 Selections for Keadiiig 86 
 
 Glossary 103 
 
Alibreyiations. 
 
 altd. Gr., Altdeutsche Grammatik. 
 an. v., anamalous verb. 
 A.-S., Anglo-Saxon. 
 
 Beitr., Paul imd Braune's Beitriige zur deiitschen Spraclje itnd Litteratur. 
 et al., and elsewhere, 
 et seq., and the following, 
 f. w., foreign word. 
 0. H. G., Old High German. 
 0. N., Old Norse. 
 0. S., Old Saxon, 
 pret.-pr. v., preterit present verb, 
 pr. n., proper name, 
 w. v., weak verb. 
 
 Zs. fda., Zeitschrift fiir deutsches Alterthnm. 
 Zs. fdph., Zeitschrift fiir deutsche Philologie. 
 Words marked with * are supposed words. 
 
 Such abbreviations as pret, for preterit, nom. for nominative, and others, 
 are obvious. 
 
 Page 2, 
 
 § 1, n-2, 
 
 ,1 6, 
 
 S 10, 
 
 « 8, 
 
 !^ 14, n. 1. 
 
 „ 11, 
 
 i 21, n. 1, 
 
 , 13, 
 
 I 25, 
 
 « 14, 
 
 §• 28, 
 
 « 16, 
 
 1 =^0- 
 
 , 18, 
 
 § 37, 
 
 „ 18, 
 
 1 38, 
 
 Page li). 
 
 § 40, n. 1, 
 
 , 19, 
 
 § 41, 
 
 „ 25, 
 
 § 61, n. 1, 
 
 .„ 31, 
 
 § 74, D. 1, 
 
 Page 32, 
 
 f 78 (c) 
 
 S 87, 
 
 „ 36, 
 
 „ 40, 
 
 § 101- 
 
 „ 48, 
 
 § 122, 
 
 „ 53, 
 
 S 137, 
 
 . 60, 
 
 § 164, 
 
 , «1, 
 
 § 167, 
 
 , 67, 
 
 t? 176, n. 4, 
 
 „ ■73, 
 
 1 189, n. 1, 
 
 „ 80, 
 
 § 212, 
 
 Page 83, 
 
 § 220 (1), 
 
 Corrections. 
 
 line 4, read before and behind, not or. 
 
 „ 11, speech for ,speach. 
 
 „ 1, for preceded read followed. 
 
 , 3, for Hanpt read Hjupt. 
 
 „ 4, delete ( ). 
 
 „ 5, delete as intermediates. 
 
 , 3, Increase for increasse. — § 33. 1. 3, AU/oi- AUe 
 6, to for tho. 
 
 „ 1, discharging for discharching. — 1.4, thereby 
 for hereby, 
 line 1, proper for propre. 
 
 „ 7, read decline for nigh. 
 
 „ 2, omit for ommit. 
 
 „ 1, developed for developped. — n. 2, 1. 5, read 
 w8J>s for w6ds. 
 line 3, read medial for initial. 
 
 „ 2, read has for have. 
 
 „ 1, 101 for 161. — number for numbre. 
 
 „ 11, passed for past. 
 
 „ 2, read suffixes for suffix. 
 
 „ 5, read form for from. 
 
 „ 4, occurring for occuring. 
 
 „ 1, The for Te. 
 
 „ 2, read they for it. 
 
 , 1 , developed for developped. — 1. 2, degrees for 
 
 line 5, speech for speach. 
 
PHONOLOGY. 
 
 CHAP. I. LETTERS. 
 
 § 1. The monuments of the Gothic language have been 
 handed down in a peculiar alphabet whose inventor, according 
 to Grecian' ecclesiastic writers, was Ulfilas. The Gothic al- 
 phabet, however, is not entirely a new creation, but Ulfilas 
 took, for foundation, the Greek alphabet which he accomodated 
 to the state of the Gothic sounds, increasing it by several signs 
 from the Latin alphabet, and, in a few cases, availing himself 
 also of the runic alphabet. Of the Greek alphabet he also 
 retained the order and the value of numbers. The Gothic 
 alphabet is now sufficiently represented by the Latin one. In 
 the following we give in the first line the original Gothic 
 characters, in the second their numerical value, in the third 
 the transcription of the Gothic characters by Latin letters 
 which latter we shall henceforth employ exclusively. 
 
 A 
 
 B 
 
 r 
 
 di 
 
 e 
 
 u 
 
 z 
 
 h 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 a 
 
 b 
 
 g- 
 
 d 
 
 e 
 
 q 
 
 z 
 
 h 
 
 P 
 
 U 
 
 R 
 
 A. 
 
 n 
 
 N 
 
 Q 
 
 [I 
 
 n 
 
 M 
 
 10 
 
 20 
 
 30 
 
 40 
 
 50 
 
 60 
 
 70 
 
 80 
 
 90 
 
 i 
 
 k 
 
 1 
 
 m 
 
 n 
 
 J 
 
 u 
 
 P 
 
 — 
 
 Brauue 
 
 , Goth. 
 
 grammar. 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
2 Phonology. Chap. I. 
 
 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 
 r s t w f ;( li' — 
 
 Note 1. Of these signs one (i, 10) is represented by two forms. 
 The i without dots occurs oftener, the i with dots stands at the beginning 
 of a word and in the middle of a word after a vowel sign, i. e. when it 
 begins a syllable by itself and does not form a diphthong \\ith the prece- 
 ding vowel, e.g., fra'ilip (^ fra-itip). In transcription i is employed 
 throughout. 
 
 Kote 2. Two signs taken from the Greek alphabet, the episema 
 koppa (90) and sampi{QOO), are without any phonetic value, but serve 
 only as numeral signs. — The letters, when denoting numerals, are marked 
 by a horizontal stroke above, or by dots before or behind them: ib or 
 ■ib- = 12. 
 
 Note 3. In some cases the transcription of the Gothic signs is 
 fluctuating, v is quite often written instead of tv (§ 3!t, n. 1); — for the 
 simple signs q and Iv are used: lev or gu (for g § 59, n. I), hr or tv (for 
 Iv § 6.3); — for p which had been adopted from the Norse-A.-S. alphabet, 
 also th is used (§ 71, n. 1). 
 
 Note 4. The Gothic monuments show only a few abbreviations; 
 the holy names, gup, frauja, iesus, iristus, are always abbreviated. The 
 abbreviations in the latter case are expressed by a stroke above them, 
 and are in our texts usually written in full. E. g. g]^ = gup, fa, fins = fraujft, 
 fraujins. 
 
 Note 5. The Goths had already before Ulfilas the Germanic runic 
 letters. The names of these letters were also made use of for the new 
 signs. The Gothic letters together with a few Gothic words and alphabets 
 have been handed down to us in a Salzburg-Vienna manuscript of the 
 9. century: W. Grimm, Wiener Jahrbiicher der Literatur 43, p. 4. 
 et seq. Massmann, Haupts Zeitschrift I. p. 296 et seq. — The form 
 of the names, however, is very corrupt. As to this, comp. especially 
 A. Kirchhoff, das gotische Eunenalphabet, 2. edit., Berlin 1854; 
 J. Zacher, das gotische Alph-abet Vulfilas und das Eunen- 
 alphabet, Leipzig 1855. 
 
 § 2. Of the 27 signs two being only numeral signs, are 
 dropped (§1, n. 2), a third, the x, is retained only in Greek 
 foreign words, especially in the name Christies, and it denotes 
 no Gothic sound. Hence there remain 24 signs for simple 
 sounds, whose phonetic value is to be established. These are: 
 
Letters. 3 
 
 a) Consonant signs: 
 pbfmw|td|'sznlr|kqghluj. 
 
 b) Vowel signs : 
 a e i u, and 
 
 c) The combinations of two vowel signs: 
 ei iu ai au. 
 
 For the establishing of the pronunciation of these signs 
 the following means are before us: 1) The Gothic alphabet is 
 originally the Greek; hence, the pronunciation of the Greek 
 letters, as that held in the 4'^ century, is also to be taken 
 for that of the Gothic letters so long, as we have no proof 
 to the contrary. 2) The use of the numerous Greek foreign 
 words and proper nouns by Ulfilas. 3) The transcription of 
 the Gothic proper nouns in Latin documents and by Latin 
 authors of the 4* — 8"" centuries. 4) The testimony of the 
 cognate Germanic languages. 5) Phonetic mutations and gram- 
 matical examples in the Gothic language itself enable us to 
 draw conclusions as to the nature of the sounds. 
 
 Note 1. Concerning the pronunciation of the Gothic, comp.Wein- 
 gaertner, die Aussprache des Gothischen zur Zeit des Ulfilas, 
 Leipzig 18.58; Fr. Dietrich, uber die Aussprache des Goti- 
 schen wiihrend der Zeit seines Bestehens, Marburg 1862; for 
 the consonants especially Paul, zur Lautverschiebung, Beitragel. 
 p. 147 et seq. 
 
 Note 2. An old testimony for the Gothic pronunciation in the 
 Salzburg-Vienna MS. 
 uuortun otan auar euangeliu titer lucam 
 
 waurjjun u))]7an afar aiwaggeljo \>a,hh Lokan 
 
 uuorthun auar thuo iachuedant iachuatim 
 
 waur]7un afar ]?o jah quej^un 
 
 ubi dicit . genuit .j. ponitur ubi gabriel .g. pcnunt et alia his siin ubi 
 aspiratione . ut dicitur gah libeda jah libaida diptongon ai pro e longa 
 p ch jc ponunt. — Comp. § 1, n. 5, and for explanation especially Kirch- 
 hoff p. 20 et seq. 
 
 CHAP. II. THE VOWELS. 
 
 § 3. The Gothic a signifies as a rule the short «- sound 
 [as in Germ. Mann]. 
 
4 Phonology. Chap. I. 
 
 Note 1. Foreign words and names, for example; Annas, 'Avvag; 
 Akaja, kxai'a ; barbarus, ^dg^a^og; aggilus, ayyelog; karkara, eaxcer; 
 lukarn, lucema; Eafarnaum, xaneQvaovii. 
 
 Note 2. Gothic names.: Athanaricus , Ariaricus , Amalafrigda 
 (Ammian). 
 
 § 4. The short a is frequent both in stem -syllables and 
 in inflection. 
 
 Examples: a) Stem-syllables: agis, terror; aljis, alius; tagr, 
 tear; aha, aqua; fadar, father; aJan, to grow; hafjan, to heave; 
 saltan, to salt ; haldan, to hold ; rvaldan, to rule. — ahtau, octo ; 
 hapar, uter ; atvistr, sheep-fold (0. H. G. atvi, ovis) ; bandi, fet- 
 ter; barn, child; saggws, cantus; all preterits of the III. — V. 
 ablaut* -series: bar, I bore; hlaf, stole; band, bound; gaf, 
 gave, etc. 
 
 b) Inflections : daga (dat. sing., § 90) , maurda (n. a. pi., 
 § 93), giba (n. a. s., § 96), guma (n. s., § 107), hairtbna (n. a. pi., 
 § 109); — bUndamma, blindana, blinda, hlindata (strong adj., 
 § 123); — imma, ina, ita, ija, meina (pron., § 150 et seq.); — 
 nima (1. s. pres. ind.); nimaima, nimairva, nimaina (1. pi., du. ; 
 3. pi. optat.); haitada (medio-passive, § 170); sdkida (weak pret., 
 § 184); — adverbs: -ba (e. g. glaggrvuba), neha, inna, and, 
 tvaila, etc. 
 
 Note 1. Apocope of an unaccented a before enclitics: pat-ist, 
 pat-ei, pan-uh, pamm-uh, pan-ei, pamm-ei, kar-ist — Also frSt and 
 fritum (pret. of fra-itan, to consume. (§ 176, n. 3). 
 
 Note 2. For a in the diphthongs ai, au, see §§ 21. 25. 
 
 § 5. In a few eases a is also equivalent to long a [as in 
 Engl, father]. (Comp. Holtzmann, Altdeutsche Gramma- 
 tik I, 3 et seq.). 
 
 a) In foreign words: Silbanus (Silvanus), aur&li (orale), 
 spaikul&tur (speculator) ; Peilatus etc. ; 
 
 b) in the following Gothic words : fahan, to catch (0. H. 
 G. fAhan), hahan, to hang (0. H. G. h&han) , pahta (Pret. of 
 pugkjan, to think) ; brdhta (pret. of. briggan, to bring) ; gafdhs 
 a haul; faurhah, curtain; gahahjo, coherently; gahts, a going. 
 — In all these words ah stands for original anh. To this 
 belong probably pdhd, clay; unrvdhs, blameless. 
 
 *) For the meaning of this word, see remark on page 15. 
 
The Vowels. 5 
 
 e 
 
 § 6. The sign e always signifies a long vowel, i. e. a« 
 close e being very near to the sound of i [like a in Engl. name\. 
 
 Note 1. In Greek words ri is regularly represented by ^; e.g., 
 Gabriel; Etfas, aikkUsjd, Krita; — bnt a few tim6s silso i: Naen, Naiv; 
 Tykekus, Tvxcuog; ailde, sX(oL; and lastly f, as In Jared, 'lagsd. 
 
 Note 2. In Gothic names Latin writers first employ e for Gothic 
 S: SigismSres, Gelimir, BeccarM; but also already at an early period i 
 which since the 7. century has been used alone; e.g., Theodemtr, Valanur 
 (Comp. Dietrich, p. 62 et seq.). 
 
 § 7. Gothic e (corresponding regularly to 0. H. G. and 
 0. S. d) is found: 
 
 a) In reduplicated verbs, in part with the ablaut*) d (§§ 
 179. 181): gretan, Ulan, sUpan. b) In the plural preter. of the 
 IV. and V. ablaut-series : setum (from sitan, to sit), nSmum (from 
 niman, to take), t&mun (from timan, to behoove), Stum (Han), and 
 in the sing. pret. ; fret (Luke XV, 30). c) In derivations from 
 the verbal stems given under (b); e. g., andanems, agreeable; 
 andanem, a receiving ; gatemiba, becoming ; uzeta, manger, d) In 
 other words , like j&r, year ; qSns, wife, woman ; mena, moon ; 
 lekeis, physician; werjan, to preach; manaseps, seed of man, 
 world, etc. e) In formative syllables : fuheps, joy ; awepi, flock 
 of sheep ; azets, easy ; 2. pers. pret. of weak verbs, -des {nasides 
 § 174). f) Final: In the termination of the gen. plur. ; e. g., 
 dage; in monosyllabic instrumentals, he, pe; in paiiicles and 
 adverbs, as srve^ unte, hidre, bisunjane, lastly in the datives, 
 hammeh, harjammeh, ainumme-hun (Comp. §§ 163 — 66). 
 
 Note 1. i before vowels appears as at, see §22. 
 
 Note 2. ei for e is quite' often found in the Gospel of St. Luke; 
 e.g., qeins {:=qSns), faheid {=fahSd), fraleitais (= fraUtais), Luke II. 
 5, 10, 29; afleilan, Matth. IX. 6, etc. 
 
 Note 3. Sporadically occurs also e f or S, often in the Gosp. of 
 St. L.; e. g., b'lrusjos, Luke 11. 41 ; qipeina VIII. 56, IX. 21; tatvidXdeina 
 VI. 11; duatsnXrvun, Mk. VI. 54. 
 
 Note 4. On the contrary also e occurs in place of i and ei (§ 10, 
 n.5; §17,n. 1). 
 
 § 8. From this e must be separated the e in some Gothic 
 words which corresponds to 0. H. G. ea, ia (not^): her, here; 
 Kreks, Greek; fera, region, side; mes, table, dish. 
 
 *) See remark on page 15. 
 
6 Phonology. Chap. 11. 
 
 i 
 
 § 9. i regularly denotes the short vowel i [as in Engl, in], 
 while the corresponding long i is expressed by ei (§ 16). 
 
 Note 1. This / corresponds to Greek /, only exceptionally does it 
 stand for Greek ij which is generally expressed by e; e. g., Aunisimus, 
 'Ovrioiiiog ; Bipania, Brj9-avia. 
 
 Xotc 2. The / in Gothic words denotes the long sound, when it 
 is incorrectly employed for e (Comp. § 7, n. 3). 
 
 § 10. The Gothic /, from a historical point of view, is of 
 two kinds: In it two originally separated sounds which, from 
 a purely Gothic standpoint can no longer be distinguished, 
 have coincided. 
 
 1) Gothic / = Early Germanic e (0. H. G. c; — 0. H. G. 
 (■ before n, m + eonson., and before i following); e. g., in the 
 present tense of the verbs of III. — V. ablaut-series (§§ 32 — 34) 
 niman, 0. H. G. neman; giban, 0. H. G- ffeban; giba, 0. H. G. 
 giiba] bindan, 0. H. G. bint an; itan, to eat; midjis, medius; 
 hlifan, to steal; swistar, 0. H. G. swester; fidtvor, four; gifts, 
 gift; qiss, speach; paiiic. pret. of the V. ablaut-series: gibans, 
 Hans, lisans, wigans, qipans. 
 
 2) Gothic i = Early Germanic i (0. H. G. i) ; e. g., lists, 
 stratagem; fisks, fish; /*, he; wissa, I knew; skritnan, to be 
 rent, torn ; plur. pret. and part. pret. of the verbs of the I. ab- 
 laut-series (§ 30): bilim, bitans (from beitan), stigun, stigans 
 (from sieigan), lipun, lipans (from leipan). 
 
 Jsote 1. Final i stands in ni, hi, si, hiri; in the nominatives of 
 fern. and. neiit. /-stems: bandi, band; kuni , kind; in ace, voc. of the 
 masculines: hari; 3. sing. opt. preter., nimi. This iinal i appears as j, 
 when it becomes medial (§ 45). 
 
 Note 2. Final i before a following i cf an enclitic word is elided 
 in nis {= ni-ist), sei (= si-ei), niba (ni-iba). 
 
 Note 3. Every i before h and r is broken to ai (Comp. § 20). 
 
 Note 4. ij is found in ija, cam; prija, tria; frijan, to hate; frijdn, 
 to lo^•e;' sijum, we are; kijans, germinating, and others. For ij also 
 (but rarely) simple i is used: ftan, slum, etc. — very frequently j is 
 omitted only in friapwa (besides frijaptvd) love. 
 
 Note 5. Sometimes e is employed for i; e.g., tisdrebi, Mc. V. 10; 
 seneigana, I. Tim. V. 1. 
 
The Vowels. 7 
 
 
 
 § 11. The sign o in Gothic always denotes long o, i. e. 
 a close near to ^ [as in Engl. note]. 
 
 Xote I. In Greek words o corre.sponds regularly to m, rarely to 
 o; e.g., Makidonja, MaxsSovla; it also takes the place of ov: lodas, 
 'lovdag, Luke III. 26. 
 
 Note 2. o in Gothic words often stands for (short) u (§ 14, n. 3). 
 
 § 12. in Gothic {= 0. H. G. uo) is frequent, e. g., 
 bropar, brother; flodus, flood, ioka, beech; frops, wise. 
 
 In the pret. of the VI. ablaut-series (§ 35) and of the i- o- 
 series (§ 36): bl, libf, bg; plur. blum, hbfum, bgum; lailbt, 
 lailbtum, saiso. In terminations; e. g., n. pi. gibbs, dagbs ; w. 
 V. II. salhbn; final, in genit. pL, gibb, tuggbnb; nom. sing. 
 tuggb, liairtb. Pronouns: ho, pb, so, Jvanb-h, ainnb-hun, 
 harjanb-h. Verb, salbb. 
 
 Note t. For d we find sometimes u: gahroliida (from kruldn), he 
 is crushed, Luke XX. IS; fcht&dun, they feared (from og), Mark. XL 32. 
 
 Note 2. In some words <J before vowels is changed into aM,"§ 26. 
 
 Note 3. Change from o to « in the inflection oi fan, gen. funins. 
 Concerning this and other relations between o and u, compare Kluge, 
 Beitrage VI. 377 et seq., and Sievers VI. 504. 
 
 U 
 
 § 13. The sign u in Gothic denotes both a short [as in 
 Engl. put\ and a long vowel [as in Engl. rude\\ but short u 
 is more frequent than long ii. 
 
 Note 1. M in foreign words takes regularly the place of Greek ov. 
 It often stands also for Greek o: didbulus, didfioXog (and diahaulus); 
 apaiislulus (and apaustaulus): paintekusle, ntvxijxoaxrj. 
 
 Note 2. u for u rare (§ 12, n. 1), u for du (§ 25, n. 3). 
 
 * 
 
 § 14. Short u is very frequent in Gothic. 
 
 Examples: a) juk, yoke; sunns, son; drus, fall; us- 
 drusts, a falling; frcdusis, lost; lusnan, perish; jus, you; — 
 in plur. pret. and partic. of the verbs of the II. series (§ 31) ; 
 e. g., gulum, gutans, lusuin, lusans; — in terminations of subst. 
 of the M-decl., e. g., handus, handu; final, e. g., in pu, thou; 
 nu, now; -u, an interrogative particle. 
 
 b) wulfs, wolf; wulta, wool; gaqumps, council, synagogue; 
 gulp, gold ; . srvumfsl, pond ; Tiund, 100 ; sibun, 7 ; taihun, 10 ; 
 
8 Phonology. Chap. II. 
 
 fulls, full; un-, privative prefix; in the plur. pret. and part, 
 pret. of the verbs of the III. series (§ 32) : hundum, bundans, 
 part. pret. of the verhs of the IV. series (§ 33): numans, 
 stulans. 
 
 hrukans, broken; us-hruknan, to be broken oif; trudan, to 
 tread, pailic. trudans; snutrs, wise. 
 
 Note 1. u, when preceded by a vowel or _;, becomes rv: kniu, 
 genit. knitvis; skadus, shadow; skadmeins, shading; skadmjan; to shadow 
 (comp. § 42). 
 
 Note 2. Before h and r every u is broken to au; comp. § 24. 
 
 Note 3. u is eight times (mostly in Luke) represented by o; e. g., 
 lauhmoni, lightning, Luk. XVII. 24; sunjos , sons, L. XVI. 8; ushofon, 
 Luke XVIL 13; aimmihun, L. VIII. 43; faiho, cattle, Mk. X. 23. 
 
 Note 4. For u sometimes au is found in the terminations of the 
 tt-decl., e. g., siinaus (n. sing.) L. IV. 3; comp. § 105, n. 2. 
 
 § 15. ^ is certainly long in a) diXho, dove; rilna, mystery; 
 rUms , room, roomy; *m{ll (in faii,rmiJi,ljan , to bind up one's 
 mouth, to muzzle); hrilps, bride; hiJis, house; skiira, shower; 
 ■dhlrvo, morning-time; ilhteigs, Hhtiuffs, timely; hlAtrs, pure, clear; 
 /"His, foul; mMs soft (in m&kamddei); pAsundi, 1000; brMJan, 
 to need, use; {brdhta, adj. brtiks); IMan, lock (§ 173, n. 2); 
 hrilkjan, to crow (See Beitrage VI. 379); iit, out {iita, etc.). 
 
 b) Through the omission of n : pAhta (prefer, of pugkjan, 
 to think); pMtuf, conscience; adj. pHhis, hMrus, hunger; 
 j&hiza (from juggs, young) disciple. 
 
 Note 1. sMs, sweet, probably from *sw6ts; but instead oi fid&r-, 
 4, in compounds (besides fidwdr), we should rather write fidur-, with 
 short u (Comp. § 141, n. 1). 
 
 Note 2. In R&ma, Home; R&mdneis , a Koman, m stands for 
 Latin o. 
 
 Note 3. o is found for u only in dhteigu, 11. Tim. IV. 2, Cod. B 
 (= ahteigd A). 
 
 Note 4. For t't before vowels to au, see § 26b). 
 
 ei 
 
 § 16. The sign ei stands for long i [like ee in Engl, bee], 
 following the Greek which at the time of Ulfilas likewise gave 
 ei the sound of i. 
 
 Note 1. In Greek words ei stands commonly for (, but also for si, 
 and sometimes for rj. 
 
 Note 2. For ei in place of Gothic e, see § 7, n. 2. 
 
The Vowels. 9 
 
 § 17. In Gothic words ei occurs in stem-syllables in the 
 pres. of the verbs of the I. series (§ 30): beilan, to bite; steigan, 
 to mount; it interchanges in the inflection of these verbs with 
 ai and i. 
 
 Other examples: heila, time; eisarn, iron; leipus, (fruit-) 
 wine; leihts, light; weihs, holy; skeirs, clear. Pronouns; weis, 
 we; meins, peins, seins; — very frequent in formative and in- 
 flective syllables ; e. g., adj. in -eigs (mahteigs) ; in -eins (aiweins, 
 eternal); nomina actionis in -chj* {laiseins, doctrine); nom. gen. 
 sing, of the masc. stems : hcdrdeis, herd ; laisareis, teacher ; and 
 opt. pret nemeis, etc.; final, in feminines in ei: managei (§ 113); 
 imperatives, sdkei^ etc. (§ 186); relative particle ei (§ 157) and 
 the combinations formed with it. 
 
 Note 1. Quite often occurs the sound ei expressed by d, e.g., 
 wthsa, Mk. VIII. 26, 27; aki. Gal. n. 14; izS, Mk. IX. I ; Luke VIII. l."}, 
 15, et al. 
 
 Note 2. ei for in occurs in the rare seiteina, II. Cor. XI. 28 (from 
 sinteins, daily; sinteind, always). 
 
 lU 
 
 § 18. The Gothic iu is pronounced i 4- w, so that i forms 
 the syllable, u being consonant; hence, iu. 
 
 Note 1. In Gothic words Latin writers render iu by eu, eo: Theu- 
 des, Thetidicodo, Theodorictis. 
 
 Note 2. iM is dissyUahic in sium (§ 10, n. 4), niu (interrog. particle 
 = ni-u, § 216); thus i-u. 
 
 § 19. iu is a normal present vowel of the II. series (§ 31): 
 biugan, bow ; biudan, ofl"er ; it interchanges in these verbs with 
 au, u. — In other words, for instance, piuda, people; dius, 
 animal; liuhap, light; diups, deep; sinks, sick; niujis, new; 
 niun, nine; iup, upwards; — iu does not occur in formative 
 and inflective syllables, except in the rare dhtiugs (§ 15). 
 
 Note 1. In kniu, knee; iriu, tree; qius, living, u is taken to the 
 following syllable (as tv), as soon as these words become dissyllabic by 
 inflection: knituis, iriwis, qimis; eomp. § 42. 
 
 ai 
 
 The sign ai in Gothic stands for two etymologically, and 
 certainly also phonetically, difierent sounds. 
 
10 Phonology, unap. ii. 
 
 § 20. I. The short vowel at [like a in Engl. /"at]. — 
 ai is employed in Grothic to denote a short, open e- sound. 
 For the sake of distinction grammarians following Grimm's 
 example, put an accent on the i (ai). To Gothic at corresponds 
 in 0. H. G. and in the other Geimanic languages short e or /. 
 The short e- sound represented by ai occurs: 1) Before h (/r) 
 and r which sounds change every short / into e (ai) (§ 10, 
 n. 3). E. g., airpa, earth; wairpan, to throw; balrhts, bright; 
 faihu, cattle; maihstus, dung; raihts, inght; taihun, 10; saikan, 
 to see; paihum, plur. pret. (of peihan, to grow). 2) In redu- 
 plicated syllables (§ 178) haihald, aiaik etc. 3) In some single 
 words: baitrs, bitter; maila (= 0. H. G. wela), well; aippau 
 {= 0. H. G. eddo), or ; and perhaps also in the pronoun jains, 
 that one {= 0. H. G. jener). 
 
 Note 1 . The law for the transition of i to ai before h, r (so-called 
 breaking) is almost without exception, and, likewise, holds good for the 
 i which is common to all Germanic languages, and for the specially Gothic 
 i (§ 10). i is retained before h and r in: nih, neque (=: ni uh), hiri, 
 come!; du. hirjats; plur. hirjip (§ 219), and in the rare forms: sihu, 
 victory, I. Cor. 15, 37 (a gloss, instead oi sigis); the related, probably 
 corrupted, form parihis (adj. gen. sing.), not yet fulled (= new, said of 
 cloth), Mt. IX. 16. 
 
 Note 2. Not every ai before h, r is ai; it can also be the old 
 diphthong. E. g., pdih (pret. = rais) [But pluT. paihum (= riswn) § 30]; 
 dih. I have aihts , property; iidihs , one-eyed; dir, early; (0. II. 6. ^r); 
 sdir, sorrow (0. H. G. *^r), ^«!r«, sting; dirus, messenger. Whether di 
 or ai is to be read, may in most cases be inferred from the other Ger- 
 manic languages. 
 
 Note 3. Latin orthography expresses ni in Gothic names by e. 
 E. g., Krmanaricus = Gothic *Airmanareiks ; Ermenbcrga — Gothic *Air- 
 minbairga. 
 
 § 21. II. The old diphthong ai [like i in Engl. fine]. 
 By far the greater number of the Gothic ai» express a di- 
 phthongal sound occurring "in 0. H. G. as ei or e , in 0. S. as 
 e, in 0. N. as ei. In fact the Goths even at the time of 
 Ulfilas seem to have pronounced this ai as a + i. For this 
 ai we employ Grimm's sign di, whenever it is likely to be 
 confounded with ai) 
 
 Examples of the diphthongal ai (before h, r, comp. § 20, 
 n. 2) : The preterits sing, of the I. ablaut-series (§ 30),. bait, I 
 bit (fi'om beitan) ; staig, I climbed (from steigan) etc. ; ains, one ; 
 
The Vowels. H 
 
 hlaifs, loaf; staiga, path; laisjan, to teach; — haitan, to be 
 called; maitan, to cut; skaidan, to depart; aws, time; — hails, 
 healthy; dails, deal. 
 
 ai appears also in inflective syllables of the III. weak 
 conjng. (§ 191), habais, habaida, etc.; in the opt. pres. nimais, 
 etc.; anstais, gen. sing, i-decl. ; in the strong adj. hUndaizos, 
 etc. (§ 123); — final, as in gibai, anstai (dat. sing.), nimai (3. 
 s. opt.), blindai (dat. sing, f., nom. pi. m. of the strong adj.); 
 — monosyllables: pai (n. pi.), these; tivai, 2; bai, both; waz, 
 woe!. 
 
 Note 1. Latin writers express the Gothic ai predominantly by ai, 
 ei: Dagalaiphus, Gaina, Radagaisus, Gisaleictis (Comp. Dietrich, Ueber 
 die Aussprache, etc.); eils, in the Latin epigramm (Hanpt's Zeit- 
 schrift L 379). 
 
 Note 2. ai and aj interchange in tvai, woe; wai-dSdja, evil-doer, 
 thief; and wuJamSrJan, to blaspheme; aiws , time, to which ajukdups, 
 eternity, belongs. 
 
 § 22. The ai in the reduplicated ablaut-verbs (§ 182) is 
 almost universally taken also as a diphthongal ai: saian, to 
 sow ; tvaian, to blow ; * laia7i, to revile (occurs only in the pret., 
 lailoun, unless faianda, R. 9, 19, is an error for laiandd). But 
 this ai stands etymologically for Gothic e, and it answers also 
 0. H. G. a (not ei!)\ 0. H. G. sd-jan, rva-jan. The diphthong 
 ai before a vowel ought to become aj\ thus, *sajan, wajan. 
 Here phonetically ai perhaps = long «?, i. e. open e which 
 latter represents, when standing before a vowel, the close e 
 (e); thus, saian, rvaian for sean, wean. 
 
 Note 1. Besides the usual saian, saiip etc., also, but rarely, forms with 
 j are found : saijip, saijands, Mk. IV. 14 ; saijip U. Cor. IX. 6, A (= saiipB), 
 Gal. VI. 7, 8, (= saiip B). 
 
 § 23. The fact that the Gothic sign ai may denote both 
 short and long e (a) is evident from its regularly representing 
 Greek sounds. As a rule ai = e, for example in aikklesjo, 
 ExxXfjola; Aileisabaip, "EXida^Ex ; Baiailzaibul, BseX^e^ovX; 
 GainnSsaraip , rsvvTjaaQer ; likewise = ai (i. e. ce) : Idumaia, 
 'l6ov(iala; Haibraius, 'E^Qalog; hairaisis, oHqeoi^, etc. 
 
 Note 1. Gothic ai corresponding to Greek ri is exceptional; E.g., 
 Hairodiadins, gen. belonging to nom.'Hpturft'ae, Mk. VI. 17; Neikaiidai- 
 mus (Skeir. 52), NixoSfjfiog (otherwise written Nikaudemus). 
 
12 Phonology. Oiiap. ii. 
 
 au 
 
 Also Gothic au stands (like ai) for historically and pho- 
 netically different sounds. 
 
 § 24. I. The short vowel au [like Engl, o in not]. — 
 ail in Gothic denotes a short open o- sound. In this case it 
 is represented in grammatical writings by au in order to di- 
 stinguish it from the diphthong au. To Gothic aii corresponds 
 or u in 0. H. G. and in the other Germanic languages. 
 
 aii, in Gothic words stands before h and r. It has de- 
 veloped from M which, when standing before those sounds, is 
 always ^^broken,, to b. 
 
 Examples : waurms, worm ; ha'Arn, horn ; baiHrgs, (0. H. G. 
 burg), city; maurd, word; waurpum, plur. pret. of ivairpan, to 
 throw (Comp. § 32) ; sauhts, sickness (0. II. G. suht) ; daiihtar, 
 daughter; auhsa, ox; laikhum, pret. plur. of tiuhan (§31); bauhta, 
 pret. of bugjan, to buy. 
 
 Note 1. The use of flii before other sounds is entirely exceptional, 
 and Its correctness is doubtful. Thus in aufto, perhaps (also once ufld, 
 Jit. XXVII. 1)4) ; bisauljan to sullj ; bisaulnan, to be deliled. Here belongs, 
 according to Holtzmann, also ufbauljan, to puff up (II. Tim. Ill, 4). 
 
 Note 2. a) short u has become aii before h and r without any 
 exception. An apparent exception is the enclitic -uh, and, but here u is 
 owing to a secondary development: it is not found at all after a short 
 accented vowel nor after a long vowel or diphthong; e. g., sa-h, ni-h, 
 pai-h, mitjiiu-h, harjanu-h; u occurs after consonants, and in polysyllables 
 which have dropped a final short a; e. g., hvaz-uh, pammuh (=pamma uh), 
 qipuh {= qipa uh). — Other «s standing before h are long, e. g., pMia 
 (comp. § 15). b) u before ?• is a few times found in unaccented syllables, 
 namely in the foreign words spaikutdiur And paiirpura [SknA paurpaiira); 
 also in the Gothic word fidur- (§ 141, n. 1). The prefix tir- (in urreisan, 
 urruns, etc.) which has developed by assimilation from us-, does not 
 belong here (§ 78, n. 4). 
 
 Note 3. au before k and r has not in every case developed from 
 ti, but may also be the diphthong du, e.g., hatihs, high; Iduh, pret. of 
 tiuhan (but plur. tauhum §31); gdurs, sad, grievous (to which 0. H. G. 
 gdrag belongs). 
 
 Note 4. We wiU have to take the au which occurs in the «-decl. 
 in place of u (§ 14, n. 4) also as au). Comp. also uftd ior'aufld (§ 24, n. 1). 
 
 Note 5. The Greek o is regularly represented by au; e. g., apau- 
 staulus, anoaxoXoq; alabastraun, dkd^aazQov; Barpaulaumaius , BaQ- 
 &oXofiaiO(; ; Pauniius, Jlovrioq. — au^=v in Saur, Svpog; paiirpaura, 
 noQ(pvQa. 
 
The "Vowels. 13 
 
 § 25. II. The old diphthong au [like ou in Engl, house], 
 au, when not standing before h and r (sometimes also before 
 these, § 24, n. 3), is a diphthongal sound to which correspond 
 au, ou or o in 0. H. G., 6 in 0. S., au in 0. J^. (Following 
 G-rimm) we express this sound by du, whenever it is to be 
 distinguished from a± 
 
 Examples: The preterits sing-, of the II. ablaut-series (§31), 
 gaut, I poured (from giutan); laug, I lied, etc.; laugnjan, deny; 
 daupjan, baptize; galaubjan, believe; galaubeins, belief; daupus, 
 death; — aukan, increase; hlaupan, to run; stauf an, smite. — • 
 liaubip, head; augo, eye. 
 
 In the M- declension au occurs in inflections and final: 
 sunaus, sunau; 1. p. sing, opt, nimau, nimjau; 3. s. imper. 
 lausjadau; opt. middle, haitaidau. 
 
 Note 1. au often interchanges with am (comp. § 42); e.g., iaujan 
 pret. tawida, to do: mawi gen. tnaujos, girl; sniman pret. snau, to hasten. 
 
 Note 2. Latin authors express au by au; e. g., Ausita, Austrovaldus, 
 Audericus. 
 
 Note 3. For du often occurs u in the tt-decl.; comp. 105, n. 2. 
 
 § 26. Another au both historically and most likely also 
 phonetically different from the former ones, is found before 
 vowels. 
 
 a) For original b : stauida pret. of stdjan, to judge ; staua, 
 f , judgment ; staua, m., judge ; taut, n., gen. iojis, deed (comp. 
 2^\&!a ■ubiltojis, evildoer, thief; iaujan, tawida, to do); dfmauidai 
 and afdauidai part, pret, „defatigati„ (from * afmdjan SiaA * af- 
 ddjan); sauil n., sun. 
 
 b) For H of the other Germ, languages: trauan (0. H. G. 
 tr&en), to trust, bauan (0. H. G. biian), to dwell, and bnauan, 
 to rub (0. H. G. nUan, 0. N. niia) of which only bnauandans 
 is found (Lu. VI. 1). 
 
 This au is not changed into am before vowels, therefore 
 it must denote a single sound ; it is very likely to be long 
 corresponding to au, and thus a long open o [E. a in fall] distinct 
 from the close sound (which is nearer to ^) denoted by Gothic o. 
 Accordingly, Gothic d, d before a vowel have passed over into 
 au (a). For other explanations, comp. Beitr. VII. p. 152 et seq., 
 VIII. p. 210 et seq. 
 
14 Phonology. Chap. III. 
 
 Note 1. Also Greek w which in other cases is regularly transcribed 
 by o, is represented by au before vowels: Trauada, T^coag; Nauil, 
 Nws; Lauidja, dmiq. 
 
 N o t e 2. d before the vowel u is however found in the pret. forms, 
 laildun, maimditn (from laian, rvaian (§ 182)). 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 § 27. Besides the above discussed vowel signs, also other 
 signs having generally a consonantal value, may discharge the 
 function of vowels. The Gothic /, m, n, r are very often vo- 
 calic, i. e. syllabic, e. g., at the end of words which very often 
 have dropped an original vowel suffix, compensation for which 
 is made by the liquid becoming syllabic. Thus the Gothic 
 has dissyllabic words with vocalic liquids, e. g., akxs (field), 
 fugXs (fowl), laikx^s (token, sign), maipms (gift). 
 
 Note I. The West -Germanic languages have developed a new 
 vowel (0. H. G. fl) from these vocalic liquids; e. g., 0. H. G. akkar, fogal, 
 zeihhan, 0. S. mitSom. 
 
 CHAP. III. VIEW OF THE GOTH. TOCALISM. 
 
 A. PHONETIC SYSTEM. 
 § 28. In the preceding pai-agraphs we have arranged 
 the Gothic vowels according to their written characters. Now 
 they will be an-anged according to the nature of the sounds 
 which are expressed by those characters. We lay down as a 
 basis the natural vowel scale moving as intermediates between 
 the exti'emes i and m in a sevenfold division: 
 i e a a a u. 
 e and o denote here the close e and o lying respectively near 
 i and u; a denotes the open e, a the open o. 
 
 In the following view it will be stated whether each of 
 these stages is present in Gothic and by what character it is 
 expressed. 
 
 i: short i (§ 10). 
 
 long ei (§§ 16. 17). 
 e: short wanting 
 long i (§§ 6-8). 
 
View of the Gothic Vocalism. 15 
 
 a: short ai (§ 20). 
 
 long wanting (comp. however ai. § 22?) 
 a: short a (§§ 3. 4). 
 
 long & (§ 5). 
 a: short au (§ 24). 
 
 long? (perhaps au in § 26). , 
 
 ' o: short (wanting), 
 long 6 (§§ 11. 12). 
 u: shoi-t u (§§ 13. 14). 
 long a (§ 15). 
 Also the diphthongal sounds: 
 
 iu (§§ 18. 19). 
 ai (§21). 
 au (§ 25). 
 
 B. HISTORICAL SYSTEM (ABLAUT -SEEIES). 
 
 § 29. The Gothic vowels regarded from a historico-ety- 
 mological point of view, may he grouped into a number of 
 related vowels. Vowels belonging to any one' of these series 
 may, in formations with the same root, change among them- 
 selves; in the formations of tenses, as also in the verbal and 
 nominal derivations all vowels which belong to the same series 
 may occur , but not such as do not belong to the same series. 
 This change of vowels within a series is called ablaut,*) the 
 series themselves ablaut-series. The ablaut-series are seen 
 most distinctly in the verb. The relation between vowels 
 in the same ablaut-series is not a phonetic but a historical 
 one, its foundation lying without the domain of the Germanic 
 but within that of the comparative Indo- Germanic grammar. 
 Here follow the ablaut-series, as they occur in the verbal in- 
 flection (comp. § 172 et seq.). 
 
 § 30. I. Series: 
 
 ei ai i {ai) i {ai) 
 
 *) English writers have no settled name for this kind of vowel 
 change. Smeel, in his Anglo-Saxon Reader, calls ablaut „gradation„ and 
 umlaut „mutation„, whereas in his , History of English Sounds, he speaks 
 Of , umlaut, and „umlauts,. March uses the terms , umlaut, and „ablaut„ 
 throughout. — I follow his example. — (Transl.). 
 
16 Phonology. Chap. III. 
 
 Examples: reisan (urreisan), rais, risum, risans, to rise; 
 urraisjan, to make to rise, to raise up; urrists f., resurrection; 
 
 — peihan, path, paihum, paihans, to flourish, increasse; — wait, 
 J know, pi. wihan; rveitan, to see; weit-tvdds, witness; lubja- 
 leisei, f., witchcraft; lists, f., cunning; laisjan, to teach. 
 
 Note. The i in this series is the Early Germanic i mentioned in 
 § 10, 2. 
 
 § 31. II. Series : 
 
 iu au u (au) u (a«) 
 
 Examples: giuta, gaut, gutum, gutans, to pour; gulnan, 
 to be poured; liugan, laug, lugum, lugans, to lie; liugnja, m.,- 
 liar; liugn, n., lie; analaugns, secret; laugnjan, to deny; — 
 galaubjan, to believe; gcUaubeins, belief; Hubs, beloved, dear; 
 luho, f., love; hibains, f., hope; — siuks, sick; sauhls, f., sickness; 
 
 — driusan, to fall; drausjan to make to fall; drus, m., fall; 
 driuso, f., slope. 
 
 § 32. ni. Series: 
 
 i (at) a u (au) u {au) 
 The themes of this series always have a double consonsant 
 after the vowel, generally a double liquid, or a liquid (/, m, 
 n, r) with another consonant. 
 
 Examples: bindan, band, bundum, bundans, to hind; band, 
 f., band; bandja, m., prisoner; gabinda, f., band, bond; and- 
 bundnan, to be loosened; gabundi, f., bond; — rinnan, to run; 
 rannjan, to cause to run; runs, m., a run, course; rinnd, f., 
 brook; — wairpan, warp, rvaArpum, roaurpans, to throw; us- 
 waArpa, f., a casting away, an outcast; — pairsan, to be dry 
 (withered); paiirsnan, to wither away; paiirsus, dry, parched; 
 paurstei, thirst; — drigkan, to drink; dragJcjan, to give to trink; 
 dragk, n., a drink; — drugkja, m., drinker; drugkanei, f., drunken- 
 ness; priskan, to thrash; gaprask, n., thrashing-floor; 
 
 Note. The i of this and the following two series is that given in 
 § 10, 1 (= Early Germanic e). 
 
 § 33. IV. Series: 
 
 i {at) a e u (au) 
 AUe stems of this series have simple liquids (/, m, n, r) after, 
 the vowel. 
 
View of the Vooalism. 17 
 
 Examples: niman, nam, nemum, numans, to take; -numja, 
 m., taker; anda-numts , f., a receiving, acceptation; andanSms, 
 agreeable; andanem, n., a receiving; — bairan, bar, berum, 
 baurans, to bear; baur, m., natus; barn, n., child; b&rusj6s, 
 parents; — ga-timan, to behoove, agree; ga-tamjan, to tame; 
 gatimiba fitly. 
 
 Note 1. To this series belong also brikan, hrak, hrikum, hrukans, 
 to break; gabruka, f., fragraent; us-bruknan, to be broken off; brakja, 
 f., strife, struggle. — Also irudan, to tread (§ 175, n. 2). 
 
 § 34. V. Series: 
 
 i (az) a e i (ai) 
 The vowel of the stems of this series is followed by a single 
 consonant, not a liquid. 
 
 Examples; giban, gaf, gebum, gibans , to gi\Q; giba, f., 
 gift; gabei, f., riches; — sitan, to sit; satjan, to set; anda-sSts, 
 abominable; — mitan, to measure; mitdn, to think, reason upon; 
 mitaps, f, measure; itsmel, n., manner of life (conversation); — 
 to be saved; ga-nisun, nasjan, to save; ganists, salvation. 
 
 Note 1. Here belongs also sailiran, sah, sihum, saihans, because 
 hx has the value of a single sound (§ 63, n. 1). 
 
 § 35. VI. Series: 
 
 a ^ 6 6 a 
 
 All stems of this series end in a single consonant. 
 
 Examples: makan, wtk, rvbkum, wakans, to wake; rvaknan, 
 to be awakened; mahtmd, f, watch. — grdban, to grave, dig; 
 grdha, f, hole, pit, graba, £, ditch; — f'rapjan, frtp, to under- 
 stand; frapi, n., understanding; frops, wise, prudent; frbdei, f., 
 understanding; — hafjan, hdf, to heave; -hafnan, to be exalted; 
 haban, to have; ungahobains, f., incontinency; — ■ og, I fear; 
 una gauds, fearless; dgj'an, to frighten; usagjan, to terrify; agis, 
 n.,fear; — sakan, to strive, contend; sakjd, f., strife; sdkjan, to 
 seek; sdkns, {., question, inquiry; unand-soks, irrefutable. 
 
 § 36. Series e 6 (VII. ablaut-series). 
 
 A connection between e and d is found in the so-called 
 reduplicated ablaut-verbs, as in leian, lailot, etc.; saian (= *sean, 
 § 22), saisb, etc. Comp. § 180 et seq. 
 
 Note 1. This series is no longer found in the verbal inflection of 
 the other Germanic languages, but its existence is proved by its occurring 
 in word-formation, for example 0. H. G. {&-. d) IM, f.: I6n, tiion, to do; 
 — kn&an, to know: knut, chnuat, f. kin, race. 
 
 Braune, Goth, grammar. 2 
 
18 Phonology. Chap. IV. 
 
 CHAP. R^ CONSO:PfA]VTS. 
 
 § 37. The consonant siffns whose value and occurrence 
 
 .igu 
 
 we have to discuss here, have already been mentioned in § 2. 
 We divide the sounds discharging the function of consonants 
 into sonorous*) consonants and noise-sounds. Comp. 
 Sievers, Clrundziige der Phonetik p. 40 et seq. According 
 tho this the Gothic consonant signs, w, j, /, tn, n, r , fall into the 
 class of sonorous consonants, the rest into that of noise sounds. 
 
 A. SONOROUS CONSONANTS. 
 
 THE SEMIVOWELS w AND / 
 § 38. w and j are the vowel sounds u and i discharching 
 a consonantal function. Hence in Gothic the change between 
 i and j, u and «', according to their position in the word and 
 the hereby conditioned function of the sounds as vowels or as 
 consonants. The consonantal / and u which in other languages 
 are expressed by the same characters as the vowels i and i<, 
 have special signs in Gothic, j and rv. These sounds are also- 
 termed ^^semi-vowels,, an expression, however, not quite proper. 
 
 w. 
 
 § 39. The sign of the Gotliic alphabet which we represent by 
 w, is, in form and in alphabetic order, the Greek v. This it also 
 represents in Greek foreign nouns, uniformly, for example, 
 Parvlus, IJavloc; Daweid, Aavi6; aimaggeljd, tvajytliov; paras- 
 kaine, jcagaoxtvi]. But Gothic /r is not only employed in the 
 combinations aw, em, in which the Greek v had perhaps at 
 that time already the value of a spirant, but it stands also 
 for simple Greek v with a vocalic function, for example, 
 Smmaion, ^vfiicor; smnagdge, Gvvaymyri; marlwr, fiagrvQ. But 
 in the latter case our transcriptions of the Gothic texts put 
 (obscuring the ti-ue state of affair) y instead of rv (Symaidn, 
 synagdge, martyr. 
 
 *) I have literally rendered the terms „sonore Consonanten, and 
 ,Gerauschlaiite„ by , sonorous consonants, and , noise sounds, , but instead 
 of the former the term , simple voice sounds, may be used as well. In 
 using the term , sonorous, the student must carefully distinguish between 
 the latter and „sonant„. For this see the above cited work of Sievers p. 41, 
 n. 1. — I desire gratefully to record my obligation to Prof Sievers for 
 kindly revising my original remarks on the above mentioned terms. — Tr. 
 
Consonants. 19 
 
 Note 1. In most of the later texts the transcription of the Gothic 
 sign is V, but because of the correspondence in the other Germanic langua- 
 ges, we recommend the use of w (e. g. Gothic rvilja, M. H. G., N. H. G 
 wilte, A.-S. milla, N. E. ntill). 
 
 § 40. In Gothic words we may rightly ascribe to w the 
 phonetic value of the consonantal u {= Engl. m). 
 
 Note 1. Latin writers have commonly rendered tv in propre nouns 
 by uu: Vvilia, Vualamir; but there occurs also frequently Vb: TJbadUa 
 (= Wadila), Obadamirus {= Wadamirs), etc. Comp. Dietrich pp. 77 — 80. 
 
 § 41. Gothic initial tv is frequent, for inst., masjan, to 
 dress; witan. to know; wiljan, to will; wair, man. 
 
 Initial before / and r; e. g., wlits, countenance; wrikan, to 
 persecute; wrohjan, to accuse. 
 
 After the consonants: t, d, p, s; e. g., twai, two; drvals, 
 foolish; pwahan, to wash; stvistar, sister. 
 
 Medial before vowels, for example, awistr, sheep-fold; 
 saiwala, soul; hneirvan, to nigh; siggman, to sing; Mttvd, dawn; 
 talhswd, right hand; nidtva, rust. 
 
 Note 1. The signs q (Arw) and h {liw) are also generally taken as 
 combinations of k and m and h and rv. But the fact is proved that 
 q and h are simple labialised guttural sounds (§§ 59. 63). On the other 
 hand, however, q and Iv in H. G. are treated the same as, for example, 
 Gothic tm, gm, etc. which drop medial m. E. g., Gothic iihtmd, siggrvan 
 = 0. H. G. ilhta, singan; likewise Gothic sigqan, saihan = 0. H. G. sinkan, 
 sehan. This, of course, proves nothing as to the value of the Gothic 
 signs, but establishes the fact, that in Early Germanic the sounds tm, 
 gw, etc. must have been analogous .to kw and hrv. 
 
 § 42. 1) TV remains unchanged after long vowels, diph- 
 thongs, and consonants a) when final, b) before the s of the 
 nominative, c) before/. E.g., lew, n., occasion, opportunity; 
 Tilalrv^ n., grave; waurstw, n., work; b) snaiws, Snow, triggms, 
 ''true, faithful; c) letvjan, to betray; hnaimjan, to abase; skadwjan, 
 to shadow (skadus, a shadow); arwjd, adv., in vain. 
 
 2) In all three cases, however, m becomes u after a short 
 vowel. E.g., a) snau (pret. of sniwan, § 176, n. 2); iriu, tree 
 (gen. trims); kniu, knee (gen. knirvis); b) nans, m., a dead man 
 (g. narvis), plus, servant (gen. pitvis); c) marvi (gen. maujds), 
 girl; gawi (gen. gaujis), country, region; pitvi (piujds), maid; 
 tawida, pres. inf. taujan, to do; straujan, to strew, pret. stra- 
 wida; qiujan, to quicken, pret. qirvida. 
 
 Note 1. Thus a word does not end in aw, im, aws , irvs, except 
 lasiws, weak, which is found only once (II. Cor. X. 10). 
 
 2* 
 
20 Phonology. Chap. IV. 
 
 Note 2. an occurs before _/ in usskamjan, to (re-) awake (I. Cor. 
 XV. 34; 11. Tim. II. 26 (B)), where we would expect au. 
 
 Note 3. Examples for the position of medial w before consonants 
 other than j and s are not found; — before n after a short vowel u is 
 found in qiunan, to become alive (st. qirva-). 
 
 J- 
 
 § 43. The sign / stands regularly for Greek i before 
 vowels in Akaja, ^ix'^''^- Marja, MaQia ; Judas, 'lovdag; Iskar- 
 jbtes, ^laxaQimxtfii, etc. But Gotliic i is also often used for Greek 
 I before vowels, e. g., Iskariotes, Zaclmrias, Gabriel, Judas. — 
 The sign j in Gothic pronunciation has probably the value of 
 the consonantal /, not the sound of the German spirant / 
 
 § 44. a) In Gothic words j stands initially, e. g.Juk, yoke 
 jer, year; ju, already; jus^ you. b) medially after vowels and 
 consonants, but always before vowels, never before consonants. 
 E.g., midjis, medius; lagjati, to lay; niujis, new; frauja, lord; 
 prija, tria; bajops, both, c) ji is contracted into ei after a 
 long close syllable, but is retained after a short syllable and 
 immediately after a. long vowel. This is especially the case 
 in the masculines (and neuters) of stems in -ja (§§ 82. 117); 
 harjis, lojis (doer), but hairdeis, dat. hairdja; furthermore in 
 the I. weak conjugation: sdkja, sokeis, sdkeip, but nasjip, he 
 saves; stdjif), he judges. 
 
 Note 1. Exceptions to this rule under c) § 95. 
 
 Note 2. Only i is often employed for medial ij before vowels. See 
 § 10, n. 4; sporadic j in saijan; see § 22, n. 1. 
 
 § 45. j is never final: In this case it is changed into i; 
 e. g., harjis, ace. hari; marvi, gen. maujds (see § 42, c), taut, 
 deed, gen. tojis. 
 
 Note 1. Change of aj and ai, see § 21, n. 2. 
 
 THE LIQUIDS. 
 1. 
 
 § 46. In Gothic / often occurs initially, medially, and 
 finally. E. g., laggs, long; galai/bjan, to believe; liuhap, light; 
 lauhmuni, lightning; wiljan, to will; aljis, alius; bldma, flower: 
 — double /, as in fill, fell, skin, hide; fulls, full; wulla., wool. 
 
 Note 1. Syllabic I (§ 27), e. g., 'mfugU, fowl, bird; tugg\, luminary, 
 star; tag\, hair; swumfs\, poud, pool; sig\jan, to seal. 
 
 Note 2. Gothic I always corresponds to Greek A. It is interpolated 
 in alahalstraun, akapaaxQov. 
 
Consonants. 21 
 
 § 47. r is equivalent to Greet q, and occurs frequently 
 in Gothic words; e. g., raUits, right; raubon, to rob; bairan, to 
 bear; fidwdr, four. — Double r is rare: qairrus, gentle; and- 
 staiirran, threaten; fairra, far. 
 
 Note 1. Syllabic r (§ 27), e. g., in aAr.9, field; brdpr (dat. sing, of 
 brdpar); figgxs, finger; iag\, tear; hluits, pure; /"fl^r* fair, suitable; maiirpr, 
 murder; huggrjan, to hunger. 
 
 Note 2. Every / before r becomes ai, every m is changed to aA; 
 see §§ 20. 24. 
 
 m. 
 
 § 48. m is found in all positions. E. g. mizdd, f.,' reward; 
 ?nena, m., moon; amsa, m., shoulder; ^t<ma, m., man; final; e. g., 
 nam, I took; in terminations of dat. pi., dagam, etc.; 1. pers. 
 pi., nimam, netnum, etc. — Double m, as in s?vamins, sponge; 
 mamm, n., spot; in the pronominal datives, imma, Uindamma. 
 
 Note 1. Syllabic m (§ 27) in mdipms, gift; bagms , tree. 
 
 n. « 
 
 § 49. Initial n. E. g., nahts, night; niujis, new; w« (negat. 
 particle); medial, as in kuni, n., kin, race; ains, unus; final, as 
 in lauii, n., reward; niun, nine; often in inflection (dat. s. hanin; 
 infinitive, niman; nemun, 3 p. pi. pret., etc.). 
 
 Double M occurs frequently; e. g., brinnan, to burn; spinnan, 
 to spin ; rinnan, to run ; Arawi, I know ; kannjan to make known ; 
 manna, man; brunna, well, mjz is retained when final and before 
 J, but becomes n before other consonants: kant, kunpa (from 
 Aanw) ; rant (2. s. pret. of rinnan) , brunsts (from brinnan), runs, 
 run (belonging to rinnan). 
 
 Note 1. Syllabic n (§27). E.g., anahusns, f., command (-ment); 
 taikns, token, sign; ibns ; even; laugnjan, to deny; smignjan, to rejoice. 
 
 § 50. Before guttural consonants n becomes a guttural 
 nasal. This is denoted in Gothic by g {gg) (see § 67). 
 
 Note 1. The (guttural) nasal disappears before A, and the preceding 
 vowel is compensatively lengthened. See § 5, b and § 15, b. 
 
 B. NOISE SOUNDS. 
 
 LABIALS. 
 P- 
 
 § 51. The sign p answers Greek ut. It is not very 
 frequent in Gothic words, a) Initial p is almost entirely 
 
22 Phonology. Chap. IV. 
 
 wanting in purely Gothic words; the eases in \Yhich it occurs, 
 are either evidently foreign words, or at least etymologically 
 obscure inasmuch as Ave may suspect that they have been 
 borrowed from other languages: pltnsjan, to dance; plats, patch; 
 anapraggan, oppress ; paida, coat, dress; puggs, purse; peikabagms, 
 palm-ti'ee; pund, pound; plapja street (platea); pislikeins, jtiGxt- 
 xog; paurpura, purple. 
 
 b) p, medial and final, is found in purely Gothic words. 
 E. g., slepan, to sleep; greipan, to gripe; h4pan, to boast; skap- 
 jan, to make; hlaupan, to run; diups, deep; n-airpan, to throw; 
 hilpan, to help; skip, ship; iup, upwards. — The initial com- 
 bination sp: sparma, sparrow; spillon, to tell; spinnan, to spin. 
 
 Note 1. pp does not occur. 
 
 Note 2. p is changed into /" before / in: gaskafis, f., creature 
 (from skapjan) ; hofluli, f., glory (from kupan). 
 
 f. 
 
 § 52. Gothic f in foreigia words corresponds to Greek (p. 
 E. g., FiUppus, (plhjcjros; Kajafa, Ka'icKpaq. Latin writers 
 render Gothic f mostly bj^ ph (Dietiich p. 75), e. g., Dagalaiphus, 
 Phaeha. Hence, (iothic f has probably been labial, not labio- 
 dental, as is evident from the Gothic flmf, hamfs. 
 
 § 53. a) Initial / in Gothic words abounds. E. g., folus, 
 foot; fadar, father; flddus, flood; faihu, cattle; fUls, foul; frdps, 
 wise; frius, fi'ost, coldness. 
 
 b) f final and medial is found in but a few words; e. g.. 
 Mi fan, to steal; hafjan, to heave; Mufan, to lament; lofa, m.j 
 palm of the hand; ufar, over; afar, after. Before consonants' 
 e. g., luftus, air; hamfs, maimed; trveifls, doubt; wulfs, wolf; — 
 final, flmf, five; hof (from hafjan); parf, I need. 
 
 N o t e 1 . f final and before nominative s occurs very often for medial 
 b. See § 56. 
 
 Note 2. Medial /"s before t (re) represent b (§56, n. 3), before t 
 also J? (see § 51, n. 2). 
 
 Note 3. ff does not occur. 
 
 b. 
 
 § 54. h corresponds to Greek ^ which it represents in 
 foreign words; e. g., barbarus, ^ag^agoq; Jakob, 'laxco^. The 
 pronunciation of Greek j3 was that of a labial soft spirant 
 
Consonants. 23 
 
 {= Engl. v). (Tothic b had the same pronunciation (== Engl, v) 
 when final after vowels, but initial and medial after conso- 
 nants it denotes the soft stop-sound (Engl. b). 
 
 Note 1. Gothic 6 in Latin foreign words, between vowels, represents 
 Lai. V, after m, however, b: Si/banus, Silvanus; Haubainibair, November; 
 anakumbjan, eumbere. 
 
 Note 2. Gothic b, final and after consonants in Gothic names, is 
 in Latin writers represented by Lat. b, for example, Amala-berga, Hildi- 
 bald, Mbila, but medially between vowels by Lat. v ; e. g., Liuva, Erelieva. 
 Comp. Dietrich p. 71; Paul, Beitr. L 14S et seq. 
 
 § 55. Examples for &: 
 
 a) Initial: bairan, to bear; beilan, to bite; brikan, to break; 
 brukjan, to make use of, to want; llesan, to blow; biudati, to 
 offer; bloma, flower; bropar, brother; boka, letter. 
 
 b) Medial: 1) liuba (w. m. adj.) beloved; galaubjan, to 
 believe; graban, to dig; sibja, relationship; arbi., heir; kalbo, calf. 
 
 2) haubip, head; hlaibis (gen. of hlaifs) bread; sibun, se^en; 
 hdban, to have; skaban, to shave; {bi-)lelban, to remain; liban, 
 to live, biraubon, to rob, bereave; salbon, to anoint. 
 
 Note 1. bb is not found in Gothic words, except in foreign words, 
 e. g., sabbaius. 
 
 § 56. Final b is retained before the s of the nominative 
 and before the t of 2. p. s. pret. only after consonants (/, m, r), 
 after vowels it becomes /. This is only to be understood in 
 the following manner: b after a vowel had a spirant-sound 
 (§ 54) which, when final, is changed into the corresponding 
 hard spirant. But after consonants b, when final and medial, 
 had the value as stop-sound. Thus, ,giban, to give; pret. 1. 3. 
 pers. s. gaf; 2. p. imperat. gif; hlaifs, bread; ace. hlaif, n. pi. 
 hlaihds; — but lomb, lamb; dumbs, dumb; smairban, to wipe, 
 pret. smarb. 
 
 Note 1. To the rule for final / instead of medial b after vowels 
 our texts show a few exceptions, but since the great majority of examples 
 agree with it , the rule is proved valid and is historically founded. It has 
 also a striking analogon in Old Saxon : geian — gaf; lioiio — liof (but lamb). 
 The exceptional cases with b final, 21 in aU, are found only in particular 
 parts of the sources (7 in Luke , 5 in the Thessalonian letters , 4 in the 
 Gospel of St. John, 3 Skeireins, in all the other texts only once each 
 in Mark and Eph.). Therefore, we may refer the anomalous bs to the 
 writers of the respective pieces, who either irom purely orthographic 
 eoiisiderations employed medial bs also finally, or in order to express 
 the pronunciation as it existed at their time, according to which sonants 
 
24 Phonology. Chap. IV. 
 
 were also pronounced finally. The latter supposition is supported by 
 the fact that in the Arezzo document (of the (i* century) Gndiiub is written. 
 
 The exceptions with verbs are rare, only grob Lu. VI. 4s, and gaddb 
 Sk. 42; — forms with /" are found in gaf, gafl , gift (abundantly); once 
 each: ^ro/" (from graban), swaif (from swaibaii), bitai/' (from bileiban), 
 skauf (from skiuban). Accordingly we may, with certainty, regard the 
 form draif as the pret. of dreiban. 
 
 Of nouns only Maif 19 times {Maib 7 times); — ttvalif 12 t. (twalib 3 t.) 
 Accordingly also *ainlif (belonging to ainlibim). 
 
 Furthermore are to be regarded as nominatives: "'stafs , element 
 (only stabim); *laufs, leaf (only i\w.lauf9.uAlaubds)\ '"daufs, deaf (only 
 daubala); *ga>aufs, valuable (only ^«/^M6«»!;na 3 t., ftlugalaubis,galubaim)\ 
 *gadufs, becoming (gadof once, gaddb 4 t.) ; liufs beloved (only in poly- 
 syllables: liubai, Hub/I, liubana, etc.). — lastly as normal forms are to be 
 regarded *piufs {== 0. S. lldof, thief, though the nom. is only accidentally 
 found as jnubs (4 times) besides fnubCis (twice), piubi. 
 
 Note 2. Under this rule there fall also the prepositions af and uf 
 when combined with enchtics, the / becoming b medially: ab-u, ub-uh. 
 In composition, however, /"is retained: af-etja , glutton, uf-aipeis, under 
 an oath. (Comp. us % 7s, n. 4). 
 
 Note 3. An apparent exception is J'firf, I need (instead of parb); 
 cf. plur. paiirbum; but JHirf has real f (!? 53) and is to be kept separate 
 from the plur. with b (grammatical change). The adj. has the correct 
 form, gapaurbs. 
 
 Note 4. In word-formation f occurs before I where in other cases 
 b is found: gifts, f. , gift (comp. gibaii, once, Luke I. 27 fragibtim); 
 paurfts , need, b is common before n: ibns , stibna, daubnan, but the 
 termination ubni, interchanges with ufni, for example, fraistubni, temp- 
 tatioii; but maldufni, power; aflifnan, to remain over (cf laiba, remnant). 
 
 GUTTURALS. 
 k. 
 
 § 57. Gothic k corresponds to Greek x, Lat. c; e. g., 
 Kef as, E7](paq; aikklesjo, ExxXrjoia] laiktjo, lectio. Gothic k in 
 Greek words represents also /; e. g., kwkrazein, Xoga^iv; arkag- 
 gilus, aQxayyeXog. % is seldom retained, always in yrislus 
 (cf. § 2). ' 
 
 Note 1. k, when labialized {kw), has a special sign: q (§ 59). 
 
 § 58. Examples for Ar: a) Initially: kniu, knee; kaiirn, 
 corn; kuni, kin; kcdds, cold; kiusan, choose; kdlho, f., calf, b) 
 Medially; brikan, to break; aukan, to increase; akrs, field; 
 reiks, mighty; mikils, great; waitrkjan, to work; laikan, to leap; 
 rakjan, to sti-etch, reach. Finally: ik, I; mik, me; juk, yoke. 
 
Consonants. 25 
 
 Note 1. /c/f in smakka, fig; sakkus, sack. 
 
 Note 2. In word-formation h takes the place of k before /, for 
 instance, sauhts, sickness (of. sinks); tvahtwd, watch (of. rvakan); hr&hla 
 (pret. of brilkfan), p&hia (cf. pagkjaii). — Since examples are entirely 
 wanting, it is uncertain, whether the 2. pers. pret. of verbs in k (e. g., 
 wakan, aukan, tSkan) takes k or h before the I; thus wdkt or wdht (J). 
 
 q 
 
 § 59. The Gothic sign q does not occur in the Greek 
 alphabet, it had been adopted from the Latin (Q). In Latin 
 words it corresponds to qu {qartus Rom. XVL 23), and it is 
 tolerably certain that its phonetic value is that of Latin qu 
 which denoted a labialized A-sound, the latter being a simple 
 consonant, not forming position. Comp. Collitz, Zeitschrift 
 fiir deutsehe Philologie XII. 481 et seq. 
 
 Note 1. The double sign km {kv) which occasionally occurs for 
 the single sign q, is founded on the perception that in the cognate 
 Germanic languages Gothic q corresponds to a combination of consonants 
 which appears as k immediately followed by a w-sound, and is therefore 
 represented by two signs, in A.-S. by crv, in 0. N. by km, in 0. H. G., 
 N. H. G. by qu. Thus Gothic qipan = A.-S. cmeiian, O.-S. kveb'a, 0. H. G. 
 qtiedan. This, however, does not prove anything as to the phonetic value 
 of Gothic q , although it is possible that its pronunciation was entirely 
 equivalent to that of the N. H. G. qu. — Comp. also § 41, n. 
 
 § 60. Examples for q: qino, wife, woman; '^qitis, plur. 
 qiivai, alive; qairnus, mill; qiman, to come; naqaps, naked; aqizi, 
 axe; riqis, darkness; sigqan, pret. sagq. 
 
 h. 
 
 § 61. Gothic h in Greek words represents the rough 
 breathing (e. g., ffaibraius, 'E^gaTog; HSrddes, "^Hgrndi^q; hut the 
 rough breathing is often disregarded, as in dsanna, maavva). 
 Gothic fi had accordingly, when initial, the value of the mere 
 aspirate. The pronunciation of medial and final h may be 
 supposed to have still been that of the fricative sound (H. G. ch). 
 Comp. the assimilations (§ 62, n. 3) and the breaking (§ 62, n. 1). 
 Also initial h before consonants, hi, hn, hi; Qiw) had probably 
 a stronger sound. 
 
 Note 1. Latin writers render Gothic h by their h, as in Hildibald, 
 Eildericus; but they also ommit it, for example, Ariamirus, eils = hails 
 in the epigramm, Haupt's Zeitschrift I. 579; comp. Dietrich, Aus- 
 spraehe p. 77. 
 
 Note 2. Gothic h labialized {hw), has a special sign: h (§§ 63. 64). 
 
26 Phonology. Chap. IV. 
 
 Note 3. Medial h is sometimes interposed between vowels in 
 foreign names, for example, Johannes, 'laaavvriq; Abraham, Aii{>c<af(. 
 
 § 62. 1) Examples for h: a) Initially: haurn, horn; hana, 
 cock; hair to, heart; hails, salvation (hail); hund, hundred; haf- 
 jan, to heave; — initial combinations: hlaifs, bread; hliicma, 
 m., hearing; hlifan, to steal; hittrs, pure, clean; hlahjan, to 
 laugh; hndiws, low; hrains, clean; hrdpjan, to call; hrot, n., 
 roof. — Medially: faihu, cattle; taihim, ten; teihan, to show, 
 teach; saihs, six; 7iah/s, night; liuhtjan, to shine; ftlhan, to con- 
 ceal; sn-aihra, socer. — c) Finally: jah, and; -iih, and (comp. 
 § 24, n. 2); falh (from filhan); tduh (from tiuhan), etc. 
 
 Note ]. Before h (as before r) i is broken to ai, u to ait; corap. 
 §§ 20 and 24. 
 
 Note 2. Dropping of the nasal before h, with compensation; e. g., 
 fahan (from fanhan), pilhla (from punhia), etc. Comp. §50, n.; §5, b; 
 § 15, b. 
 
 Note 3. Final h in iih (or -/; § 24, n. 2), jah, nth, may be assimilated 
 to the initial sound of the following word. This is seldom found in the 
 Gospels (Cod. argent.) and in Cod. B, and only before particles or pro- 
 nouns beginning with p; bnt frequently, and also before other consonants, 
 in Cod. A and Skeir. ; e. g., wassuppan, (= rvasuh pan, but there was) 
 Mk. I. (j; summaippan {= sumaih-pan, but some) Mt. XXVI, 27; sijaippan 
 (= sijaih-pan, but it shall be) Mt. V. 37; jappi (= jah-pt, and if); 
 nipimn (= nih-pan, and not); — before other consonants in A: jalliban 
 (= jahUban, and to live) II. Cor. I. S; jaggairaua (= jah galraua , and 
 I trust) Rom. XIV, U; jaddu (=jah du, and to) II. Cor. II. 16; jabbrusts 
 (= jah brusfs) II. Cor. VII. 16; nukkant (= nuh kani doest thou know 
 now?) I. Cor. VII. 10; exceptionally also in cod. argent., but only in Luke: 
 janni (:= jah ni) Lk. VII. 32; nissijai {== nih sijai) Lu. XX. 16. 
 
 Note 4. Final /* is sometimes dropped (in consequence of having 
 lost its sharp sound): harjo Mk. XV. 6 (for harjdh), hrammS Gal. V. 3 
 (for li/ammSh), harjanv Skeir. 43 (for harjandh), frequently inu for inuh, 
 without, in A; — Dropping of h will be observed in consonant com- 
 binations, as in hiuma Lu. VI. 17 ; VIII. 4 ; for hiuhma (multitude) elsewhere; 
 drausnds Skeir. 50 (cf. drauhsna, fragment); als (for alhs) Mk. XV. 38, 
 and others. Each of these cases is probably owing to the copyist 
 and has as a rule been corrected by the editors. Comp. Bernhardt, 
 Vulfila LIII et seq. Also superfluous h occurs in snauh (for snau) 
 I. Th. n. 16. 
 
 Note 5. In word-formation h is found as well as A (See §58, n. 2), 
 also h for g elsewhere (see § 66, n. 1). 
 
 b. 
 § 63. The sign /c denotes a sound peculiar to the Gothic, 
 it has no equivalent in Greek. The Gothic character (whose 
 
Consonants. 27 
 
 alphabetical place is that of Greek y^) is commonly rendered 
 by Jv Qi/r) the cause of which lies in the fact that the corre- 
 sponding words of all the other Germanic languages (at least 
 initially) have Jur Qm, }w); e. g., Gothic h-eits = 0. H. G. hmz, 
 0. S., A.-S. hrvit, 0. N. hvitr, white. There are however reasons 
 in favor of the supposition that the Gothic h- was a simple 
 consonant, which we then may regard as a labialized h. It 
 is therefore reeommendable to render the single Gothic sign by 
 the ligature fv. 
 
 Note 1. Gothic h/ and hw are not identical. This is proved by 
 the fact that in composition h and iv remain unchanged: pairhtvakands 
 keeping watch throughout, Lu. VI. 12; ubiihtvdpida (belonging to uf- 
 tvupjan) and he cried out, Lu. XVin, 3S. — There are still more reasons 
 for tv representing a single sound, namely the fact that the verb saihan 
 inflects like verbal stems ending in a single consonant (§ 34, n.) and 
 that in reduplication hr has the value of a single consonant (haihup § ITS). 
 Comp. Holtzmann, Altdeutsche Crrammatik I. 25. 
 
 § 64. Examples for Iv: Initially: has, who, haimei, f., 
 skull; h-airhan, to walk; h-eila, time; /rdpan, to boast: /i-aiteis, 
 wheat; — medially: a/va, water; saihan, to see; leihan, to 
 lend; peiho, thunder; aiha-tundi, f., bramble-bush; neha, near; 
 — also finally: sah, saht (pret. of saihan), neh, near. 
 
 Xote 1. With reference to the breaking of / and ti h has the same 
 force as h (§ 62, n. 1). 
 
 S- 
 
 § 65. g corresponds to Greek y, even when having the 
 value of a guttural nasal. Examples are: synagoge, (jvraymy?); 
 aggihis, cr/yeXo^. — The pronunciation of Gothic initial g was 
 most certainly that of a soft stop-sound; g final and medial 
 had possibly a spirant pronunciation. 
 
 Note 1. Latin writers represent g in Gothic words by g, but also 
 by c, for example, Caina and Gaina (Jomandes) ; Commimdns {= Gum- 
 mundus); medially, especially before i, it is often dropped. E.g., FiUt 
 and Agila, Egila, Aiulf t= Aigulf), Athanaildiis {= Atiiaiiagildus). Comp. 
 Dietrich p. 73 et seq. 
 
 § 66. g stands in Gothic frequently, both when initial 
 and medial. Examples: a) gasls, guest; guma, man; gulp, 
 gold; gaps, good; giutan, to pour; greipan, to gripe, seize; 
 graban, to dig. b) agis, terror; awe; mgs, way; gamigan, to 
 move; steigan, to mount; Ugan, to lie; pragjan, to run; — augo, 
 
28 Phonology. Chap. IV. 
 
 eye; tag?-, tear; tigus, ten; aigan, to possess; in the suffix: 
 mahteigs, mighty; mddags, angry. 
 
 Also final g remains unchanged: og, I fear; mag, I can; 
 tvig (ace. of wigs), etc. 
 
 Note], g becomes h before siiffixal i, for example, mahis. mahia 
 (cf. mag); ohla (of. ug); hauhta (cf. bugjan, to buy); bra/ita (of. hriggan); 
 but 2. pers. pret. in I does not seem to admit of a change of consonants. 
 There occurs only magt from mag (§201). — Also elsewhere in word- 
 formation an interchange between h and g takes place in words belonging 
 to the same root: laihiin, 10, and ligus, 10^ filhan, to hide, and fulgins 
 (adj.), hidden; faginun, to rejoice, and faMps, f., joy; huggrjan, to hunger, 
 and huhrus, hunger; juggs, young, comparative ju/iiza; for the inter- 
 change between dig and dih see § 203, n. 1. 
 
 § 67. g denotes also the guttural nasal (see § 50). E. g. 
 (n + g): laggs, long; hriggan, to bring; tuggo, tongue; ftggrs, 
 finger; gaggan. to go; — (w + Zr): drigkan, to drink; pagkjan, 
 to think; pugkjan, to think, seem; igqis (to) you two; sigqan, 
 to sink; stigqan, to Sting, thrust. 
 
 Note 1. The regular notation of the guttural nasal is </, but before 
 A (/ it is sometimes doubled, regularly in Cod. B: siggqan, iggqis. This 
 duplication i.s not found before g; the only case, aigagggand Mat. IX. 15, 
 is corrected by the editors. The opposite mistake is found three times: 
 fauragagja Lu. VIII. 3, XVI. 1 (for fauragaggja, steward); hugridai 
 I. Cor. IV. 11 (for huggridai). Comp. Vulfila ed. Bernhardt p. LI. 
 
 Note 2. The guttural nasal is represented only a few times in the 
 Gospel of St. Luke by Latin n, for example, paiik XVII. 9 ; hringip XV. 22. 
 
 § 68. The combination ggrv deserves special attention. 
 It is 1) guttural nasal, as is proved by the ng& of the 
 other Germanic languages (also in Old Norse), aggrvus, 
 narrow (0. H. G. engi, 0. N. ongr); siggwan, to sing (0. H. G. 
 singan); saggms, a singing, song. Belongs here also unmana- 
 riggws, cruel, wild? 
 
 2) Another ggw corresponds to West -Germanic urn (0. H. G. 
 MM or mmm), 0. N. gg{v): triggws, faithful (0. H. G. triuui, 
 0. N. tryggr), Uiggwan, to beat (0. H. G. bliuuan), *glaggwus, ac- 
 curate (0. H. G. glauuer, 0. N. gloggr) , skuggrva , mirror (0. N. 
 skyggja, f. belonging to Gothic skawjan). 
 
 DENTALS, 
 t 
 
 § 69. Gothic t corresponding to Greek t is frequent both 
 initially and medially. Examples: a) initially: tunpus, tooth; 
 
Consonants. 29 
 
 triu, tree; tuggd, tongue; tagr, tear; taihun, ten; trv'ai, two; 
 tamjan, to tame; trauan, to trust; sif: steigan, to mount, rise, 
 b) medially: wato, water; hairlo heart; haitrs, bitter; itan, to 
 eat; giutan, to pour; sit an, to sit; witan, to know. 
 
 Final ^ remains unchanged: wait, I know; at, at; w?'i(, 
 we two. 
 
 Note 1. Double t stands in aita, faiher; skaits, money. , 
 
 Note 2. Before t of word-formation or inflection / is changed to 
 s, for example, 2. pers. sing. pret. waist (from naii); haihaist (from haitan, 
 to be called); weak pret. gamdsta (from gamdt); kaupastja (from ka»- 
 patjan, to buffet); missa (from wista, cf. wait); ushaista, needy (belonging 
 to haitan); bldstreis, worshipper (belonging to bldtan, to worship). 
 
 V 
 
 § 70. Gothic /» corresponds to Greek d-, as in pbmas, 
 &a)(iaq. Napan, Nad-av); both had the same sound, namely 
 that of the modern Greek d- , i. e. an interdental hard spirant 
 (= Engl. th). 
 
 Note 1. Latin writers render Gothic /> by th, e.g., Theodoricus, 
 Theodomirus. Also some later texts have th for />. 
 
 § 71. p in Gothic words is frequent. Examples: a) 
 Initially: pulan, to tolerate; panjan, to stretch; gapairsan, to 
 wither; paiirsus, torrid; paurstei, thirst; pata (pron.) that; pu 
 thou; preis, three; pliuhan, to flee; gapldihan, to embrace, con- 
 sole; pwahan, to wash, b) Medially: brdpar, brother; tunpus, 
 tooth; rviprus, lamb, wether; frapi, n., understanding; frapjan 
 to understand; anpar, other; A/'a/>ar, which of the two ; wairpan, 
 to become; qipan, to say. e) Final/* also remains unchanged; 
 e. g., piup, good (piupis), qap (from qipan), aips, oath, ace. aip. 
 
 Note 1. pp in aippau, or; furthermore by assimilation from h-p, 
 nippan, etc. See § 60, n. 3. 
 
 Note 2. p final and before the nominative-,? often represents d, 
 and is to be distinguished from p in the words given under c), the latter 
 having also p medially. See § 73. 
 
 Note 3. p becomes s before t. E.g., 2. pers. s. pret. qast (from 
 qipan); roarst (from wairpan); snaist (from sneipan, to cut). 
 
 d 
 
 § 72. d corresponds to Greek 6. The modern Greek 
 pronunciation of 6 is that of a soft interdental spirant (& = 
 Engl, soft th). This pronunciation is also to be given to d, 
 
30 Phonology. Chap. IV. 
 
 at least medially after Towels. But initially and medially 
 after n, I, r, z — d has tlie value of a soft stop-sound. 
 
 § 73. Examples for d: a) Initially: dai!ir; n., door: 
 dai!ilitar, daughter; dal, dale, vally; dauns, odor; daddjan, to 
 suckle; ga-daursan, to dare; driusan, to fall; dmals, foolish (dull); 
 b) Medially: sidus, custom; madi, n., pledge, bet; midjis, medius; 
 widutvo, widow; hiudan, to offer; hindan, to bind; hair da, herd; 
 waldan, to rule, wield; mizdd, reward. — fadar, father; frddei, 
 understanding (hereto belongs adj. frops, frodis, wise); fidwdr, 
 four; pridja, tertius; piiida, people; -ida, as in aupida, desert; 
 gahugds, understanding; gards, house, yard; hardus, hard; hund, 
 hundred; and, on, at; cdds, age (cf. alpeis old); kalds , cold; 
 gazds, sting. 
 
 Note 1. In Gothic words rfrf is found only in: rvaddjus, wall; dadd- 
 jan, to suckle; tmaddji (gen. of twai, 2); iddja, I went; hence always 
 in the combination ddj. 
 
 § 74. d final and before the s of the nominative is retained 
 only after consonants; e. g., hund, nimand (3 pers. plur. pres.), 
 gards, aids, gazds, gahugds. When d after a vowel becomes 
 final, it is changed into p, because p denotes the hard sound 
 corresponding to d. The greater number of the Gothic final ps 
 have for the sake of euphony arisen from medial d, the smaller 
 number are original, also medial pa (§ 71, n. 2). 
 
 Examples: slaps, stadis, place (but slaps, s lapis, coast 
 shore); haubip, haubidis, head; liuhap, liuhadis, light; frdps, 
 frodis, wise; gops, gbdis, good; hdup pret. of hiudan; bidjan, 
 to pray, pret. bap; all partic. pret. w. v., as nasips, nasidis; 
 salbops, salbddis; furthermore all final p& in verbal inflection 
 (3. p. s. 2. pi.), as in nimip, nemup, nemeip, — but with enclitic 
 uh; nimiduh, tiemuduh, nemeiduh; — adverbs like /vap, whither 
 (comp. § 213); prepos. mip, with' 
 
 Note 1. The change of final d into p is not found in all cases in 
 our texts. This appearance cannot be referred to the original text of 
 Ulfilas, but is a deviation from the normal state, owing to the copyists, 
 a fact proved by the frequent occurrence of final d in the Gospel of St. 
 Luke, especially in the first ten chapters, not unfrequently also in the 
 Gospel of St. John, more rarely in the other books. Examples from the 
 6* chap, pf Luke are samalaud 34, gdds 35. 43, gud 43, milads 38, partic. 
 gamanrvids 40, gasulid, and especially many verbal forms : taujid 2, ussugg- 
 nnid 3, faginud, laikid 23, habaid 24, usbairid 45, etc. — Since 
 the Gospel of Luke contains younger forms of speech (§ 220, 1), we 
 
Consonants. ' 31 
 
 will have to regard these forms as having developped at a later period, 
 introduced into our texts by individual writers. — Comp. also Kock, zs. 
 fda. XXV. 226 et seq., who shows that these ds for ps are most frequent 
 after unaccented vowels (e. g., riiitads)', but after an accented vowel only 
 when the latter is long or a diphthong, rarely however after a short accented 
 vowel (e. g. mid Luke VII. 11). 
 
 Note 2. Since final f> has by all means to be taken as regular, it 
 must also be employed in words of which only forms with medial d are 
 found: hiups, biudis, table; raups . red; usdaups, zealous; gamaips, 
 maimed; mdps, anger; kndps, stock, race. Therefore we must also write 
 garaips, ready; unlips, poor, each of which, besides the forms with 
 medial d, has once the final form garaid and unUds. But both forms 
 stand in Luke. 
 
 With final d only are repeatedly found; weitwdds, witness, ace. 
 Tveitwdd: twice gariuds (gariud) honorable, only one final form with d 
 (but none with p) occurs in braids, broad, deds, deed; wdds, raging, 
 possessed ; grids, grade, degree ; skaiskaid (pret. of skaidan). Also here 
 we will consequently have to regard the form d^ps, mods, etc. as normal, 
 for the forms with d were probably introduced by the copyists. 
 
 i Note 3. This final p for d must not be confounded with the radical 
 p in words that have the same root as those with d, for instance, frdd- 
 (n. frups) wise; frddei, wisdom, but frapi, understanding; frapjan, to 
 understand; sinps, way; hut sandjan, to send; aids, age, hwi alpeis , old. 
 
 Note 4. p is seldom found where initial d is expected. Thus 
 gupa Gal. IV. 8 instead of guda, unfrdpans Gal. III. 3. 
 
 § 75. The d of weak preterits, which stands generally 
 after a vowel (nasida, habaida), is retained after / and n (skulda, 
 munda), while after *, h, fit appears as I: kaupasta, mosta, 
 daursta, pdhta, puhta, briihta, waurhta, baiihta, dhta, mahta, 
 aihta, paurfta; it becomes p in kunpa, ss from st through 
 assimilation in rvissa. 
 
 Conform to this rule are the pai"ticiples nasips, habaips, 
 skulds, munds; but wwdrhts, baahts , wahls, bina-iihts, paurfts, 
 kunps. Comp. § 187, n. 1; § 197 et seq.; 208. 209. 
 
 Note 1. d becomes s before the t of 2iiii p. pret: batist {from biudan, 
 baup). s for d occurs in word-formation as well, for example, gilstr 
 (cf. gildan), tribute; anabusns, commandment (cf. biudan). 
 
 § 76. * is a hard dental spirant corresponding to Greek 
 (J. s, especially when initial, is very frequent in Gothic words. 
 
 Examples: a) Initially: sunus, son; sitan, to sit; skadus, 
 shadow; speiwan, to spit; slandan, to stand; straiijan, to strew; 
 sUpan, to sleep; smals, small; snutrs, wise; swaz'Ara, father-in-law. 
 
32 Phonology. Chap. IV. 
 
 b) Medially: kiusan, choose; rvisan, to be; wasjan, to vest, 
 clothe; pHisundi, thousand; gasts, guest; Aawsa, host, multitude; 
 auhsa, ox; paursus, withered. 
 
 c) Also final s remains unchanged, as in gras, grass; mis, 
 table; was (pret. of tvisan); hals, neck. 
 
 Note 1. « occurs often; e.g., hassei, severity; ^'iw, speaoh; missa 
 (pret. of rvitan); termination -assus {f'iudinassus, kingdom, etc. 
 
 Note 2. Final s stands in most oases for medial z; this is especially 
 the case in inflection. Comp. § 78, dropping of the nominative « § 78, n. 2. 
 
 Note 3. i from t, p, d before consonants {t); see § 69, n. 2; § 71, 
 n. 3; § 75, n. 
 
 § 77. z corresponds in Greek words to C,, e. g., Zaibai- 
 daius Zt^sdatog; azymus, a^vfiog. The sound of z is the soft 
 sound whose corresponding hard sound is *; therefore it is a 
 sonant dental spirant (Engl. z). The Greek £ denoted this 
 sound already at the time of Ulfilas (as in modern Greek). , 
 
 § 78. a) In Gothic words z never occurs initially. 
 
 b) Medial z is frequent. Final z, however, becomes s, 
 the corresponding hard sound (comp. b — f, d — p). azSts, easy; 
 hazjan, to praise; hazeins, praise; dius, gen. diuzis, animal; 
 hatis, gen. hatizis, hatred; hatizdn, to be angry; huzd, treasure; 
 gazds, sting; mizdo, reward; azgo, ashes; marzjan, to offend; — 
 comparatives: maiza, major; frdddza, alpiza, etc.; pronominal 
 forms; e.g., izwara, pizds, pize, blindaizds; 2. sing, middle, as 
 haitaza. 
 
 c) Most of the final ss represent a z, especially the in- 
 flectional *s; these are changed to z as soon as they become 
 initial by an enclitic addition, for example, the s of the nom. 
 /vas, who?, but Ivazuh; is, he, hnt izei, who (relative); us, out, 
 but uzuh, uzu; dis-, an intensive prefix = Lt. dis- {dizuhpansat 
 Mk. XVI. 8); pos, fem. n. pi., pozuh; meis, we, weizuh; wileis 
 2. pers. s., wileizu; adv. mais, more (cf maizd); diris, earlier 
 (cf. diriza), etc. 
 
 Note 1. z was rarely retained when becoming final: minz, less, 
 n. Cor. XII. 15. Codex B instead oimins elsewhere; riqiz (4 times), dark- 
 ness, besides riqis, gen. riqizis; aiz, ore, only Mk. VI. 8; mimz, flesh, 
 I. Cor. Vin. 13. 
 
 Note 2. The s (2) of the nom. sing, drops 1) after s (ss, z): drus, 
 m., gen. drusis, fall; swes, g. smesis, adj. one's own; laus^lausis, empty. 
 
Consonants. 33 
 
 vain; us-stass, f., gen. usstassais, resurrection; 2) after j% when immedia- 
 tely preceded by a short vowel i rvair, mairis, man; hour, son; kaisar, 
 Caesar; anpar, another, second; unsar, our; s remains however after a 
 long syllable: akrs, field; Aor*, lecher; s/feeW, clear; sruers, dear, worthy; 
 gdurs, sad. Inregular is the once occurring nom. (Nehem. V. 1 8) stiur. 
 
 Note 3. 2 and « occur interchangeably in the preter. of sUpan , to 
 sleep; MJ«%, Mt. VIII. 24; Luke VIII. 23; I. Th. IV. 14; saizUp , Joh. 
 XI. 11; I Cor. XV. 6. 
 
 Note 4. The z of the prep, us is in combinations assimilated to 
 following r (comp. §24, n. 2), as in urruns , a running out, departure; 
 urreisan, to arise; urr&mnmi, to be enlarged (besides usrumnan Codex 
 B. II Cor. VI. 11). In other cases us retains its final form, as in usagjan, 
 to frighten, usheidan, to expect, abide for (Comp. § 56, n. 2). Only in 
 uzdn (pt. of *usanan, to breathe out, expire) Mk. XV. 37, 39, and uzSlin 
 (dat. of *usHa, manger) Lu. II. 7, t2, 16 z for * appears before a vowel. 
 
 Note 5. When us comes before a word beginning with st, one s 
 is sometimes dropped: ustaig (from us-steigan) Mk. III. 13, ustdf> Lu. VIII. 
 55, X. 25; ustandip Mk. X. 34 {iiow. us- standan)\ ustassai (from usstass) 
 Lu. XIV. 14. — Comp. diskritnan (for dis-skrUnan) Mt. XXVII. 51 ; there 
 is no analogon for sp. 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 GENERAL REMARKS ON THE CONSONANTS. 
 
 § 79. In Gothic the soft spirants, b, d, z, are changed 
 into the corresponding hard sounds, f, p, s, when final and 
 before the * of the nominative (Comp. §§ 56. 74. 78). The 
 fourth soft spirant, medial g (§ 66), however, remains soft when 
 final, at least in writing, while in pronunciation the analogy 
 of the other cases suggests hardening. 
 
 Note 1. Also the 6s, rfs, zs are sometimes retained when final; z 
 however rarely (§ 78, n. 1), but b and d frequently, especially in certain 
 places where also other forms of a later origin are found. Comp. § 56, 
 n. 1, § 74, n. 1, and Koek zs. fda. XXV. 226 et seq. 
 
 § 80. Double consonants in Gothic are especially the 
 liquids, II, mm, nn, rr, and also ss; other cases, as kk (§ 58, n. 1), 
 tt (§ 69, n. 1), pp (§ 71, n. 1) dd (§ 73, n. 1), are rare; — the 
 frequently occurring gg^ (§§ 67. 68) are of a difiPerent kind. 
 
 Double consonants at the end of a word and before the 
 
 Braune, Goth, grammar. 3 
 
34 Phonology. Chap. IV. 
 
 nominative s are retained: skatts, full, kann, rann, wamm, garviss. 
 Likewise before j: fulljan, skattja, kannjan; but before other 
 consonants they generally become single: kant , kunpa (from 
 kann), rant 2. sing, pret, runs, m., a running (cf. rimiati); 
 smumfsl, pond (cf. ^swimman); — commonly, however, fullnan; 
 fulnan occurs but a few times. 
 
 Note 1. In the MSS. double consonants are sometimes found for 
 single ones, as allh Lu. II. 40, and single consonants for double ones, as 
 Tvisidun Lu. II. 43, inbranjada (for inbrannjada) John XV. G. Both cases 
 are mistakes which are generally corrected by the editors. Comp. Bern- 
 hardt, Vulfila p. LA'II. 
 
 § 81. The consonantal changes before dentals, which 
 considered from an etymologico-comparative standpoint, are, 
 of course, of a various nature, may, practically from a mere 
 Gothic standpoint, be embraced in the following rule. 
 
 Before the dentals, d, p, t, all labial stop-sounds 
 and spirants are changed into f, all gutturals to h, all 
 dentals to s; the second dental of such a combination 
 is always kept as t. 
 
 Examples: skapjan, gaskafis (§ 51, n. 2); paurhan 
 (*paiirbda), paurfta, giban, gifts (§ 56,n.3); — siuks, sauhts; 
 pagkjan, pdhta (§ 58, u. 2); magan, mahta (§ 66, n. 1.); — wait, 
 iraist (§69,n.2) malrpan, warst (§71,n.3); biudan, baust 
 (§75,n.l). 
 
 Note 1. An exception is magt (2. pers. of mag § 201), and galmgds, 
 understanding. 
 
 Note 2. St may become ss by way of assimilation, as rvissa from 
 rvltan (see §7l), n. 1). Comp. Kogel, Beitr. VII, p. 171 et seq. 
 
 § 82. Cases of assimilation . only with h (§ 62,n.3) and 
 with us (78, n. 4). 
 
INFLECTIONS. 
 
 CHAP. I. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 
 
 GENERAL REMARKS. 
 
 A) OF THE GOTHIC DECLENSION IN GENERAL 
 
 § 83. In the Gothic declension there are three genders, 
 as in the other Germanic dialects — masculine, neuter, and 
 feminine. 
 
 Note 1. By form the neuter and maiiculine of all declensions are 
 alike, except in the nom. and ace. of both numbers. 
 
 Note 2. A distinction of gender is wanting only with the personal 
 pronoun of the 1. and 2. persons; likewise also with the reflexive pronoun 
 (§ 150), and with the numeral adjectives 4 — 19 (§ 141). 
 
 § 84. There are two numbers in the Gothic declension — 
 singular and plural. 
 
 Note 1. The dual which originally existed in all Indo-Germanic 
 languages, is found in the Gothic declension only in the personal pron. 
 of the 1. and 2. persons (§ 150). 
 
 § 85. There are four complete cases in the Gothic declen- 
 sion — nominative, genitive, dative, accusative. Inmost 
 cases the vocative resembles the nominative, only in the singular 
 of some declensions there occurs a vocative different from the 
 nominative, which, then, however, is always the same as the 
 accusative. 
 
 Note 1. The Gothic dative represents several Indo-Germanic cases 
 (dative, ablative, instrumental). Relics of the neuter instrumental are still 
 present in the pronominal declension — j-S (§ 153), he (§ 159). 
 
30 Inflections. Chap. I. 
 
 B) OF THE DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 § 86. The deeleDsion of substantives in Gothic is divided 
 into a vowel and a consonantal declension, according as the 
 stems of the substantives end in a vowel or a consonant. 
 
 Note 1. The original form of the stems has in part been obseiired 
 by blending tlie stems with the endings, hj loss of vowels at the end, 
 and the like, so that a eorreet division into \'t)wel and consonantal 
 dei-lcusions is altogether subject to the t'omparative Iudo-(ieruianic 
 Grammar. From the especially tiothic standpoint we should not have 
 been led to this division. 
 
 § S7. Of the classes of the consonantal stems in CTOtliic 
 that of the ^-stents (stems in -an, -on, -ein) have widely devel- 
 oped, while of other consonantal inflections but a few remains 
 are preserved (§ 114-etseq.). According to Jacob Grimm the 
 M-declensiou is also called weak declension. 
 
 § 8S. Tliere are four classes of the vowel declension — 
 stems in a, o, i, x. According to this, we distinguish between 
 a-, 0-. /-, and M-declensions. The stem-characteristics are still 
 clearly seen in all classes in . dat. and ace. pi. , as in dagam, 
 dagam; — gibdm, gibos; — gustim, gastins ; — sunum, sununs. 
 According to Jac. Grimm the vowel declension is also called 
 strong declension. 
 
 Note 1. Of the four vowel declensions the a- and o-declensions 
 stand in close connection; the a-deelension contains only masculine and 
 neuter nouns {dags, ivui'ird), to the (i-declension belong only feminines. 
 Both declensions are therefore generally reduced to one class called a- 
 declension. 
 
 Note 2. The Gothic a-declension corresponds to the second or 
 o-declension in (xreek and Latin (Gr. masc. -oq; neut. -ov; Lat. -us , -um) 
 the Gothic «-decleusion corresponds to the first or «-declension in Greek 
 and Latin. Now since Comparative Grammar teaches us that the vowels 
 of the Greek and Latin are older than those of the Germanic, and that 
 at an early period in Germanic the stems of the correspj^ding masculines 
 and neuters must have ended in o and those of the feminines in a, we 
 often employ also in Germanic grammar the term o-deolension for the 
 masculines and neuters, the term ^-declension for the feminines. 
 
 A) VOWEL (STRONG) DECLENSION 
 
 l.A) ^-DECLENSION. 
 
 § 89. The Gothic a-deelension contains only masculines 
 und neuters. We distinguish between ])ure «-stems and ./v-stems. 
 
Declension of Nouns. 37 
 
 Note 1. The wrt-steras In Gothic differ but very little from the 
 pare a-stems, and they occur only in a few words (§ 92, n. 3; § 93; 
 § 94, n. 1). 
 
 MASCULINES. 
 § 90. Paradigms of the masculines, a) Pure a-stems: 
 dags, day (from more ancient *(lagaz, Early Germ. *daf/o-i, § 88, 
 n. 2); hlai/'s, bread (E. Germ. */ito'5o-2). b) ya-stems: hair dels, 
 herd, shepherd (E. Germ. *herdio-z), harjis, army (E. Germ. 
 *harjo-z). 
 
 Sing. N. dags 
 
 hlaifs 
 
 hairdeis 
 
 harjis 
 
 G. dagis 
 
 hlaibis 
 
 hairdeis 
 
 harjis 
 
 D. daga 
 
 hlaiba 
 
 hairdja 
 
 haija 
 
 A. dag 
 
 hlaif 
 
 hairdi 
 
 hari 
 
 V. dag 
 
 hlalf 
 
 hairdi 
 
 hari 
 
 Plur. N. dag6s 
 
 hlaibos 
 
 hairdj6s 
 
 harj6s 
 
 G. dagg 
 
 hlaibg 
 
 hairdjg 
 
 harje 
 
 D. dagam 
 
 hlaibam 
 
 hairdjam 
 
 harjam 
 
 A. dagans 
 
 hlaibans 
 
 hairdjans 
 
 harjans. 
 
 § 91. Like dags decline, for example, stains, stone; skalks, 
 servant; tains, twig; himins, heaven: fisks, fish; rrigs, way; wiclf, 
 wolf; fugls, fowl, bird; aips (gen. aipis), oath. 
 
 hlaifs shows the hardening of a medial soft spirant when 
 becoming final (comp. §§ 56. 79). Likewise does laufs (n. pi. 
 laubos) leaf. 
 
 Note ]. The declension of these masculines is identical with that 
 of the masculines of the e-decl. (§ 100) in the whole sing, and in the gen. 
 plur., and so to which declension they belong must be decided from the 
 nom., ace., and dat. plur: hence a number of masculines which are not 
 found in those plural cases cannot with certainty be arranged. In many 
 cases the other Germanic languages will enable us to decide. According 
 to this, akrs, field; migs, son-in-law; maurgins, morning; snairvs, snow; 
 maipms, gift, ' long to the a-declension. 
 
 Note 2. Words which are not found in the nom. sing, nor in the 
 nom. ace. plur., may also be neuter. Thus akeitis may be the genitive 
 of both *akeits, and *akeit. But some of these words are certainly masc., 
 as is evident from the adjectives by which they are modified, or from 
 their cognate dialects; e.g., slips, sleep; rvdkrs, usury; mihns , oven; 
 tweifls, doubt; mops, anger (gen. modis, comp. § 74). 
 
 Note 3. According to the rules concerning final m (42), the nom. 
 sing, and ace. and voc. sing, of pirvos , pirve (servant), the only forms 
 found, are pius and piu. 
 
 Note 4. According to § 7S, n. 2, the s of the nom. sing, is dropped 
 
38 
 
 Inflections. Chap. I. 
 
 in *a?is (dat. aiiza), beam; */inls. halsis, neck; freihals, freedom; rvair, 
 man; *gnbanr (n. pi. gabaiirds) a festive meal; kaisar, Caesar; sliw, steer. 
 
 Note 5. wcgs, wave (i\.-p\.)vcgus, but dat. pi. wcgfrn), aims, time 
 (dat. pi. aiivam , sac. \i\. abvins) , show a tendency to merge into the i- 
 doclension. 
 
 § 92. In the case of stems in ja, according to the rules 
 concerning the contraction oi ji into ci (§44e), distinction 
 must be made between words with long and those with short 
 stem syllables. Further examples: a) of nouns with long syl- 
 lables, and polysyllables: nsncis, servant; andeis, end; h-aiicis, 
 wlieat; slponeis, disciple; words in -arris: laisarcis, master; 
 hokareis, scribe, and others; b) of nouns with short syllables: 
 nipjis, cousin; andasfafijis, adxersary. 
 
 Note J. andeis, end, has Rom. X. 18 the ace. pi. according to the 
 i'-decl., imdins. 
 
 NEUTEKS. 
 
 § 03. Paradigms, a) Pure a-stems: waixrd, word; hauUp, 
 1. h^ »'ffl-stems: kniu, knee, c) /a-stems: kuni, kin. 
 
 § X'O. 1 iirmiiji 
 head, b) «'a-stems 
 
 Sing. N. waurd haubi|' 
 
 G. wiii'irdis haubidis 
 
 D. waurda haubida 
 
 A. wai'ird- haubi)' 
 
 kniu 
 kniwis 
 kniwa 
 kniu 
 
 :tmi, kin. 
 kuni 
 kunjis 
 kunja 
 kuni 
 
 Pliir. N. waurda ' haubida kniwa kunja 
 
 G. waurde haubide kiiiwe kunj& 
 
 D. wanrdam haubidam kuiwam kunjam 
 
 A. waurda haubida kniwa kunja. 
 
 § 94. The number of neuters declining like waurd is very 
 great; e. g., hldp, bldpis, blood; gulp, gold; juk, yoke; Jer, year; 
 haiini, horn; sauil, sun; silubr, silver; agis, fear; sair, sorrow; 
 maurpr, murder; gras, grasis, grass. 
 
 Cases where the medial soft spirant (§ 79) is hardened, 
 as in haubip, are, for example, dius, diuzis, animal; hatis, 
 hatred; riqis, darkness (§ 78,n.l); Uuhap, Uuhadis, light; 
 rvitop, law. 
 
 Note 1. According to § 42, final w of stems in rva is changed to 
 u after a short vowel. Like kniu goes triu, triwis, wood, tree. After a 
 long vowel there is no change, e. g., lerv, occassion; frairv, seed. 
 
 >fote 2. According to § 91, n. 2, it cannot with certainty be stated, 
 whether words which are not found in all forms of inflection , are masc. 
 or neuter. On the grounds given under that paragr., the following words 
 must be neuter: dat, dale, valley; paurp, field; mapl, market. 
 
Declension of Nouns. 39 
 
 Note 3. The word giif> being neuter in form, is used as raasc. when 
 denoting the God of Christianity. The neuter pi. guda (coinp. § 74, n. 4) 
 denoting heathen gods, is still used. Since this word is found only in 
 the abbreviated forms (§ 1, n. 4), gp, gps, gpa, the inflection of the sing, 
 is doubtful. The full forms commonly given are ; gup, gen. gups, d. gupa; 
 the correct forms would be gup, gudis, guda. Certainly wrong is the gen. 
 gups: it is undoubtedly entitled to the termination -w, but whether jr«/>/j 
 or gudis, is uncertain. Therefore we have employed the abbreviated form 
 gups which is found in all editions ; the same for the dat. gupa. 
 
 Note i. fadrein ,(patemiry,, when signifying ^parents,, may be used 
 as an indeclinable plur. preceded by the masc. article; pai fadrein, pans 
 fadrein. But also the regular neuter plur. fadreina is used in the sense 
 of ;,parents„. Fadreins (fern.) family , generation, must be distinguished 
 from this (§ 103). 
 
 Note 5. The gen. sing, of hatis, hatred is once (Codex B) found 
 as hatis, Eph. II. 3 (hatize A). For the neuters in -is conip. nVon Bahder, 
 Verbalabstracta, p. 52 et seq. 
 
 § 95. Like kuni inflect stems in ja, both long and sliort 
 syllables; e. g., hadi, bed; nati, net; fairguni, monntain; garni, 
 gaujis , region (§42.2); taui, tojis, deed (§26); reiki, reikjis, 
 kingdom, power; arbi, arbjis, heir; galigri, eomsummation of 
 marriage; gawaurki, work, business; gaiUni, counsel; andivairpi, 
 presence. 
 
 Note 1. Besides -jis a contracted gen. in -eis (comp. § 44 c, § 92) 
 is found in but a few long- and polysyllabic nouns, for instance, trausteis 
 (from trausti, covenant) Eph. II. 12: andbahli, service, has gen. andbahtjis 
 (3 times) and andbahteis (once) (Lu. I. 23); gamairpi, peace, has gen. 
 gamairpjis (6 times), gawairpeis (3 times). 
 
 l.B) 0-DECLENSION. 
 
 § 96. The Gothic o-declension contains only feminines 
 which in fact belong to the a-decl. (§ 88, n. 1). Also here we 
 distinguish between pure o-stems and jo-stems. 
 
 Paradigms: a) giba, gift (stem gibo-). b) stems in jo with 
 long syllables: bandi, band (stem bandjo^:, mawi girl (stem maujo). 
 
 Sing. N. giba 
 
 bandi 
 
 mawi 
 
 G. gibas 
 
 bandj6s 
 
 maujds 
 
 D. gibai 
 
 bandjai 
 
 maujai 
 
 A. giba 
 
 bandja 
 
 mauja 
 
 Plur. N. gibos 
 
 bandjds 
 
 mauj6s 
 
 G. gib6 
 
 bandjd 
 
 maujo 
 
 D. gibom 
 
 bandj6m 
 
 maujom 
 
 A. gibos 
 
 bandjds 
 
 mauj6s. 
 
40 Inflections, unap. i. 
 
 § 97. Like gWa inflect a great many words. E. g., hida, 
 request; piuda, people; hansa, multitude; saiwala, soul; stibna, 
 voice; airpa, earth; heila, while, hour; wamba, womb; mildipa, 
 mercy; a/va, water. 
 
 Note 1 . Stems in wo and those in ju with short syllables decline 
 like ffiba; e.g., triggiva, covenant; bandrva, sign; — sunja, truth; halja, 
 hell; sibja, relationship, plapja street. 
 
 Note 2. Of heila the ace. sing, keilu- is found before the enclitic 
 ■hun in Ireilohun; see § 16,'i, n. 1 (for form comp. aindhun § 163 c, harjdh 
 § 16.5). 
 
 § 98. Like bandi go stems in jo with long stem syllables 
 and those that have more than one syllable. Their inflection 
 is the same as that of giba, except in the nom. voc. sing, 
 which have i instead of ja. — Further examples are: haipi 
 heath, feld; rvasti, garment; phidangardi, kingdom; hdftuli, glory; 
 frijondi, female friend; fraislubni, temptation. 
 
 Note 1. Like matvi (for the change of rv into u see § 42) inflects 
 pimi, piujds, maid-servant. 
 
 2) /-DECLENSION. 
 S 99. This declension contains only masculines and 
 feminines. Tlie inflection of both genders properly ought to 
 be the same throughout, but this is the case in the plur. only, 
 while the masc. forms gen. and dat. according to the a- 
 declension. 
 
 MASCULINES. 
 § 100. Paradigms: halgs bottle, wine-skin; (E. Germanic 
 balgi-z). 
 
 Sing. N. balgs Plur. N. balgeis 
 
 Gr. balgia G. balge 
 
 D. balga D. balgim 
 
 A. balg A. balgins 
 
 V. balg 
 
 § 161. The numbre of masculines inflecting like balgs is 
 not very great. E. g., gasts, guest; gards, house; muns^ thought; 
 mats, food; saggrvs , a singing, song; saups, saudis, sacrifice; 
 brtip-faps (d), bridegroom; staps (d), stead, place. 
 
 Note ). Words not occurring in n. d. a. plur. cannot with certainty- 
 be referred to this declension (comp. § 91, n. 1). In many cases, however, 
 a comparison with the other Germanic dialects will show to which decl. 
 they belong. Such a noun is, for example, «aw*, lake, sea; but especially 
 
Declension of Nouns. 41 
 
 a number of verbal abstracts like gums, arrival; di-us, fall; rvUts, face; 
 runs, a running; grUs , weeping; krusis , gnashing (of teeth). 
 
 Note 2. The s of the nominative is dropped according to § 78, n. 2; 
 e. g., rims, runsis ; drus, drusis; batir, baiiris, natus, son. 
 
 Note 3. According to the rules for w (§ 42), the form naus (a dead 
 man) is explained, n. pi. nanieis, a. pi. namins; hence the a. v. sing, have naxi. 
 
 Note 4. wigs and aiws see § 91, n. 5. 
 
 FEMININES. 
 § 102. Paradigms: mists, favor (E. Germanic ansti-z). 
 Sing. N. ansts Plur. N. ansteis 
 
 G. anstais G. anste 
 
 D. anstai D. anstim 
 
 A. anst A. anstins. 
 
 V. anst 
 § 103. To this class belong many nouns. Examples: 
 qens, woman; dails, deal; rvens, hope; naups, naupais, need; 
 siuns, sight; sokns, a seeking, question; taikns, token; faheps, 
 fahedis, joy; magaps (p) maid, virgin, fadrebis, generation, 
 family; arbaips (d) work; asans, harvest; those in -dups (p): mtkil- 
 dups, greatness; managdups, abundance; o/mMmj?*, eternity; ga- 
 maindups, communion. 
 
 Very numerous are the verbal abstracts which may be 
 formed from all strong verbs by means of the suffix t {p, d); 
 e. g., gaskafts, creation, shaping; paurfls, need; ganisls, sal- 
 vation; lists, wle; fralusts, lost; gakusts, experiment; gabaiirps, 
 birth; galaurps, destruction; manmeps (rf), world; deps (d) deed; 
 gahugds, thought. 
 
 Note 1. Here belong also abstracts formed from weak verbs, as 
 those in -eins belonging to the First, those in -ains to the Second, and 
 those in dns to the Third weak conjugation; e.g. naseins (cf. nasjan), 
 salvation; laiseins, doctrine, teaching; hduheins, glory, a raising on high; 
 galaubeins, faith; naiteins, blasphemy; lapons ((AJapon), Invitation; salhdns, 
 ointment; mituiis , thought, judgment, measuring; pulains (cf. pulan), 
 patience; libains, life. — But those in eins have their n. g. pi. according 
 to the <)-declension. Thus, for example, 
 
 Sing. N. naiteins G. naiteinais D. naileinai A. Y. naiiein 
 Plur. N. naiteinds G. naiteini) D. naiteinim A. naiteinins. 
 
 The dative plur. unkaiireindm is found but once II. Cor. XI. 9. — Those 
 in -dns, ains form their plur. regularly; mitvneis, mitone, etc. 
 
 Note 2. Whether certain nouns are masc. or fern, cannot be deci- 
 ded, as they do not occur in a sufficient variety of cases. Thus, for 
 instance, ahaks, dove; fuUeips, fullness. 
 
42 Ififlections. Chap. 1. 
 
 Xote 3. The nominative s is dropped according; to § T*-, n. 2, e.g., 
 us-stass, tisslassais, resurrection; garuns, -rmisais, street; 
 
 Note 4. Iiaims, \'illage, forms its phir. according to the o-dcclciision: 
 haiinos, etc. 
 
 3) 6-DECLENSION. 
 
 MASCULINES AND FEM]NINE>^. 
 § 10 J. The masc. and fern, nouns of the i<-deel. have the 
 same form. Paradigm: sunus, son. 
 
 Sing. N. sunus Plur. N. sunjus 
 
 G. sunaus 0. sunivo 
 
 D. sunau D. sunum 
 
 A. sunu A. sununs 
 A", sunu 
 
 § lOo. Further Examples: a) Masculines; e. g., dims, 
 messenger; asi/us, ass; daupus, deatJa; wulpus, glory; hilhrus, 
 hunger; paurnus, thorn; hairus, sword; lipus, limb; luslus, lust; 
 lupus, air; magus, child, boy; fairlvus, world; fbUis, foot; siubjus, 
 dust; nouns in -assus: drauhlinassus, warfare; ibnassus, evenness, 
 equality; piudinassus, kingdom. 
 
 b) The only Feminines are handus, hand; kinnus, cheek; 
 ivripus, herd; asilits, a she-ass; waddjus, wall. 
 
 The gender of some nouns is doubtful, as qcdrnus, mill; 
 flodus, flood. 
 
 Note 1. Foreign words, as aggilus, angel; sabbalus , sabbath, 
 fluctuate in the jilural between the u- and e-decl., sec § 120, n. 1. 
 
 X (1 1 e 2. In the singular terminations of this declension there occurs 
 a noteworthy fluctuation between u and au {ail ? comp. § 24, n. 4). All 
 cases of this kind have been completely grouped by Leo Meyer, „Gotisohe 
 Spraehe-, p. 574. au is found in the w-cases, as nom. sunaus Lu. IV. 3; 
 fairhdus Gal. VI. 14 codex B {= fairlvus codex A); Bariimaius Jlk. X. 
 46; — ace. handau Mk. VII. 32 ; piudinassau L. IX. 27 ; hairau E. Xm. 4 
 codex A {= hairu codex Car.); — voc. iunaa frequently; magau L. II. i8. 
 
 On the contrary there occurs u for au in the aM-cases: gen. daupus 
 Lu. I. 7:i; mulpus'R.lK. 23; apaustaulus II. Cor. XII. 12 codex A {^= apau- 
 staulaus codex B); dat. widpu Lu. IX. 26; Paitru Gal. II. 7 codex A (= 
 Paitrau codex B). 
 
 The vast number of examples of the forms of the above paradigm 
 however entitles us to regard the latter as the regular one; the de- 
 viations just mentioned are owing to a confusion on the part of the later 
 writers. In case of double forms the one MS. is generally correct. 
 Especially codex Ambr. A and the Gospel of Luke show a tendency 
 to confuse the a-decl. in this way. 
 
Declension of Nouns. 43 
 
 NEUTERS. 
 § 106. There are three neuter nouns one of which, failm, 
 cattle, money, occurs in several cases, namely in the singular. 
 
 N. faihu 
 
 G. faihaiis 
 
 D. faihau 
 
 A. faihu. 
 
 The other two, gdiru, sting; sihu, victory, are found once each 
 in the nom. sing. 
 
 B) A-DECLENSION (WEAK DECLENSION). 
 1) MASCULINES. 
 
 § 107. Paradigm: guma, man. 
 
 Sing. N. guma Plur. N; gumans 
 
 G. gumins G. guniane 
 
 D. gumin D. gumam 
 
 A. guman A. gumaais 
 
 § 108. Like guma inflect a great many masculines. E. g., 
 s/a«a, judge; hana, cock; skula, debtor; sunna, sun; mena, moon; 
 atta, father; alinm. Spirit; bldma, flower; milhma, cloud; hliuma, 
 hearing; weiha, priest; swaihra father-in-law; magula, little boy; 
 Attila, Wulflla (proper nouns); — haurnja, trumpeter; flskja, 
 tisher; timrja, cai-penter; arhja, heir; tvilja, will; manamdurprja, 
 murderer; rvaurstwja, laborer. 
 
 Note 1. aha, man, takes geu. pi. abni, dat. pi. abnam-^ — of aiihsa, 
 ox, occurs gen. plur. atihsnS. Comp. the neuters §110, n. 1; once we 
 meet with the ace. pi. auhsunns (I. Cor. IX. 9) which is probably a corrupt 
 form for auhsuns ; see § 80, n. 1 (the editors change it to aiihsans). 
 
 2) NEUTERS. 
 § 109. Paradigm: hairfd, heart. 
 
 Sing. N. hairt& Plur. N. hairtona 
 
 G. hairtins 
 
 G. hairtane 
 
 D. hairtin 
 
 D. hairtam 
 
 A. hairtd 
 
 A. hairtSna. 
 
 § 110. Like hairto decline only, a few substantives: augo, 
 eye; auso, ear; harnild, a little child; auga-dauro, window; 
 pairkd, hole, eye of a needle; ka^rno, corn; gajukd, companion; 
 sigljo, seal. 
 
 Also the weak adjectives (§ 132). 
 
44 Inflections. Chap. I. 
 
 Note ]. Two nouns, namd, name, and matt), water, deviate from 
 
 the regular inflection in the plur.: 
 
 Sing. N. namd G. namins D. namin A. namd 
 Phir. N. namna G. {namni] D. namnam A. namna. 
 
 Of these there occur n. a. namna, d. rvatnam. Comp. § 108, n. 1. 
 
 3) FEMININES. 
 § 111. The feminines of the Ji-deelension arc divided into 
 two classes, stems in -dti- and in -em-. Their inflection is 
 alike. Paradigm: tug go, tongue; managei, multitude. 
 Sing. I*, tuggo managei 
 
 G. tuggfins manageins 
 
 D. tuggon managein 
 
 A. tuggon managein 
 
 Plur. N. tuggons manageins 
 
 G. tuggon6 manageino 
 
 D. tugg6m manageim 
 
 A. tuggons manageins. 
 
 § 112. Like tug go inflect many substantives; e.g., qvno, 
 woman; tlhtwo, dawn; swaihro, mother-in-law; azgd, ashes; 
 gatrvo, street; stairno, star; miko, week; — arhjo, heiress; hrunjo, 
 breastplate; tainjo, basket; nipjd, cousin; rapjd, account, number. 
 
 Note 1. Like Inggd go also the feminines of the weak adjectives 
 (§ 132). . 
 
 § \V?K Nearly all substantives going like managei are 
 formed from adjectives. Abstracts in -ei may be formed from 
 every adjective, hence the large number of these words; e. g., 
 diupei, depth; laggei, length; bleipei, mercy; mikilei, greatness; 
 hraidei, breadth; frddei, wisdom; hardu-hairtei, hard-heartedness; 
 drugkanei, drunkedness. Some have no corresponding adjectives, 
 but they likewise denote a state; e. g., paiirslei, thirst; magapci, 
 virginity. Only a few have a concrete meaning, as aipei, mother; 
 pramstei, grasshopper, locust; ki/pei, womb; marei, sea; hnirnei, 
 skull. 
 
 Xote 1. Adjectival abstracts in -ei and verbal abstracts in -cins 
 (eonip. § '03, n. 1) are closely related, as hduhei, height (from hduhs) 
 but hduheins, elevation (from hdutijati). Both have ace. sing, hduhein. 
 
 In one case there is confusion. There has been formed as genit. sing, 
 of majamereins, blasphemy, rvajamireins (John. X. 3^), in consequence 
 of which a nom. rvajamSrei is supposed to have existed. But such a 
 form is, according to its meaning, impossible. 
 
 Xotc 2. In codex B three noms. sing, in -ein are met with: liuhadein, 
 
Declension of Nouns. 45 
 
 light, II. Cor. IV. 4 (liuhadeins A; oomp. for this „ Bernhardt,), wtljahal- 
 pein, favor, Col. III. 25 (A wanting), gagudein, piety I. Tim. IV. 8 (gagvdei A). 
 Note 3. The comparatives, the superlatives in -ma, and the pres. 
 participles form their feminine according to managei (comp. § i:J2, ii.4). 
 
 C) MISCELLANEOUS INFLECTIONS. 
 
 (CONSONANTAL STEMS. ANOMALIES). 
 § 114. Names denoting relationship in -r. The words 
 hrbpar, brother; dai!Mar, daughter; swistar, sister; fadar, father, 
 having lost their original consonantal inflection in n. a. d. plur., 
 follow in these cases the r^-deelension (§ 104). Paradigm: 
 Sing. N. brojjar Plur. br6]?rjus 
 
 G. br6|7rs brSf>r8 
 
 D. br6{)r br6|?rum 
 
 A. broj^ar br6f>runs. 
 
 § 115. Pres. participles in Gothic decline like weak ad- 
 jectives (§ 133). An older (substantival) inflection, however, 
 is still retained in some participles used as nouns. Paradigm: 
 nasjands, savior. 
 
 Sing. N. nasjands Plur. nasjands 
 
 G. nasjandis nasjande 
 
 D. nasjand nasjandam 
 
 A. nasjand nasjands 
 
 V. nasjand — 
 
 Other examples are: fijands, enemy; frijbnds, friend; daupjands, 
 the Baptist; merjands, preacher; hisitands, neighbor; talzjands, 
 master; all-tvaldands, all-ruling, almighty; frarveiiands, avenger; 
 fraujintnds, ruler; midumdnds, mediator; gibands, giver. 
 
 § 116. A number of femi nines following in some cases 
 the 2-decl. (ansis §102), appear in others as short forms; the 
 latter are remains of an old consonantal inflection. Paradigm : 
 baiirgs, burg, town. 
 
 Sing. N. baiirgs Plur. N. baurgs 
 G. baurgs G. bafage 
 
 D. baiirg D. baiirgim 
 
 A. baiirg A. baurgs. 
 
 Like ha'Args inflect also alhs, temple; spatirds, race-course, 
 furlong; brusts, breast; dulps, feast; maihts, thing; miluks, milk; 
 mitaps {d), measure. 
 
 The word nahts, night, goes exactly like baiirgs, with the 
 exception of the dat. pi. which has nahtam. 
 
46 Inflections. Chap. 1. 
 
 Note 1. rvaihts and dulps follow also the i-declension throughout. 
 Thus gen. sing, waihts and Tvaihiais, dulpais. 
 
 § 117. Masculines with short (consonantal) cases: manna, 
 man; mendf>s, month; reiks, ruler; weitwods, witness (comp. 
 § 74, n. 2). They differ however in some forms. 
 
 1) manna has some forms of the ?i-deel. {guma § 107). 
 These forms we have put in Italics: 
 
 Sing. N. manna Plur. N. mans, mannans 
 
 G. mans Gr. manne 
 
 D. mann D. mannam 
 
 A. mannan A. mans, mannans. 
 
 2) menbjjs goes like baurgs (§ 116), but has dat. plur. 
 menopum. 
 
 3) Sing. Nom. reiks Gen. reikis Dat.V Ace. reik. 
 Plur. Nom. Ace. reiks Gen. reike Dat. reikam. 
 
 Also 7veitmdds occurring only in n. a. sing., n. g. pi. — Ac- 
 cordingly, the short forms only in n. (a.) plur., the other cases 
 are the same as in the a-decl. (dags § 90). Whether dat. sing, 
 be reik or reika, remains doubtful. 
 
 Note 1. Here belongs also n. hajdps, d. bajdpum, both (see 
 §140,n. 1). 
 
 § 118. fdn, fire, is in n. a. sing, a neuter of the a-decl. 
 {ivaurd § 93), while gen. dat. have funins, funin. — Plur. does 
 not occur. Comp. § 12, n. 3. 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 DECLENSION OF FOREIGN WORDS. 
 
 § 119. A number of foreign words were fully adopted 
 from the Greek and Latin into the Gothic through commercial 
 intercourse, so that their inflection is the same as that of ge- 
 nuine Gothic words. E g., pund, n., pound; marikreitus, m., 
 pearl; Kreks, m., Greek; karkara, f., dungeon; alem., n., oil; 
 kaisar, Caesar. 
 
 § 120. A second portion of foreign words were forced 
 on the Gothic language by Christianity and especially by the 
 version of the Bible. To these belong for the most part pro- 
 per nouns; these are still felt to be foreign elements and 
 
Declension of Adjectives. 47 
 
 have but imperfectly adopted the Gothic inflection. For their 
 treatment in Gothic no fixed rules can be given. Sometimes 
 they retain their Greek inflection, sometimes they adopt either 
 closely related Gothic or arbitrarily formed cases. - — Comp. 
 Vulfila ed. Bernhardt p. XXVIII. 
 
 Note 1. Greatest consistency of inflection of foreign words is found 
 in t]ie Greek masculines in -og, Lat. -us : they inflect like nouns of the 
 M-decl. (§§ 104. 105); e. g., Paitrus, Barpaulaumaius, Teilus, aipiskaupus, 
 iniaxonoq; apaiistaulus , anoaxoXoq; aggilus, ayyeXoq; sahbatus, sabbath; 
 but only in the sing.; plural forms which, however, are rare, follow the 
 j-declension ; e.g., apaustaideis, sabbalins, aggileis , aggiU, besides ag- 
 giljus. 
 
 Note 2. The following are cases where Greek inflection is retained 
 — alabalstraun, aXa^aaTQOv ; prailoriaun nQairdiQiov ; of IsraSleitSs 
 nom. plur. IsraUeitai = 'laQarjXixai E. IX. 4 or (with Gothic inflection) 
 IsraHiteis II. Cor. XI. 22. 
 
 Note 3. One example of arbitrary inflection may suffice: the Greek 
 miaxoXri is nom. sing. Gothic aipislaiile. Of this occur dat. sing, aipi- 
 siaulein, d. pi. aipisiaiilem, ace. pi. aipistaulans. 
 
 CHAP. II. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 § 121. In Gothic, as in all other Germanic languages, 
 adjectives have two forms of inflection — the weak and the 
 strong.- The sti'ong inflection is the original one, correspon- 
 ding to that of the related languages, the weak arose first on 
 Germanic soil. JEvery normal adjective may have both a weak 
 and a strong inflection. The distinction is a syntactic one: 
 the former is employed after the article and in most cases 
 where the adjective is used substantively, the latter when the 
 adjective is used predicatively, or attributively withgut the 
 ai-ticle. 
 
 A) STRONG ADJECTIVES. 
 
 § 122. The strong inflection of adjectives is in part the 
 same as the vowel- (or sti-ong) inflection of substantives vnth 
 which it was originally identical. Some cases in the Germanic 
 languages, however, have adopted the pronominal inflection, 
 in consequence of which the adjectival inflection no longer 
 fully corresponds to that of the substantives. The nom. sing, 
 neuter has two forms of the same value: that of the substantive 
 and that of the pronoun (in -atd). 
 
48 Inflections. Chap. II. 
 
 Adjectives in Gothic have three vowel decleusions, like 
 substantives. — 1) Adjectives of the a-declension which cor- 
 respond to the a-decL of nouns in the masc. and neut. (§ 89 
 et seq.), to the o-deel. (§ 96 et seq.) in the fern. — A sub- 
 division is formed by the /a-stenis, analogously to the corre- 
 sponding substantives. 2) Adjectives of the i-decl. correspon- 
 ding to tlie substantives under §§ 99— 103. 3) Adjectivesj* of 
 the ?/-decl. belonging to the nouns under §§ 104—106. 
 
 There are however only a few remains of classes 2) and 
 3). The few adjectives of these classes have in most cases 
 past into the first class, so that the normal strong declension 
 of adjectives in Gothic embraces the a-deelension and its 
 subdivisions, the ya-stems. 
 
 Note ]. To the strong declension belong all pronouns except 
 sania and s'dha (§ 132, n. 3), the cardinal numbers, inasmuch as they in- 
 flect adjectively. Also anpar, other, second, and adjectives of a more 
 general meaning, as alls, all; ^ano/i*, enough; Aa/fts , half ; midjis, medius; 
 fulls, full. 
 
 § 123. Paradigm of the strong adjective declension, 
 blinds, blind. Pronominal fonns differing from the inflection 
 of the corresponding substantives, are put in Italics: 
 
 Sing. Masc. Neut. 
 
 N. blinds blind, blindata 
 
 G. blindis 
 
 D. blindamma 
 
 A. hlindana blind, blindata 
 Plur. 
 
 N. blindai blinda 
 G. blindaize 
 
 D. blindaim 
 
 A. blindans blinda 
 
 Fem. 
 blinda 
 blindaizus 
 blindai 
 blinda 
 
 blindos 
 blindaizti 
 blindaim 
 blind6s 
 
 § 124. Here belong most adjectives. E. g., hails, healthy; 
 sinks, sick; juggs, young; triggrvs, true; stvinps, strong; ubils, 
 evil; aiweins, eternal; haipirvisks, wild; mahteigs, mighty; an- 
 steigs, merciful; manags, many, much; mtdags, angiy; handugs, 
 vrise, handy. — Also adjective pronouns, as meins, my; peim, 
 thy; seins, his; jains, that; the superlatives (§ 137), the parti- 
 ciples pret. pass., as numans, taken; nasips, saved (comp. § 184). 
 
 Xote 1. According to § 78. n. 2, the s of tke nom. sing, is dropped 
 1) after s, for example, smSs, swSsis, one's own; gciqiss, gaqissis, con- 
 senting. 2) after r preceded by a short vowel: anpar, other, second; 
 
Declension of Adjectives. 49 
 
 unsar, our; izrvar, your; Ivapar, which of the two; the now. pi. rvarai 
 must have had a nom. sing, "war, wary. 
 
 Note 2. The rules for the hardening of final soft spirants (§ 79) 
 must be noted, for example in: frops, frddis, wise; g6f>s, gOdis, good 
 (§ 74) Uufs, Hubis, beloved ; dau/s, daubis, deaf (§ 56, n. 1 ). 
 
 Note 3. Stems having tv immediately before their case-endings, 
 are in the nom. sing. masc. and neut. subject to the rules for final tv (§ 42). 
 The three words to which this refers, occur only in other cases, fatvai, 
 qiwai, MMA«waj must have had as noms. sing, f'aus, fau, few; qius, qiu, 
 alive; usskaus, usskau, cautious, wakeful. According to usskawjan (to 
 (re) awake § 42, n. 2), also the form usskams might be supposed instead 
 of usskaus. For lasiws, see § 42, n. 1. 
 
 Note 4. The adjective pronouns in -ar — unsar, izrvar, anpar, 
 hapar, have in the neuter sing, only the shorter forms unsar, hn>ar, etc. 
 
 § 125. Adjecti\e stems whose case-endings are preceded 
 fey J (ya-stems) have most of their forms like blinds. Only a 
 few forms undergo a change under the influence of the /. 
 Also here, as with nouns, we distinguish between short- and 
 longsyllabic ja-stems. 
 
 Paradigm of a short-syllabic ja-atem: midjis, middle. 
 
 Sing. Masc. Neut. Fern. 
 
 N. midjis midi, midjata midja 
 
 6. midjis midjaizds 
 
 D. midjamma midjai 
 
 A. midjana midi, midjata midja 
 
 Plur. 
 
 N. midjai midja midj6s 
 
 (^. midjaize midjaizd 
 
 D. midjaim midjaim 
 
 A. midjans midja midjds 
 
 § 126. The inflection of the masc. midjis is related to 
 that of the noun harjis (§§ 90. 92), the neuter midi to kuni 
 (§ 93. 95). The fern, midja has no deviation whatever. 
 
 To this class belong very few adjectives. Like midjis go 
 also those whose stems end in a vowel: niujis new, -tdjis, 
 doing (as ubUtdjis evil-doing). 
 
 Note 1. It is owing to the small number of these adjectives that 
 a few forms of the above paradigm are not met with. Thus the short 
 form of the neuter midi is taken only according to those with long syllables 
 (§ 127), and that of niujis would be niwi: only niujaia occurs. 
 
 Note 2. The adjective stem frija-, free, which occurs in the fem. 
 sing., frija, frijaizOs. frijai, frija, and in the masc. forms — a. s. frijana, 
 n. pi. frijai, a. frijans, is contracted in the n. s. masc. — freis (for frijis). 
 The g. s. also, if found, would be freis. 
 
 Brauue, Goth, grammar. 4 
 
5() Inflections. C'liap. 11. 
 
 § 127. The plural of long-syllabic stems iu -Ja does not 
 differ from that of midjis. The sing, of the paradigm tvilpeis 
 (stem tvilpja-), wild, inflects thus: 
 
 Fern. 
 wilj'i 
 
 [wil|'jaiz6s] 
 willjjai 
 will>ia 
 
 Siug. Masc. Neut. 
 
 N. wilfjeis wil)'i, will^jata 
 
 (t. [wilfieis] 
 
 D. wilfyamma 
 
 A. wil|;ijana wil})i, wilj'jata 
 § 128. The mase. is related to the noun hairdeis (§§ 00. 
 02) , the fern, to handi (§ 96. 98). None of the few adjectives 
 of this class occurs in the gen. sing. 
 
 Further Examples: alpeis, old; fairneis, old; airzeis, astray; 
 ti'opeis, sweet. 
 
 § 129. Of adjectives of the /- and w-decl. in Gothic, as 
 has been stated iu § 112, only a few remains are found, viz.: 
 nom. sing, of all genders and ace. sing. neut. All other cases 
 adopted the inflection of the ya-stems (§§125 — 127). The same 
 is the case with the weak forms (§ 132, n. 1). 
 
 § 130. The adjective stems in -i are related to the sub- 
 stantives balgs, ansls (§§ 99 — 103). Such are: firains, clean; 
 gamains, common; bi~ij,ks, useful; analaugns, secret; anasiuns, 
 visible; andanems, agreeable; andaseis, abominable; sels, kind; 
 Slits, sweet; gafdurs, sober (unfaurs, not sober, tattling); alja- 
 kunps, alien. The paradigm hrains is thus inflected: 
 
 Sing. Masc. Neut. Fern. 
 
 N. hrains hrain [hrainjata] hrains 
 
 G. [hraineis] [lirainjaizos] 
 
 D. hrainjamma hrainjai 
 
 A. hrainjata hrain hrainja 
 
 Plur. 
 
 N. hrainjai hrainja hrainj6s 
 
 etc. I 
 
 Note 1. Examples for the gen. plur. and the longer neuter form 
 (hrainjata) are wanting. 
 
 Note 2. A word may with certainty be referred to this class l)if 
 it occurs in the n. s. f. (hrains), 2) if, besides n. s. masc. and neut., also 
 cases withy are found. If only noms. masc. and neut. hrains, hrain, occur, 
 then the word may also inflect like blinds (§ 123); if only ^-cases (as 
 hrainjamma) are found, it may decline like rvitpeis , midjis (§ 127. 125). 
 Other adjectivi'S also , however without sufficient oxamijles but for other 
 
Declension of Adjectives. 
 
 51 
 
 considerations, are included in this class, as skauns, beautiful; aups, waste; 
 hauns, base; hleif>s, kind; gadofs, fitting. 
 
 Note 3. From adverbs in -iba (§210) .adjectival i-stems may be 
 inferred, as arniba, gatimiba. 
 
 § 131. The adjective stems in u are related to the substan- 
 tives, sunus (fem. handus), faihu (§§ 104 — 106). Such are: hardus, 
 hard; qalrrus, patient; paursus, Axj\ tulgiis, steadfast; manwus, 
 ready; aggnms, narrow; aglus, difficult; seipus, late; plaqus, 
 tender; tnaliiwinfriis, twelve years old. The paradigm hardus 
 inflects thus: 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 N. 
 
 hardus 
 
 hardu, hardjata 
 
 Piardus] 
 
 A. 
 
 hardjana 
 
 hardu, hardjata 
 
 hardja 
 
 Plur. 
 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 liardjai 
 
 [hardja] 
 
 hardj&s 
 
 etc. 
 
 Note 1. Whether adjectives belong here may be seen from their 
 nom. sing. Others also however, merely because of their _/-cases, have been 
 put into this class, as laushandus, empty-handed; hnasqus, soft, kaiirus, 
 heavy. 
 
 Note 2. From the adverb glaggmuha (§ 210) the existence of an adj. 
 glaggtvus may be inferred. 
 
 B) WEAK ADJECTIVES. 
 § 132. The weak declension of adjectives is in every 
 respect identical with the weak or n-declension of nouns 
 (§§ 107 — 112). But it must be borne in mind, that the fem. 
 of the weak adj. follows the inflection of the paradigm tuggd 
 (eomp. § 112, n. 1). — Paradigm of a weak adjective {blinds § 123): 
 
 Sing. Masc. Neut. Fem. 
 
 N. blinda blindS blind6 
 
 G. blindins blindSns 
 
 D. blindin blindon 
 
 A. blindan blind6 blinddn 
 
 Plur. 
 N. blindans blinddna blind6ns 
 
 Gr. blindane blind6n0 
 
 D. blindam blindSm 
 
 A. blindans blindSua blind6ns 
 
 Note 1. Like blinda inflect all weak adjectives. Of^a-stems: n. s. 
 midja, midjd, midjd (comp. § 125), ivilpja (§ 127); — «-stems: hrainja, 
 hrainjo; — M-stems: hardja, hardjO (comp. § 129 et seq.). 
 
 Note 2. Some adjectives occur only in their weak forms, as us- 
 grudja, idle, despondent; alaparba, poor; usfairina, blameless; inkilpo, 
 
 3* 
 
S2 InflectioAs. Chap. 11. 
 
 pregnant, and a few others which will in part have to be regarded as sub- 
 stantives, (comp. Lichtenheld, zs. fda. XVIII, 41 n.). 
 
 Note a. All ordinal numbers from 3 onwards are inflected only as 
 weak adjectives (comp. § 146), and the pronouns sama and silba (§ 156). 
 
 Note 4. Lastly prs. participles (§ 133), comparatives (§ 136), and 
 the superlative formations in -ma (§ 139) are inflected ouly as weak ad- 
 jectives. All these adjectives, liowcvcr, have the feminine ac- 
 cording to the paradigm managei (§ 113, n. 3). 
 
 C) DECLENSION OF THE PARTICIPLES. 
 
 § 133. The pres. pai-ticiple has lost the sti'ong inflection 
 
 and declines like a weak adj., but with the feminine in -ei 
 
 (§ 132, n. 4). The nom. sing. masc. only has frequently both 
 
 the strong and the weak inflection. Paradigm gibands, giving: 
 
 Sing. Masc. Neut. 
 
 j^ gibands f ij,^^^. 
 
 gibanda | 
 G. gibandins 
 
 D. gibandin 
 
 A. gibandan gibaudo 
 
 Plur. 
 
 N. gibandans gibandona 
 
 G. gibandang 
 
 D. gjbandam i gibandeim 
 
 A. gibandans gibanddna i gibandeins. 
 Note 1. Concerning the shorter inflection of some participles used 
 as substantives, see § 115. 
 
 § 134. Pret. participles passive, like an ordinary adj., 
 have the strong and weak inflections. Thus of the strong 
 verb ffibmi: 
 
 Partic. pret. strong: m. gibans n. giban, gibanata i.gibana 
 weak: gibana giband giband 
 
 Of the weak verb nasjan: 
 Partic. pret. strong: m. nasips n. nasip, nasidata f. nasida 
 weak: nasida nasido nasido. 
 
 Note 1. For the interchange between ]> and d in the part. pret. of 
 strong verbs, see § 74. 
 
 D) COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 1) COMPARATIVE DEGREE. 
 § 135. In Gothic the comparative degree of adjectives is 
 foimed by means of two suffixes — -iz- and -oz- to which 
 the endings of the weak adjective are added. 
 
 The formation by means of -iz- is the more common. It 
 
 Fem. 
 gibandei 
 
 gibandeins 
 
 gibandein 
 
 gibandein 
 
 gibandeins 
 gibandeind 
 
Declension of Adjectives. 53 
 
 is found in adjectives of any kind; e. g., mhnagiza (from ma- 
 hags, a-stem), alpiza (from alpeis §§ 127. 28), hardiza (from 
 hardus § 131). — The suffix -dz- is found only with «-stems 
 — frdddza (from frop), swinpoza (from swinps). 
 
 Note 1. The adj. juggs (young lias compar. jA/iiza according to 
 § 50, n. 1. The superl. does not occur. 
 
 § 136. The inflection of comparatives goes exactly like 
 adjectives, the feminine ending in ei (§ 132, n. 4). 
 
 Sing. N. mase. froddza neut. frdddzo fem. frddozei 
 G. frdddzins froddzeins 
 
 etc., exactly like the pres. partic. (§ 133). 
 
 2) SUPERLATIVE DEGREE. 
 
 § 137. The superlative degree, like the comparative, is 
 formed in two ways: by means of the suffixe -ist- or -ost-; 
 e. g., managists (from manags), armdsts (from arms, poor). The 
 superl., like an ordinary adjective, follows the strong and the 
 weak inflections. 
 
 Note 1. No rule can be given in connection with the appearance 
 of the d- or the 2-forms, save that the <5-form is found only with «-stems. 
 It must be taken for granted that a word forming the compar. by means 
 of i, does the same also in the superlative, and that, likewise, the o-forms 
 correspond to one another. But since we have not sufficient examples, 
 this can only be applied to a few words. 
 
 Note 2. The strong superlative does not seem to have had a neuter 
 form in -ata. 
 
 3) IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 
 
 § 138. Some adjectives do not admit of any comparison. 
 In this case comparatives and superlatives of a corresponding 
 meaning, whose positives are wanting, are used instead. 
 gdps, (d) good Comp. batiza Superl. hatists 
 ubils, evil „ wairsiza „ — 
 
 mikils, great „ maiza , maists 
 
 leiiils, little „ minniza , minnists 
 
 sineigs, old „ — „ sinista. 
 
 § 139. The following six superlatives which have no 
 positive are formed from adverbial stems by means of an 
 m-suffix, which is either simple, as in fru-ma or innu-ma, 
 auhu-ma — or compound, as in af-tuma, if-tuma, hlei-duma. 
 
 Two of them have received a comparative meaning: au- 
 huma, higher; hleiduma left {dQi6rsQ6q)\ the rest have a super- 
 lative or an intensive meaning: aftuma, the last; Ifluma, the 
 next; innuma, the innermost; frwma, the first. 
 
54 Inflections. Chap. III. 
 
 These words follow the weak inflection, but with the 
 feminine in ei, exactly like comparatives. 
 
 Note 1. Some of the abovo words are again compared in the usual 
 manner: aftumists, the last; aukumists, the highest; frumisis, the first. — 
 From the forms hindumisis , the outermost; spiduinists, the last (from 
 *splps , and spediza, spedisis) wo may infer the existence of the forms 
 hinduma and spSdtima, which do not occur. 
 
 CHAP. III. NUMERALS. 
 
 1) CARDINALS. 
 
 § 140. The first three numerals are declinable in all 
 cases and genders. 
 
 1. ains, n. ain and ainala, f. aina, inflect like the strong 
 adjective blinds (§ 123). The plur. has the meaning of ^^only,,. 
 The weak form ahia, aino = ^^ solus,,. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Neul. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 N. 
 
 twai 
 
 twa 
 
 twos 
 
 G. 
 
 twaddjc 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 twaim 
 
 
 twaim 
 
 A. 
 
 twans 
 
 twa 
 
 tw6s 
 
 N. — Irija 
 
 Or. J^rije 
 
 D. Vrim 
 
 A. j^rins Jrija 
 
 )7rins. 
 
 Xom. masc. and fem. which do not occur, can with certainty 
 be taken as preis. 
 
 Note 1. The definite dual number two, both, ccfKpoTsgoi is expressed 
 by bai declining like irvai. It is found in masc. n. bai, d. bairn, a. bans; 
 neut. n. a. ba. There occurs also a longer form with the same meaning, n. ba- 
 jups, d. hajupum; its inflection is that of a consonantal substantive (§ 117). 
 
 § 141. The numbers from 4 — 19 are of one gender. Of 
 these occur: 4 fidmor, 5 flmf, 6 saihs, 1 sihun, 8 ahtau, 9 wmw, 
 10 taihun, 11 amft/ (§ 56 n.l), 12 twalif, 14 fidwdrtaihun , 15 
 fimftaihun. They are all used as indeclinables, but gen. and 
 dat. may follow the inflection of the f-decl. (§ 99 et. seq.). Thus 
 of 4 dat. fldmorim, of 9 gen. niune, of 10 dat. taihunim, of 11 
 dat. airdibim, of 12 gen. itvalibS, dat. tmalibim. 
 
 Note 1. In compounds fidur- (see § 15, n. 1) is found for fidrvdr: 
 fidurfalps, {ourfold;' fidurdoffs, space of 4 days; fidui'ragineis , tetrarch. 
 Comp. Kluge, Beitr. VI. 394. 
 
Numerals. 55 
 
 § 142. The tens from 20 — 60 are formed by adding the 
 plural tigjus (from * tigus, decade) to the units, tigjus goes 
 regularly like sunus (§ 104). The thing counted is always put 
 in the genetive. 20, twaitigjus; 30, *preisUgjus. (of which are 
 found, gen. prijitigiwe, aec. prinstiguns) , 40, fidwdrtigjus ; 50 
 fimftigjus, 60 saihstigjiis. 
 
 § 143. From 70 onwards tehund takes the place of tigjus: 
 70, sibuntehund ; 80, ahtautehund; 90, niuntehund; 100, taihun- 
 tehund and taihuniaihund. tehund is a noun generally left un- 
 declined. An inflected gen. sing, is once (Luc. XV, 7) met with: 
 in niuntehundis jah niunS garaihtaize. 
 
 § 144. The hundreds are formed with the plur. of the 
 neuter liund (a hundred). Of these are found ttva hunda, 200; 
 prija hunda, 300; fimfhunda, 500; niun hunda, 900. 
 
 § 145. The number 1000, piJtsundi, is a feminine noun 
 (going like bandi § 96) and is followed by the gen. Besides 
 the regular plur. pij,sundjds, the neut. plur. twa pixsundja is 
 found once (Esdr. II, 15). The thousands occurring are: 2000, 
 tmbs pilsundjds; 3000, .g. pUsundjts; 4000,' fidwdr pfcsundjds; 
 5000, fimf pilsundjds; 10000, taihunp.; 20000, dat., mip twaim- 
 tigum ptsundjd. 
 
 Note 1. Numbers are very often expressed by letters (comp. 
 § 1, n. 2). Therefore so many examples for numbers are wanting. 
 
 2) ORDINALS. 
 § 146. The first two ordinals have stems different from 
 the corresponding cardinals. 1"' fruma, n. frumo, f. frumel 
 .(§ 139), and the superlative formation frumists, the first (§ 139, 
 n. 1). 2""^ anpar, the second, other, inflects as a strong adjective 
 (§ 122, n. 1, § 124, ns. 1. 4). — All other ordinals are connected 
 with the cardinals and inflect like weak adjectives (§132, n. 3). 
 Of these are found: 3-^ pridja, 5*'' *fimfta (only in 15«'), •5*'' 
 saihsta, S*"" ahtuda, 9*'' niunda, 10"' talhunda, 15*'' fimfta- 
 taihunda. Only the second part suffers inflection: dat. sing. 
 in jera fimftataihundin Luc. Ill, 1. 
 
 3) OTHER NUMERALS. 
 § 147. A distributive number is frveihnai, two at a time, 
 which occurs only in the dat. ace. fem. tweihnaim, tweihnds. 
 
56 
 
 Inflections. Cap. TV. 
 
 Note 1. The distributives are expressed by means of hazuh, harji 
 zuh (§§ l(i4. 165), or by the prepos. bi, as insandida ins ttvans hanzuh 
 „by twos, Luke X. 1, hi ttvans I. Cor. XIV. 27. 
 
 § 148. Multiplicativeg are formed by means of the adj. 
 falp-: ainf Clips, single; fidurfcUps, fourfold; taihunlalhundfcUps, 
 a hundredfold; managfalps, manyfold. 
 
 § 149. Numeral adverbs indicating ^^how many times, 
 are expressed by the dats. sinpa, sinpam (nom. sinps, journey, 
 a time, motion) preceded by the cardinal: ainamma sinpa, once; 
 fivaim sinpam, twice; prim sinpam, thrice; fimf s., five times; 
 sihun s., seven times. — With the ordinal number: anparamma 
 sinpa, the second time. 
 
 Note ]. As an adverb is also found the nfiwt. pridjd, the third time 
 11. Cor. XII. 14. 
 
 CHAP. IV. PRONOUNS. 
 
 1) PERSONAL PRONOUNS OF COMMON GENDER 
 
 (REFLEXIVUM). 
 
 
 § 150. 
 
 
 I. person. 2. person. 
 
 Reflexivum. 
 
 Sing. N. ik }>u 
 
 — 
 
 G. meina j^eina 
 
 seina 
 
 D. mis {jus 
 
 sis 
 
 A. mik fiuk 
 
 sik 
 
 Dual N. wit — 
 
 — 
 
 G. ugkara igqara 
 
 seina 
 
 D. ugkis igqis 
 
 sis 
 
 A. ugkis, ugk igqis 
 
 sik 
 
 Plur. N. weis jus 
 
 — 
 
 G. unsara izwara 
 
 seina 
 
 D. uns, unsis izwis 
 
 sis 
 
 A. uns, unsis izwis 
 
 sik. 
 
 N ote 1. VoT ugkis, igqis, etc. also uggkis, iggqis is written; comp 
 § 67, n. 1. 
 
 Note 2. The n. dual. 2n<i pers. not being found, may with certainty 
 bo inferred to be jut. 
 
 § 151. Fi'om stems of these pronouns adjectives are 
 derived, the so-called possessive pronouns. 1'' p.: m. meins, n. 
 mein, meinaia, f. meina, mine; 2^'^ f). peins, thine; refl. seins, his. 
 Plurals: P* p. unsar, our; 2"* p. izwar, your. Of dual forms 
 only igqar is found, 1=' p. vpould be ugkar. 
 
 Note J. These pronominal adjectives inflect exactly like the strong 
 
Pronouns. 
 
 adjective; for unsar, iztvar, comp. § 124, n. 1 and 4. — No weak inflection 
 is met with. 
 
 Note 2. The reflexive iWn* occurs only in g. d. a. The nominatives 
 of all genders and numbers are replaced by the genitives of the third 
 person; is, izds; izS, izo. (§ 152). 
 
 § 152. 
 
 2) THIRD PERSON. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 
 Neut. 
 
 N. 
 
 is, he 
 
 
 ita, it 
 
 G. 
 
 
 is 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 imma 
 
 
 A. 
 
 ina 
 
 
 ita 
 
 Plur. 
 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 eis 
 
 
 ija 
 
 G. 
 
 
 ize 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 im 
 
 
 A. ins 
 
 Pja] 
 
 Fem. 
 si, she 
 iz6s 
 izai 
 ija 
 
 izd 
 im 
 ij6s 
 
 Note 1'. Ace. and gen. pi. masc. and nom. plur. fem. do not occur, 
 but the forms given are quite certain. 
 
 3) DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 § 153. The simple demonstative pronoun sa, so, pata is 
 used both as demonstrative pronoun Jhis, that, (to express 
 the Greek ovrog or amog) and, with a weakened force, as 
 article (the). The latter use is predominant. — The neuter 
 sing, (as also the inter rog. pr. § 159) has preserved its instru- 
 mental case. 
 
 Masc. Neut. Fem. 
 
 sa fjata so 
 
 }>is j^fzos 
 
 ]7amma ]7izai 
 
 J'ana ]7ata ]>d 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 Instr. 
 Plur. 
 
 N. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 )7ai 
 
 l^izS 
 ]7aim 
 
 ]>d 
 
 lp6s 
 }>iz6 
 J^aim 
 j>6s. 
 
 ]'ans ]>6 
 
 Note 1 . The final as of the dissyllabic forms are dropped before 
 the vowels of words attached to them as enclitics ; comp. § 4, n. I . 
 
 § 154. A compound demonstrative pronoun is formed by 
 affixing the enclitic particle uh to the simple demonsti'ative 
 pronouns. Comp. § 24, n. 2. It is used like the simple dem. 
 
58 
 
 Inflections. Cbap. IV. 
 
 sa meaning i^this, that, (= Greek ovtog or at'rdc), but always 
 demonstratively, not as article. — Its forms are: 
 
 Sing. Masc. 
 N. sah 
 (t. J^izuh 
 
 D. I'ammuh 
 
 A. jjanuh 
 Plur. 
 
 N. l^aih 
 fi. [f>izeli] 
 
 D. [)7aimuliJ 
 
 A. [fianzuli] 
 Note I. The forms in [ ] arc not found. 
 § 155. A definite pronoun hi- (nom. *his == /* § 152) 
 meaning Jhis,, occurs only in temporal phrases in the dative 
 m. n. himma and in the ace. m. n. hina, ita, e. g. himma daga, 
 hina daya, to-day, till to-day; and hita, till now. 
 
 § 156. Jains*), n. jainata, f. jaina ^that, (for the ai comp. 
 § 20) inflects like blinds (§ 124). 
 
 As weak adjectives decline silba, self, and sama, or, with 
 the ailicle, sa sama, the same (comp. § 132, n. 3). 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 I^atiih 
 
 soh 
 
 
 [)7iz6ziihJ 
 
 
 [|7izaih] 
 
 I'atuh 
 
 [{.oh] 
 
 w>b^ 
 
 [jjozuh] 
 
 
 [Hzoh] 
 
 
 [Jjaimuh] 
 
 [l'6h] 
 
 []7dziih] 
 
 J 
 
 4) RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 § 157. The Gothic language has no simple relative pro- 
 noun, but forms the latter from the simple demonstr. pron. by 
 adding the pai-ticle ei which, when used independently assumes 
 the meaning of the conjunction ^^that, in order that,. The relat. 
 pronoun inflects thus: 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 N. 
 
 saei 
 
 fiatei 
 
 soei 
 
 G. 
 
 Jjizei 
 
 
 ]jiz6zei 
 
 D. 
 
 l^ammei 
 
 
 J'izaiei 
 
 A. 
 
 l^anei 
 
 )?atei 
 
 ]j6ci 
 
 Instr. 
 
 — 
 
 feei 
 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 I'aiei 
 
 l76ei 
 
 )76zei 
 
 G. 
 
 )?izeei 
 
 
 [}>iz6ei] 
 
 D. 
 
 l^aimei 
 
 
 jjaimei 
 
 A. 
 
 ):'anzei 
 
 {.dei 
 
 )j6zei. 
 
 ") Comp. N. E. yon. — Professor St. H. Carpenter in his Anglo-Saxon 
 Grammar p. 1 7, § 32, n. 2, says : yon is still used ajs a demonstrative at- 
 the South; e. g., yon house for that house. — Tr. 
 
Pronouns. 59 
 
 Note I. The neut. instrumental f>iei is used only as a conjunction. 
 
 Note ■!. A secondary form oi patei is pel being used only in con- 
 nection with -hah (§ 164, n. 1) and (like f>alei) as a conjunction (that). 
 Comp. Beitr. IV. p. 407. 
 
 Note 3. Instead of the n. s. inasc. saei, the form izeii^ used, formed 
 from the 3<i pers. pron. (§ 152), in place of the n. f. sdei, the form sei (i. e. 
 si-ei § 10, n. 2) occurs, even more frequently than the former, izei oc- 
 casionally stands as n. plur. masc. (in place of eizei which does not occur), 
 for example, pai izei himaitanai sind Gal. VI. 13. — For izei'm sometimes 
 written izS; comp. § 17, n. 1. 
 
 Note 4. For the change of final * to z before ei, see § 78 c. 
 
 § 158. When the relat. clause refers to a pronoun of the 
 first or second pers., the relative particle is added to it. Tlius, 
 ikei, I who, }niei thou who, puzei, to thee (to) in whom (as 
 Mk. 1. 11) pukei, thee whom, Juzei you who; izwizei, to you 
 (to) whom. 
 
 5) INTEREOGATIVES. 
 
 § 159. The simple interrogative stem, ha- forms the 
 interrogative pronoun has, whoV (Lat. quis) A substantive 
 following has is always put in the gen., as ho mizdono = 
 Tiva (iui9-6v Mt. V. 46. 
 
 Sing. Masc. Neut. Fem. 
 
 N. hjas hra hj6 
 
 G. luis [hrizos] 
 
 D. Iwamma hjizai 
 
 A. Iwana Iwa hjo 
 
 Instr. — hrg — 
 
 Note 1. The gen. fem. is not found. The instmmental case occurs 
 only with the neuter, as with sa (§ 153). 
 
 Note 2. has has no plur.; comp. however hanzuh (§ 164, n.). 
 Note 3. has also discharges the function of an indef. pron. Comp. 
 § 162, n. 2. 
 
 § 160. From the stem ha is derived hapar, which of 
 the two? and harj'is which, whoV A substantive following al- 
 ways takes the genitive. Both words inflect like strong ad- 
 jectives — hapar like anpa?- (comp. § 124, n. 1); harjis (like 
 midj'is § 125), f. harja, n. harjata (not harii). 
 
 §161. The following are compound interrogatives: /ci^ezfo 
 of what sort (= Lat. qualis?)? (Its correl. is swaleiksZ= Lat. 
 talis); helaups, f., helauda, how great? quantus? (Correlative 
 swalaups, tantus). These words inflect like strong adjectives. 
 Note 1. The form heleiks (Lu. I. 29) for hileiks is probably a mistake 
 of the writer. 
 
60 Inflections. Chap. IV. 
 
 6) INDEFINITE PK0N0UN8. 
 
 § 162. The indefinite pronoun sums, f. suma, n. sum, 
 sumaia, some, inflects like a strong adjective and is used 
 adjectively; in the sense of ^some one, somebody,, it stands 
 also as a substantive. 
 
 Note 1. An enumerative expression is sums-sums (=Crr.6fiev — 
 () 6s). In most oases u/i (§ 24, n. 2) is added to the second part, some- 
 times also to the first, as sumai-snmai/i or sumaih-sumaih, some — others. 
 
 Note 1. The interrogative pron. h/as (159) is also very often used 
 as an indef. pron. „any one,. 
 
 § 163. The enclitic particle -hwi forms indefinites all of 
 which occur only with the negative particle ni. Their meaning 
 is ..nobody,. — 
 
 a) The singular of manna, man (§ 117) combined with -hun 
 in the sense of ..nobody,. — The forms occurring are: 
 
 n. ni mannahun, g. n.l manshun, 
 d. ni mannhun, a. ni mannanhun. 
 
 b) Likewise there is used substantively ni hashun, nobody 
 (from /((w § 159). Only the nom. sing, is found. 
 
 c) By far most frequent is ni ainshun used both without 
 ..none,, and \vith a following substantive ..no, ..not any,,. The 
 substantive following always takes the pai-titive genit., e. g., ni 
 ainshun pirvS no servant Luke XVI. 3 — The forms of ainshun 
 in some cases difPer from the simple form aitis (§ 140). 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Masc. Neut. 
 
 Fein. 
 
 N. 
 
 ainshun ainhun 
 
 ainfihun 
 
 G. 
 
 ainishun 
 
 — 
 
 D. 
 
 ainummghun 
 
 ainaihun 
 
 A. 
 
 ainn&hun 1 ^^^^^ 
 amohun 
 
 ainohun. 
 
 Note 1. -hun occurs also in combination with the subst. h/eila (§ 97), 
 as heildhuH, for an hour, GaJ. II. 5 (ni heilohun ovdh XQog S^av). 
 
 % 164. The word for ..every, is fonned by adding uh 
 to the interrogative pronouns. 
 
 a) hazuh, eveiy. The noun, or pronoun, following takes 
 the genitive, hazuh which in some cases differs from the 
 simple from has (§ 159) is thus inflected: 
 
Conjugation. I. Strong Verbs. 61 
 
 Sing. Masc. Neut. 
 
 Fem 
 
 N. hjazuh luah 
 
 h/6h 
 
 Gr. Ivizuh 
 
 — 
 
 D. lirammgh 
 
 — 
 
 A. Iwan6h Ivah 
 
 — 
 
 Plur. 
 
 
 A. luanzuh — 
 
 — , 
 
 Of the plur. only the ace. h-anzuh is found. 
 
 Note 1. The indefinite relative ^whoever, nWhosoever, (Lat. qiiicun- 
 que, German wer nur immer) is expressed 1) by hazuh saei, or, with 
 sa prefixed, sahazuh saei. In place of saei also izei occurs (§ 157, n. 3). 
 
 — These forms hold good only for the n. s. masc. But the nom. neut. 
 paiahah pei (pei=patei^ 157, n. 2) occurs also twice (John XV. 7, 16). 
 
 — 2) by pishazuk followed by saei or ei in all cases, the first part, 
 pis, remaining uninfiected: Masc. n. pishatuh saei, d. pishammSh saei, 
 a. pishandh saei; — Neuter n. &. pisJvah pei (or patei), g.pishizuh pei, 
 d. pishamm&h, pei. 
 
 § 165. b) harjizuh, every, each. 
 
 Sing. Masc. Neut. Fem. 
 
 N. hyarjizuh h;arjat6h 
 
 G. luarjizuh 
 
 D. luarjammSh 
 
 A. luarjandh [hrarjatdh] hrarjSh 
 
 Note 1. harjizuh is also compounded with (undeclinable) ain, as 
 ainharjizuh, every (one); neut. ainhrarjatdh d. ainfvarjammSh, etc. 
 
 § 166. „Each of two, is rendered by k-aparuh which is 
 found only in the dat. haparammeh Skeir. 46 (an evident cor- 
 rection for the haparamma of the MS. For this comp. „Bern- 
 hardt„). — A more emphatic form is ainhaparuh (comp. § 165, 
 n. 1), each one of two. 
 
 CHAP. V. CON JUGATIOllf. 
 
 GENERAL REMARKS. 
 § 167. The Gothic verb has the following forms: 
 
 1) Two Voices, Active and Passive. The Active Voice 
 alone shows still a great variety of forms. The Middle Voice 
 is retained in only a few, but frequently occuring, forms of 
 the Pres. Ind. and Optative. The middle forms have a passive 
 force. Hence the Middle Voice is also called Passive Voice 
 or Medio-Passive. 
 
 2) Two Tenses, Present and Preterit (Perfect). The 
 
62 Inflections. Cliap. V. 
 
 Preterit is the only tense for the past. A Future is not 
 found; it is generally represented by the present, rarely by 
 circumlocution with auxiliary verbs (skiilmi, shall; haban, have; 
 duginnun, begin). 
 
 8) Two complete Moods, Indicative and Optative (also 
 called Subjunctive). An Imperative is formed from the 
 Present only, from \vhich it takes the Second Persons of all 
 three Numbers, and one First Person Plur. — A Third Person 
 Imper. Sing, and Plur. occurs only in a few examples. The 
 Third Person Imper. is generally expressed by the Third 
 Person (>i)t. But also the Second and l<1rst Persons Imper. 
 are often expressed 1)y the Optat. 
 
 4) Three Numbers, Singular, Dual, and Plural. The 
 Third Person Dual is wanting. 
 
 5) Three Verbal Nouns, Infinitive, Present Participle 
 with an active. Perfect Participle, with a passive meaning. 
 
 § liilS. Verbs in Gothic are, from a Germano- Gothic 
 standpoint, to be arranged according as they form their 
 Preterits in relation to the Presents: Thus we have Two Chief 
 Classes: 
 
 I. STRONG VERBS. 
 
 Strong verbs form their preterits without an addition, but 
 by a change of the radical vowel, or in some cases by redupli- 
 cation. Thus we have the following subdivisions: 
 
 1) Verbs with an ablaut. These form the preterit without 
 reduplication, but by changing the vowel of the present (eomp. 
 § 29), e. g., Unda, I bind; hand, I bound. 
 
 2) Reduplicated Verbs. The preterit has a redupli- 
 cation but no vowel-change, e. g., halda, I hold; haihald, I held. 
 
 3) Verbs with both a reduplication and an ablaut. 
 To this class belong only a few verbs, e. g., let a, I let; lailot, 
 I let (pret.). 
 
 II. WEAK VERBS. 
 
 Weak verbs form the preterit by an increase at the end, 
 which begins with a dental consonant, e. g., nasja, I save; 
 nasida, I saved. In this added -da some see a form of the 
 verb ^to do, (Germanic don), and so the weak preterit is also 
 called J compound preterit,. 
 
Conjugation. I. Strong Verbs. 
 
 63 
 
 Weak -verbs are all derivative verbs. According to the 
 formative suffixes which appear most clearly in the preterit 
 forms, the weak verbs are divided into four classes: 1) Suffix 
 i (in the present y): nasja, nasi-da. 2) Suffix d: salho, salbo-da. 
 
 3) Suffix at (pai"tially obscured in the present): haba, habai-da. 
 
 4) Suffix no (present n): fullna, fuUnd-da. 
 
 Note 1. The small number" of verbs which cannot be referred to 
 the two chief classes, must, according to this classification, be considered 
 irregular. 
 
 I. STRONG VERBS. 
 A. INFLECTION OF STRONG VERBS. 
 
 § 169. The inflection of sti'ong verbs is the same in all 
 three classes (§ 168). Therefore we first give the paradigms 
 of inflection and then discuss the formation (different in each 
 class) of tense-stems. As paradigms we give a reduplicated 
 verb, haiian, to be called, and two ablaut verbs, niman, to take; 
 hludan, to offer. 
 
 - § 170. a) PRESENT ACTIVE. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Sing. 1. nima 
 
 2. nimis 
 
 3. nimi)? 
 
 biuda 
 biudis 
 biudi)7 
 
 haita 
 haitis 
 haiti}> 
 
 Dual 1. nim6s 
 2. nimats 
 
 biudos 
 biudats 
 
 haitSs 
 haitats 
 
 Plur. 1. nimam 
 
 2. nimijj 
 
 3. nimand 
 
 biudam 
 
 biudi}> 
 
 biudand 
 
 haitam 
 
 haitij? 
 
 haitand 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Sing. 1. nimau 
 
 2. nimais 
 
 3. nimai 
 
 biudau 
 biudais 
 biudai 
 
 liaitau 
 haitais 
 haitai 
 
 Dual 1. nimaiwa 
 2. nimaits 
 
 biudaiwa 
 biudaits 
 
 haitaiwa 
 haitaits 
 
 Plur. 1. nimaima 
 
 2. nimai}* 
 
 3. nimaina 
 
 biudaima 
 
 biudai}? 
 
 biudaina 
 
 haitaima 
 
 haitai}? 
 
 haitaina 
 
 Imperative. 
 Sing. 2. nim 
 
 3. nimadau 
 
 biuj? 
 biudadau 
 
 halt 
 haitadau 
 
 Dual 3. nimats 
 
 biudats 
 
 haitats 
 
64 
 
 Inflections. Chap. V. 
 
 Pliir. 1. nimam 
 
 biudam 
 
 haitam 
 
 2. nimit) 
 
 biudi}) 
 
 liaiti)? 
 
 :i. nimandaii 
 
 biudandau 
 
 liaitandau 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 
 
 niman 
 
 bindau 
 
 haitan 
 
 Participle. 
 
 
 
 nimands 
 
 biudands 
 
 haitands. 
 
 b) PRETERIT. 
 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 
 
 Sing. 1. nam 
 
 ban)' 
 
 haihait 
 
 2. uamt 
 
 baust 
 
 liaihaist 
 
 3. nam 
 
 bau]> 
 
 liaihait 
 
 Dual 1. ugmu 
 
 budu 
 
 liaihaitu 
 
 2. nemnts 
 
 buduts 
 
 haihaituts 
 
 Plur. ]. nemum 
 
 budum 
 
 haihaitum 
 
 ■>. ngmu)? 
 
 budulj - 
 
 haihaitu)? 
 
 3. nemun 
 
 budun 
 
 haihaitun 
 
 Optative. 
 
 
 
 Sing. 1. nemjau 
 
 budjau 
 
 baihaitjau 
 
 2. nSmeis 
 
 budeis . 
 
 haihaiteis 
 
 3. ngmi 
 
 budi 
 
 haihaiti 
 
 Dual 1. nemeiwa 
 
 budeiwa 
 
 haihaiteiwa 
 
 2. nemeits 
 
 budeits 
 
 haihaiteits 
 
 Plur. 1. nemeima 
 
 budeima 
 
 haihaiteima 
 
 2. nemeif> 
 
 budeij' 
 
 haihaiteil? 
 
 3. nemeina 
 
 budeina 
 
 haihaiteina. 
 
 c) PARTICIPLE PRETERIT PASSIVE, 
 numans budans haitans 
 
 d) MEDIO-PASSIV : PRESENT. 
 Indicative. 
 
 Sing. 1. nimada 
 
 biudada 
 
 haitada 
 
 2. nimaza 
 
 biudaza 
 
 haitaza 
 
 3. nimada 
 
 biudada 
 
 haitada 
 
 Plur. 1. 2. 3. nimanda 
 
 biudanda 
 
 haitauda 
 
 Optative. 
 
 
 
 Sing. 1. nimaidau 
 
 biudaidau 
 
 haitaidau 
 
 2. nimaizau 
 
 biudaizau 
 
 haitaizau 
 
 3. nimaidau 
 
 biudaidau 
 
 haitaidau 
 
 Plur. 1. 2. 3. nimaiudau 
 
 biudaindau 
 
 haitaindau. 
 
 Note 1. biudan falls under the rules for final soft spirants (§ 79): 
 Imperat. s. Mup, pret. baup (comp. § 74); likewise giban: gif, gaf 
 (comp. § 56). 
 
Conjugation. I. Strong Verbs. 65 
 
 Note 2. Tho termination of tlie '!»<> pers. s. pret., -I, shows the 
 application of the rule for consonants before dentals (§ 81). Final b of the 
 stems becomes f:(jafl (from giban), grufl (from graban); no examples for 
 ]>/: skdjH or skufi'.' (from ska/jjan); — g remains unchanged in magt (§ 66, 
 n. 1), other examples are wanting; neither are there any examples for kt 
 {rvdkt or rvuhfi comp. I5 aS, n. 2) ; — dentals are changed into s: qasi 
 from qipan (i; 71, n. 3), bausl from biudan (§75, n. 1), haihaist from 
 Jiaitan (§ 69, n. 2). — From saian, saisu , we have 2 nepers, saisusi. On 
 account of the want of examples it is not certain whether all stems ending 
 in a vowel received -st. — rinnan has 2°'* p. pret. rant (§ 80). 
 
 Note 3. The third person sing, imperat. of one strong verb is 
 only found twice : atsleigadau , xarajidroj Mt. XXVII, 42 ; Mk. XV, 32 
 (comp. 186, 1). The 3<i pers. plur. may with certainty be formed according 
 to the weak verb (§ 192, n. 1). 
 
 Note 4. Dual forms of verbs occur scantily; the l^' p. dual opt. 
 pret., nemeima, etc. never occurs; it is given according to the corre- 
 sponding form of the present, nimama. Also 2nii pers. d. pret. opt. is 
 inferred form the form of the anomalous rvileiis (§ 205). 
 
 Note 5. Concerning the irregular formation of the present of some 
 strong verbs with j, see § 206, n. 
 
 B) TENSE FORMATION OF STRONG VERBS. 
 
 1) ABLAUT VERBS. 
 
 § 171. These verbs form their tense-stems by a regular 
 change of the root -vowel, by the so-called ablaut. The 
 several ablaut-series and the conditions of their appearance 
 have already been given in §§ 30 — 35. To each of these 
 series belong ablaut verbs of which, accordingly, six classes 
 are to be distinguished. Each series consists of four vowels 
 which appear in the formation of the verb in the following 
 manner: 1) The first vowel belongs to the present and the 
 tenses formed from it (pres. partic, infinitive, also medio- 
 passive). 2) The second vowel is that of the sing. pret. indie. 
 3) The third vowel appears in the plur. pret. indie, and throu- 
 ghout the pret. optative. 4) The fourth vowel belongs to the 
 preterit participle. 
 
 In order accurately to detennine the inflection of a sti-ong 
 verb, the following forms are usually given; 1) 1'* p. sing. pres. 
 indie, or also infin. pres.; 2) 1^' p. s. pret. indie; 3) l**p. pi. 
 pret. ind.; 4) partie. prefer. 
 
 The following are the ablaut verbs arranged into their 
 several classes. 
 
 Brauue, Goth, grammar. . 5 
 
66 Inflections. Chap. V. 
 
 § 172. Class I. Verbs of the fii-st ablaut-series: ei di i 
 (ai) i (ai) (comp. § 30). E. g., greipa, graip, gripum, gripant, 
 to gripe, seize, i before h Qv) is broken to at (§20): leih-a, 
 Idih-, laihum, lailvans, to lend. 
 
 Note 1. Here helou^: deig an, to knead; steigan, to mount; gateihan, 
 to show; peihan, to thrive, increase; preihan, to tlrroug; tveihan, to fight; 
 
 — heilan, to bite; dis-skreitan, to rend, tear; ga-smeitan, to anoint, smear; 
 -weitan {inrveitan to worship; frameitan, to punish); beidan, to wait; 
 leipan, to go; sneipan, to cut; — weipan, to crown; dreiban, to drive; 
 bi-leiban, to stay; sweiban, to cease; — reisan, to rise; skeinan, to shine; 
 hneitvan, to decline; Sjyeiwan, to spit. 
 
 Note 2. The n of keinan , to germinate (0. H. G. Arman) occurs 
 only in the present stem (comp. § 206, b) ; the part. pret. kijans only in 
 uskijanala (Luke VIII, 6). The pret. *kai, *kijum is not found , a weak 
 pret. of the fourth weak conj. (keinvda § 195, n. 2) occiuring instead. 
 Comp. Kluge, Gernianische Conjugation p. 143. 
 
 §173. Class II. Verbs of the second ablaut-series: 2M aw M 
 (azi) u (aii) (comp. § 31). E. g., biuda, baup, budum, budans, to 
 offer; with breaking (§ 24): tiuha, tduh, tauhum, tauhans, to 
 tow, lead. 
 
 Note I. Here belong: siukan, to be sick; biugan, to bend, bow; 
 driitgan, to serve as a soldier; liugan, to lie; pliuhan, to flee; — giutan, 
 to pour; uspriulan, to grieve; niutan, to enjoy; liudan, to grow; — 
 dis-hniupan, to tear to pieces; sliupan, to slip, creep; af-skiuban, to 
 shove, cast away; hiufan, to weep; — driusan, to fall; kiusan, to choose; 
 fra-liusan, to lose; kriustan, to gnash with the teeth. 
 
 Note 2. The vowel of the present is irregular in l&ka, lauK, lukum, 
 lukans, to lock. — Some also suppose *wulan, to boil, according to pres. 
 Iiart. wulandans, E. XII, 11 (comp. § 175, n. 2). 
 
 § 174. Class III. Verbs of the third ablaut-seiies : i {at) 
 a u{au) u(au) (comp. 32). E. g., binda, band, bundum, bundans, 
 to bind, or with breaking (§§ 20. 24): mairpa, warp, wa(i,rpum, 
 waurpans. 
 
 Note 1. Other verbs of this class: brinnan, to bum; du-ginuan, 
 to beginn; aflinnan, to depart; rinnan, to run; sphinan,U) sinn^ winnun, 
 to trouble oneself; — Irimpan, to tread, tramp; — fra-slindan, to swallow 
 up: windan, to wind: hiapiin, to catch; finpan, to find; pinsan, to draw: 
 
 — stiggan, to sting (only by conjectiu-e in Mt. V, 29); Miggwan, to beat; 
 siggwan, to sing; sigqan, to sink; stigqan, to thrust; drigkan, to drink: 
 
 — gildan, to be of value, yield : swillan, to die ; hilpan, to help ; filhan, 
 to hide; mitwan, to rob: — bairgan, to hide, keep; gairdan, to gird; 
 w air pan, to become; ga-pairsan, to wither; srvatrban, to wipe; h-airbaii, 
 to walk: — JTriskan, to thresh: ga-wrisfjan, to bear fruit (found only in 
 the present tense, Lu. Till, 14). 
 
Conjngafion. I. Strong Verbs. 67 
 
 Note 2. According to its present also hriggan would belong here; 
 see § 208. 
 
 § 175. Class IV. Verbs of the fourth ablaut-series: i 
 (ai) a e u (au) (comp. § 33). E. g., nima, nam, nemum, numans, 
 to take, or with breaking (§§ 20. 24) : baira, bar, berum, ba^rans, 
 to bear. 
 
 Note 1. Like these go: qiman, to come; ga-iiman, to suit; stilan, 
 to steal; ga-tairan, to tear to pieces; — brikan, to break (§ 33, n. 1). 
 
 Note 2. Here belongs also trudan, [trap}, [Iridum], trudans, to 
 tread, the present vowel being u instead oil, (0. N. troSa, iratS, (rdSum, 
 trotSinti; O.H.G. according to V: trelan, irai, tr&tum, (relan). According 
 to trudan also wulan, to boil, is more correctly to be supposed (§ 173, n. 2). 
 
 § 176. Class V. Verbs of the fifth ablaut series: i (at) 
 a e i (af) (comp. § 34). E. g. mita, mat, melum, mitans, to mea- 
 sure; giba, gaf, gebum, gibans, to give. 
 
 Note I. Here belong: tvrikan, to persecute, wreak; rikan (found 
 only in the pres.), to heap up; ligan, to lie; ga-wigan, to mowe, wag; 
 saihian, to see (comp. § 34, n. 1); • — hlifan, to steal; — bigitan, to obtain, 
 get; sitan,, to sit; fitan, to bear (?), rvidan, to bind; qipan, to say; nipan, 
 to help (?); — lisan, to gather; ga-nisan, to recover; wisan, to remain. 
 
 Note 2. sniwan, to hurry, has snirva, snau (§ 42), snirvum, sniwans. 
 Once occurs the pret. snauh in which h is added (comp. § 62, n. 4), once 
 snitvun instead of snSwuh (§ 7,*n. 3). — Like sniwan goes in all probability 
 diman, to die, of which only the past part., pata dimand, is found. 
 
 Note 3. The pret. sing, of Uan has irregularly it instead of at; it 
 is found only in the compound frit (from fra-ilan, to consume, eat up, 
 § 4, n. 1. § 7 b). Thus Uan, H, Hum, Hans. Comp. 0. H. G. pret. az, fr&z 
 Notker, O.N. at. Moller, Englische Studien 3, 154. 
 
 Note 4. Te n in fraihnan, to ask, occurs only in the pres. stem: 
 fraihna, frah, frihum, fraihans (see § 2u6b). 
 
 Note 5. They in bidjan is found only in the present stem: hidja, 
 lap, bidum, bidans (Comp. § 206 a). Once the present occurs without j ; 
 usbida Bom. IX, 3. 
 
 § 177. Class VI. Verbs of the sixth ablaut series; a 6 
 a (Comp. § 35). E. g., ala, ol, dlum, alans, to grow. 
 
 Note 1. Like alan go: sakan, to fight; rvakan, to wake, watch; 
 dragan, to carry, drag; slahan, to strike; pwahan, to wash; hlapan, to 
 load; ga-dabau, to behoove; ga-draban, to hew; graban, to dig, grave; 
 skaban, to shave; malan, to grind; swaran, to swear; far an, to fare; 
 us-anan, to breathe out, die. 
 
 Note 2. Seven verbs of this class have j in the present stem 
 which is wanting in the pret. and past partic, e. g. hafjan , to heave, 
 forms: hafja, hdf, hdfum, ha fans. Like this go: frapjan, to understand; 
 hlahjan, to laugh; garapjan, to count; skapjan, to make, shape; skap- 
 jan, to hurt; walisjan, to grow (comp. § 206a). 
 
 5* 
 
68 Inflections. Chap. Y. 
 
 Xotc a. The n of standan, to stand, occurs onlj- in the present 
 stem, thus: sianda, sidp, stdpum, \stapans\ (comp. § 206 b). 
 
 2) EEDUPLICATED VERBS. 
 
 § 178. Reduplicated verbs form the preterit without a 
 change of the root- vowel, but only by prefixing' a redupli- 
 cation. Thi.s reduplication consists of the initial consonant 
 together with a constant reduplication vowel ai (short e, see § 2U), 
 as liaita, I am called, pret. haihail ; hopa, I boast, ha'ihop. When 
 the word begins ^vith two consonants, only the lirst is repeated, 
 e. g., fraisa, I tempt, faifrais. The initial combinations, st, sk, \sp\ 
 are repeated as a whole, e. g., {ga-) stalda, I possess, stats laid; 
 skaida, I separate, skaiskaid; when the word begins with a 
 vowel, only the reduplication vowel is prefixed, e. g., auka, 
 1 increase, aiauk. 
 
 The paiiic. pret. has no reduplication ; haitans, fraisans, etc. 
 
 § 179. According to their root -vowel, the reduplicated 
 verbs are divided into five classes. The root -vowels are 1) a 
 (d), 2) e, 3) ai, 4) o, 5) au. Since however the vowel remains 
 unchanged throughout the verb, the inflection of these verbs 
 is the same for all. Because of this the paradigm hail an given 
 in § 170 is sufficient for all classes. 
 
 Those reduplicated verbs of which the preterits do occur, are : 
 
 1) haldan, to hold; falpan, to fold, staldan, to possess; — 
 fdhan, to catch; hdhan, to hang (§ 62, n. 2). 
 
 2) slepan, to sleep (for its preterit, comp. 78, n. 3). 
 
 3) aikan, to say; fraisan, to tempt; haitan, to be called; 
 laikan, to leap; maitan, to cut off; skaidan, to separate. 
 
 4) hbpan, to boast, flokan, to lament. 
 
 5) aukan, to increase. 
 
 Note 1. A number of verbs the preterits of which are not found, 
 are with certainty referred to these classes: 1) us-alpan, to grow old; 
 blandan, to blend, communicate with; saltan, to salt; waldan, to rule, 
 wield; 2) blesan, to blow; 3) ga-pldihan, to caress; 4) btvlnn, to worship; 
 5) slautan, to smite ; hlaupan, to run. 
 
 Note 2. bauan, to dwell, which belongs here, as is evident from f^ 
 other Germanic dialects, has the weak pret. bauaida, also the fem. bauains 
 (§ 103, n. 1) shows that it belongs to the third weak conjug. (§ 19,'i). But 
 the 3<i pers. sing, indie, pres. is bauip throughout and hence belongs still 
 to the strong conj. Nothing can be determined as to bnauan, to rub, 
 (bi-nauan?) , which occurs only once, while trauan follows the weak in- 
 flection throughout. 
 
Conjugation, I. Strong Verbs. ()9 
 
 Note 3. gaggan, to go, partic. pret. gaggans, has lost its pret. 
 *gaigagg, the latter being replaced by other formations. Comp. § 207. 
 
 Note 4. Instead of fVukan of which only the preterit faiflvkun 
 occurs, the form flSkan is generally given (accord, to § ISl). This has 
 been proved to be wrong by Grall6e, Noorden Zuid 4, 54 et seq. 
 
 3) REDUPLICATED ABLAUT VERBS. 
 
 § 180. A number of verbs having the stem vowel e (or 
 ai at the end of the root) take the ablaut of the e — o-series 
 (see § 36). The preter. has the vowel o, and also, in addition, 
 a reduplication. The pret. part, shows the same vowel as the 
 present. According to the vowel of the present, these verbs 
 are divided into two classes: 
 
 § 181. I. Stems ending in a consonant have e in the 
 present, e.g. letan, to let. This forms: leta, lailot, laildtum, 
 letans. Like this go: gretan {gaigrot), to weep; tekan (iaitdk), 
 to touch; redan (rairop) to counsel. 
 
 § 182. II. Roots ending in a vowel change the e into 
 ai (§ 22). Thus go three verbs: saian, to sow: saia, saisd, sai- 
 sdum, saians (for additional forms, comp. § 22, n. 1, § 170, n. 2); 
 maian (waiwo), to blow; iaian (laild), to revile. 
 
 II. WEAK VERBS. 
 
 " § 183. The four classes of the weak verbs (§ 168) have 
 the formation and inflection of the preterit alike. This is also 
 the case in the paiiic. pret. which regularly adds the suffix 
 -da- (nom. masc. ps) in all classes to the verbal stem. The 
 latter varies according to the formative suffix and causes in 
 the present forms a considerable difference of inflection. We 
 first give the preterit which has an inflection common to all 
 classes. 
 
 1) INFLECTION OF THE WEAK PRETERIT. 
 
 ' § 184. Paradigms: nasida, salbdda, habaida, fullnbda. 
 One paradigm may suffice to show the inflection of all classes. 
 
70 
 
 Inflections. Chap. V. 
 
 Indicative. 
 Sing. 1. nasi-da 
 
 2. nasi-des 
 
 3. nasi-da 
 
 Dual 1. nasi-d6du 
 2. nasi-deduts 
 
 Optative. 
 nasi-d©djau 
 nasi-dgdeis 
 nasi-dSdi 
 
 nasi-dSdeiwa 
 nasi-d6deits 
 
 Plur. 1. nasi-dgdum nasi-dedeima 
 
 2. uasi-dedu}' nasi-d6dei)' 
 
 3. nasi-dedun nasi-dSdeina. 
 
 Mote 1. The remarks in § 170, n. 4 as to !«' and 2nd dual hold good 
 here also. 
 
 2) FIRST WEAK CONJUGATION {-Jan). 
 ^§ 185. Verbs of this class have the formative suffix l 
 which appears iu the present as J (infin. -j'an). _ This / is con- 
 tracted vFith a following i into ei after a long close syllable, 
 while in other t-ases Ji. is retained (comp. 44). Thus we arrive 
 at two subdivisions: a) Verbs with short stem syllables, e.g. 
 nasjan, to save, or with long open syllables, e. g., stdjan, to 
 judge, b) Verbs with long close syllables, as sdkjan, to seek, 
 and polysyllables, e. g., mikiljan, to praise. 
 § 186. 
 
 a) PRESENT (ACTIVE). 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Sing. 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 nasja 
 nasjis 
 nasji}> 
 
 stoja 
 st6jis 
 stojij? 
 
 sdkja 
 s&keis 
 sokei]? 
 
 Dual 1. 
 2. 
 
 nasj6s 
 nafijats 
 
 st6j6s 
 st&jats 
 
 s6kj6s 
 sdkjats 
 
 Plur. 1. 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 uasjam 
 
 nasji]? 
 
 nasjand 
 
 stdjam 
 
 stoji}' 
 
 stdjand 
 
 s6kjam 
 sSkeiJ) 
 s&kjand. 
 
 
 OPTATIVE. 
 
 
 Sing. 1. 
 2. 
 
 nasjau 
 nasjais 
 
 stojau 
 etc. 
 
 sokjau 
 etc. 
 
 3. 
 
 nasjai 
 
 
 
 Dual 1. 
 2. 
 
 nasjaiwa 
 
 nasjaits 
 
 
 
 Plur. 1. 
 2. 
 
 nasjaima 
 nasjaij? 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 nasjaina. 
 
 
 
Conjugation. II. Weak Verbs. 
 
 71 
 
 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 nasei 
 nasjadau 
 
 [stauei] 
 st&jadau 
 
 s6kei 
 s&kjadau 
 
 Dual 
 
 2. 
 
 nasjats 
 
 st6jats 
 
 sokjats 
 
 Plur. 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 nasjain 
 
 nasji]? 
 
 nasjandau 
 
 st6jam 
 
 st6ji)? 
 
 st6jandau 
 
 sdkjam 
 s6kei]7 
 s6kjandau 
 
 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 
 
 
 nasjan 
 
 stojan 
 
 s6kjau. 
 
 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 
 
 
 nasjands 
 
 st6jands j 
 
 s6kjands. 
 
 b) PRETEKIT. 
 
 nasida std,uida | 
 
 {Inflection, see § 184). 
 
 sOkida. 
 
 c) PARTICIPLE PRETERIT (PASSIVE), 
 nasifis staiiil^s | s6ki)7s. 
 
 sdkjada 
 sdkjaza 
 
 sdkjanda. 
 
 sokjaidau 
 s6kjaizau 
 
 sokjaindau. 
 
 d) MEDIO-PASSIVE: PRESENT. 
 INDICATIVE. 
 Sing. 1. 3. uasjada st6jada 
 2. nasjaza stdjaza 
 
 Pliir. 1.2. 3. nasjanda stojanda 
 
 OPTATIVE. 
 Sing. 1. 3. nasjaidau stSjaidau 
 2. nasjaizau stdjaizau 
 
 Plur. 1.2.3. nasjaindau st&jaindau 
 
 Note 1. As an example for 3* p. s. imperat. occurs lausjadau, 
 Jvaaa9a) Mt. XXVII, 43 (Comp. § 170, n. 3). The 3'' p. plur. would be 
 lausjandau (accord, to § 192, n. I). 
 
 Note 2. The 2"iii p. s. imperat. of stdjan is, in accordance with the 
 preter. stauida, slauei (§ 2(j). 
 
 § 187. Further examples of tliis very numerous class are: 
 a) 1) Shoii-syllabic verbs: wcdjan, to choose; gortanijan, to 
 tame; uf-panjan, to extend; warjan, to forbid, beware; lagjan, 
 to lay; us-tvakjan, to wake up; satjan, to set; masjun, to clothe, 
 vest; hazjan, to praise; huljan, to cover. 2) Verbs ending in 
 a vowel: taujan (imperat. sing, tarvei, pret. lawida, p. p. iawips), 
 to do; *slraujan {stramida) to strew; qiujan, (qiwida), to quicken; 
 
72 Inflections. Chap. >'. 
 
 ana-niujan (-niwida), to renew; siujan, to sew; — For *mdjan, 
 to weaiy, and *ddjan, to harass, see § 26, a. 
 
 b) Long- and polysyllabic verbs : meljan, to write: merjan, 
 to preach; siponjan, to be a disciple; hnaiwjan, to humble; 
 hrainjan, to cleanse; hausjan, to hear; piupjan, to bless; — 
 brannjan, to burn; sand Jan, to send; namnjan, to name; and- 
 bdhtjan to serve; glitmunjan, to shine, glitter; hadrnjan, to blow 
 the horn. 
 
 Note 1. kaupatjan, to buffet, has pret. kaupasta (tho / being 
 syncopated), but past partic. kaupatips (Comp. 209). 
 
 Note 2. A few primary verbs witli j in the present stem have 
 the present the same as the weak verbs of the first class. Their preter. 
 inflection is either strong, or weak without the formative suffix i. Comp. 
 § 206 a. (§209). 
 
 Note 3. In a very few cases there appears a leaning towards the 
 2'"i weak conj. For hausjan, to hear, hausjdn is found several times; 
 gaheistjan, to leaven, but past partic. un-heisijdps, unleavened. 
 
 Note 4. Like the 2n<' pers. du., plur. of the imperat. of nasjan go 
 the interjectional hirjais, Mrjip. The sing, hiri is irregular. Comp. § 219. 
 
 § 188. Verbs of this class are derived from verbs, ad- 
 jectives, and substantives. They have predominantly a causative 
 meaning. Causatives from ablaut verbs have the vowel of the 
 preter. sing., as wandjan, to wend, turn (from windan); dragkjan, 
 to give to drink (from driffkan); ur-raisjan, to cause to rise 
 (from ur-reisan, to rise); ga-drausjan, to cause to fall (from 
 driusan). — Also verbs derived from adjectives and substantives 
 possess, with a few exceptions, a causative meaning, e. g., 
 hduhjan, to make high, exalt (from hduhs); hailjan, to heal 
 (from liailf:'); marnijan, to warm (from warms); — dailjan, to 
 deal (out) (from dai/s); iaiknjan, to make a sign, show (from 
 taikns), etc. — A few, however, have an intransitive meaning, 
 e. g. sipdnjan, to be a disciple; faiirhtjan, to fear. 
 
 3) SECOND WEAK CONJUGATION (_-8n). 
 
 § 189. The formative suffix o occurs not only in the 
 preter., but also throughout the present, and crowds out the 
 vowels at the beginning of the endings of the strong verb. 
 Paradigm: salhdn, to anoint. 
 
Conjugation. II. Weak Verbs. 
 
 
 a) 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 
 Indicat. 
 
 Optat. 
 
 Imper. 
 
 Sing. 1. 
 
 salbo 
 
 salb& 
 
 — 
 
 2. 
 
 salb6s 
 
 salb6s 
 
 salb6 
 
 3. 
 
 salb6)? 
 
 salb6 
 
 salbodau 
 
 Dual 1. 
 
 salb&s 
 
 salbowa 
 
 — 
 
 2. 
 
 salbSts 
 
 salb&ts 
 
 salbots 
 
 Plur. 1. 
 
 salbom 
 
 salbdma 
 
 salbom 
 
 2. 
 
 salbol? 
 
 salb6]7 
 
 salb6> 
 
 :<. 
 
 salb6n(l 
 
 salb6na 
 
 salbondau, 
 
 Infinitive: salb&u. 
 Participle: salbonds. 
 
 b) PRETERIT. 
 salboda, -des, -da, etc. (sec § 184). 
 
 e) PARTICIPLE PRETER. PASSIVE. 
 
 salboj^s. 
 
 d) MEDIO-PASSIVE: PRESENT. 
 
 Indicat. Optat. 
 
 Sing. I. 3. salb&da salb6dau 
 
 2. salbSza salbozau 
 
 Plur. 1.2. 3. salbdnda salb6ndau. 
 
 Note 1. No example for the Sii p. s. and pi. imperat. of this conjug. 
 is found, but it may, like other forms, be inferred with cei;tainty, e. g., 
 the dual forms, or the 2n<i pers. s. middle: salbvza, salhSzau, which have 
 also been moulded after the analogy of the other conjugations. 
 
 § 190. The number of verbs of the second class is larger 
 than that of the third, but is far smaller than that of the verbs in 
 -Jan. Examples: miton, to think; harbdn, to walk; /iskdn, to 
 fish; sidon, to practice; idreigon, to repent; awiliuddn, to thank; 
 piudandn, to be king; faginbn, to rejoice; fraujinbn, to rule; 
 reikindn, to reign; frljbn, to love; sunjdn, to justify; hausjdn 
 (§187,n.3). 
 
 4) THIRD WEAK CONJUGATION (-an). 
 
 § 191. Verbs of this class have the formative suffix -ai. 
 
 This, however, appears only throughout the preterit (and in 
 
 the partic. pret.), while in the present and in all formations 
 
 belonging to it, it occurs in only a few forms, the greater 
 
74 
 
 Inflections. Chap. V. 
 
 number appearing as present forms of the strong verb. The 
 ai is found in the present only where the termination of the 
 sti'ong verb begins with i which is crowded out by the ai 
 (thus in the 2°* and 3'^ sing., 2"'' plur. indie, and 2"'' plur. 
 imperat), and in the 2""^ sing. im])erat. (which lias no termi- 
 nation). The ai is wanting before endings beginning with a (o). 
 § 192. Paradigm haban, to have. 
 
 a) PRESENT. 
 
 Indicat. 
 Sing. ]. haba 
 
 2. \abais 
 
 3. habaif> 
 
 Dual 1. habos 
 2. habats 
 
 Plur. 1. habam 
 
 2. babai]' 
 
 3. haband 
 
 Optat. 
 habau 
 habais 
 habai 
 
 habaiwa 
 habaits 
 
 habaima 
 
 habai}> 
 
 habaina 
 
 Imperat. 
 
 habai 
 babadau 
 
 habats 
 
 habam 
 habaij' 
 habandau. 
 
 Infinitive: haban. 
 Participle: habands. 
 
 b) PRETEEIT. 
 habaida, -dgs, -da etc. {s. S 1S4). 
 
 c) PARTICIPLE PRET. 
 
 bs. 
 
 d) MEDIO-PASSIVE: PRESENT. 
 
 Indicat. Optat. 
 
 Sing. 1. 3. habada habaidau 
 
 2. habaza habaizau 
 
 Plur. habanda habaindau. 
 
 Note 1. In this conjug. only a 3d pers. pi. imperat. is found: liu- 
 gandau, ya/jtrjadrcDaav I. Cor. VII, 9. 
 
 § 193. Verbs of this class are mostly intransitive. Their 
 number is comparatively small. Examples: pahan, to be silent; 
 pulan, to suffer; liban, to live; ana-silan, to grow still; fijan, 
 to hate; trauan, to trust (comp. § 26), saurgan, to sorrow; 
 Uugan, to marry. 
 
 Xote 1. hatan, to hate, shows a tendency to merge into the first 
 weak conjug. (hatjan); — hauan, to dwell, has 3<i s. pres. indie, strong: 
 bauip, comp. 179, n. 2. 
 
Conjugation. II. Weak Verbs. 75 
 
 5) FOURTH WEAK CONJUGATION (-nan). 
 § 194. In Gothic verbs with a passive meaning are for- 
 med by means of the suffix -no in the preter., n (no) in the 
 present. They are derived either from adjectives or from 
 strong verbs. In the latter case they attach themselves to 
 the tense stem of the partic. pret. pass. Examples: a) From 
 strong verbs: and-bundnan (bindan), to be unbound, loosened; 
 us-bruknan {brikan) to be broken off; dis-skritnan (dis-skreitan), 
 to be torn to pieces, shreds; fra-lusnan {fra-liusmi), to be lost; 
 gaskaidnan (skaidan), to be separated, divorced; andletnan (letan) 
 to be dismissed; — b) from adjectives: gahailnan (hails) to be 
 healed; mikilnan {mikils), to be magnified; weihnan (tveihs), to 
 be hallo vred; gadaupnan, to be put to death, die. 
 
 § 195. The present of passive verbs inflects like that of 
 strong verbs. Passive verbs have no medio-passive and no 
 partic. pret. Paradigm: fullnan {fulls, full; fulljan, to fill), to 
 be filled. 
 
 L— 
 
 
 a) 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 Sing. 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 Indicat. 
 fullna 
 fullnis 
 fuUnil? 
 
 Optat. 
 fuUnau 
 fuUnais 
 fullnai 
 
 Imperat. 
 
 fuUn 
 fullnadau 
 
 Dual 1. 
 2. 
 
 fulln6s 
 fullnats 
 
 fuUnaiwa 
 fiiUnaits 
 
 fuUnats 
 
 Plur. 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 fullnam 
 fullnil^ 
 fuUnand 
 Infin 
 Partic 
 
 fullnaima 
 
 fuUnaiJ? 
 
 fullnaina 
 
 . : fuUnan. 
 
 !.: fuUnands. 
 
 fullnam 
 
 fullni]7 
 
 fullnandau. 
 
 b) PRETERIT. 
 fuUnoda, -des, -da (*. § 184). 
 Note ]. The imperat. of this class occurs only in one verb in 
 2nd sing. 
 
 Note 2. The pret. keindda, germinated, is a new formation from 
 the strong present keinan (§ 172, n. 2), and even its meaning shows that 
 it cannot be referred to this class. 
 
70 Inflootioiis. C'li;ip. A'. 
 
 III. IRREGUIAR VERBS. 
 
 1) PEETEEIT-PEESENT VERBS. 
 § 196. The preterit-present verbs are strong ^•erbs the 
 preterits of which assumed a present meaning. In consequence 
 thereof the real presents have been lost. These verbs form 
 their preterits according to the weak conjugation by adding 
 da (ja, pa, sa\ comp. §§ 75. 81); their inflection is that of nasida 
 (§ 184). The preterit-present ^•erbs may, with reference to 
 their present stinictxire, be distributed among the different 
 classes of the strong verbs. The preteritive present has pre- 
 cisely the same inflection as tlie strong preterit. In Gothic 
 there are thirteen verbs of this kind, which we arrange ac- 
 cording to the corresponding ablaut-series. 
 
 § 197. First Ablaut-Series. 
 
 1) Pres. wait, I know, 2'"' p. waist, plur. witum. Opt. 
 witjau; Pret. irissa, Opt. Pret. wiasedjau; Pres. Partic. 
 witands; Infin. [iritan\. 
 
 2) Ms, I know (oceuring in this form only, causative lais- 
 jan, to teach. 
 
 Note 1. Tlie full strong verb ut wait is *weitan, wait, wiium, 
 wilaiis, retained in the ((impounds fraweitan, to avenge, and inweitan, 
 to worship. — Also a verb of the 3* weak conjug., witan, rvitaida (to 
 observe) is related to it. 
 
 § 198. Second Ablaut-Series. 
 
 3) daug, impers.: it is fit (found only in this form). 
 
 § 199. Third Ablaut- Series. 
 
 4) kann, I know, 2'"' p. kant (also kannt, comp. § 80), plur. 
 kmmum; Pret. Indie. kiinl>a, Opt. Pret. kunpedjau, Partic. 
 Pret. kunps. known; Infin. kunnan; Pres. Partic. kunnands. 
 
 5) parf, I need; 2"'' p. parft, plur. paurbum; Opt. paurbjau; 
 Pret. paurfta; Partic. Pret. paurfts, needy, necessary. Pres. 
 V&xi'Ki. paiirbands, needing; Inf [paurban]. Comp. § 56, n. 2. 
 
 6) ga-dars, I dare, -^\. ga-daursum, O'pt. gadatirsjau; Pret. 
 gadaiirsta, Inf gadaursan. 
 
 Note 1. To /f««re belong the compounds with the same inflection: 
 frakann, I despise; gakann, I subject myself. — With this kann must 
 not be confounded the derivative verb kunnan, to know, of the S* weak 
 conjug., Pret. kunnaida,, with is compounds: anakunnan dvayiyvcoaxeiv, 
 to read; at kunnan, to grant; gakunnan, to know. — uf kunnan (to know, 
 
Conjugation. III. Irregular Verbs. 77 
 
 recognize) forms the present according to the 3'i weak conjiig., but has 
 the Pret. ufhunpa, Partic. Pret., however, ufkuimaips. 
 § 200. Fourth Ablaut- Series. 
 
 7) skal, I shall, 2"* p. skall, pi. skulum, Opt. skuljau; Pret. 
 skulda. Opt. Pret. skuldvdjau, Part. Pret. skidds, owiug; Inf. 
 [skulan]; Pres. Part, skulands. 
 
 8) man, I mean, 2'"' p. [mant], plur. murium, Opt. munjau; 
 Pret. munda, Partie. Pret. munds Luke III, 23; Inf. munan, 
 Pres. Part, munands. 
 
 Note 1. Like man goes gaman, I remember. — To this there 
 belongs also a derivative weak verb of the 3<i conjug., tniman, munaida, 
 to wish, have in mind. 
 
 § 201. Fifth Ablaut-Series. 
 
 9) mag, I can, 2"'' p. magt, 3* mag, dual magu, maguts, 
 plur. magum, magup, magun; Opt. magjau; Pret. mahta, Opt. 
 Pret. mahtedjau, Partie. Pret. mahts; Infin. [magan\ Pres. 
 Partie. magands. 
 
 10) ga-nah, it suffices, is enough; hinah, it is permitted, 
 must. Besides the impersonal 3'* pers. there occurs only the 
 Partie. Pret. Uiiauhts. Plur. -naMum, Pret. -naMta, Inf. 
 -naMan are to be inferred. 
 
 § 202. Sixth Ablaut-Series. 
 
 11) ga-mdt, I have room, can, 2""* p. [mdsi\, pi. [mdtum\ 
 Opt. gamdtjau; Pret. gamdsta; Inf [gamotan]. 
 
 12) %, I fear; 2""* [oht], plur. [dgum], Opt. ogjau, Pret. 
 5Ata; Infin. [S^^ftw], causative S^/aw, to frighten. 
 
 Note 1. From ^j^ we have an anomalous 2nd §. Imperative: 6gs, 
 fear. As corresponding 2''<i pi. the Opt. dgeip is used. 
 
 Note 2. Of the original complete verb *agan there still exists the 
 negative Pres. Partie. unagands (fearless). 
 
 § 203. The verb dih, I have, does not belong to any 
 ablaut- series. If we disregard its want of reduplication, the 
 verb follows, according to its formation, a reduplicated preterit, 
 like haihait (§ 179, 3). The forms occurring are: 1^' and 3'^ sing. 
 dih (once aig), 1^' plur. aigum and dihum, 2""^ dihup (once), 3* 
 aigun; Opt. 3'' s. aigi, 2""' pi. aigeip, S^ aigeina; Pret. dihta, 
 Pres. Part, aigands (five times) and dihands (once); Inf dihan 
 (only once in fairdihan, to partake. 
 
 Note 1. There is a peculiar fluctuation between g and h in most 
 forms, but in such a manner that h is predominant in the sing, (aih), g 
 in the other forms. 
 
78 Inflections. Chap. V. 
 
 2) THE VERBS ,.to he,, AND Jo will,,. 
 
 § 204. The substantive verb fornis from the old root es- 
 oecurring in all Indo-Germanic languages only the present 
 indie, and opt, the other forms are supplied by the strong 
 verb Tvisan (§ 176, n. 1). 
 
 PEESENT. 
 
 Indicat. 
 Sing. 1. im 
 
 2. is 
 
 3. ist 
 
 Optat. 
 sijau 
 sijais 
 sijai 
 
 Dual I. siju 
 
 2. [sijuts] 
 
 [sijai wal 
 [sijaits] 
 
 Plur. 1. sijum 
 
 2. siju]? 
 
 3. sind 
 
 sijaima 
 
 sijaif" 
 
 sijaina. 
 
 Infinit.; 
 Part, praes.: 
 
 ; wisan. 
 wisands. 
 
 PRETERIT. 
 
 Indicat: was, wast, was, etc. 
 Optat.: wgsjau. 
 Part. pt. wisans. 
 
 Note I. For ij (of the opt. and pres. indicat. dual and plur.) also 
 simple i is sometimes found (§ 10, n. 4), e. g., plur. ind. Is' sium, 2''ii siup; 
 opt. siau, etc. But the full forms occur far more frequently. The forms 
 Avith i are confined to the Epistles (especially in codex B) and to the 
 Gospel of St. Luke which latter often shows also other irregular forms 
 (V. lU, Vm. 25, IX. 12, 41, XIV. 31). Where there are two codices, one 
 (in three cases A) always has the correct forms with j (11. Cor. VII. 13; 
 Phil. IV. 5 ; Col. IV. 6; I. Tim. V. 22). 
 
 Note 2. Instead of the imperat. the optative forms, sing, sijais, 
 sijai, plur. sijaip, are used. The form sai (= Grk. saxio) for sijai, siai, 
 occurring in the MS. (II. Cor. XII. 16) is either wrong, or, according to 
 Osthoff (Beitriige VIII. 311), to be taken as inteqection sai, ecce!. 
 
 Note 3. nisi = ni ist, is not (§ 10, n. 2), patist = pata ist, there 
 is ; karist = kai'a ist, it concerns, John X. 12 (§ 4, n. 1). 
 
 § 205. The verb ^^to will,, has in the present only an 
 optative which has however an indicative meaning. This 
 present-optative has the terminations of the preter. optat. The 
 preter. takes the weak form. The forms occurring are: 
 
Conjugation. III. Irregular Verbs. 79 
 
 Presens: S. 1. wiljau. 2. wileis. 3. wili. 
 D. 2. wileits. 
 
 PL 1. wileima. 2. wileij?. 3. wileina. 
 Infinitive: wiljan. 
 Pres. Part: wiljands. 
 Pret. : wilda. Opt.: wildgdjau. 
 
 {Inflection like that of nasida § 184.) 
 
 IRKEGULARITIES. 
 § 206. Strengthening's of the Present. The dis- 
 tinction between the present stem and the preterit stem of 
 strong verbs consists only in the change of the vowel. The 
 consonantal skeleton of the word always remains the same. 
 This was not always so, but in the Early Germanic as well 
 as in other Indo- Germanic languages there existed for- 
 mations of the present tense by means of consonantal ele- 
 ments. Of these some remnants are still retained in Gothic, 
 but have from the Gothic standpoint to be considered as irre- 
 gularities. 
 
 a) Present-formations with / In the words which belong 
 here and inflect in the whole present like weak verbs of the 
 first conjugation (like nasjan, sdkjan), the / is no formative 
 suffix and is dropped in the pret. and pret. partic. The words 
 have akeady been given above: bidjan (§ 176, n. 5) hafjan, 
 frapjan, Mahjan, rapjan, skapjan, skapjan, wahsjan (§ 177, n. 2). 
 Comp. also § 209. 
 
 b) Nasalized present-formations are found in keinan (§ 172, 
 n. 2) and fraihnan (§ 176, n. 4), with the nasal at the end, — 
 and standan (§ 177, n. 3) with the nasal in the middle of the 
 verbal stem. 
 
 § 207. The verb gangan which, acedrding to its present 
 form and the testimony of the other Germanic languages, 
 belongs to the reduplicated verbs (§179, n. 3), has a weak 
 prefer., gaggida occurring however only once Lu. XIX. 12. 
 The prefer, of gaggan is generally represented by the defective 
 iddja which conjugates like a weak prefer. Thus: iddja, I 
 ^vent, iddjes, iddja, etc.; optat. iddjedjau. 
 
 \ § 208. briggan, to bring, is, according to its present, an 
 ablaut verb (III) ; but the pret. has the weak inflection : brahta 
 (from *branhta § 5 b), partic. pret. [brdhts]. 
 
 § 209. Some verbs whose presents follow the first weak 
 
80 Inflections. Uhap. V. 
 
 conjugation (in part perhaps belonging to § 2U6, a.) take the 
 weak preter., but without the formative suffix /. These verbs 
 are: hugjan, to buy, bauhfa: br&kjan, to use, bnVi/a; waurkjan, 
 to work, maurhta; pagkjan, to thinls, pahta (§ 5 b); piigkjan, to 
 seem, p-khta (§ 15 b). Of their pret. part, there are found: 
 ha-Ahts from hugjan, rvaurhts from wm'irkjan, the others would 
 be: hrMts, pdhts, pMfs (§ 75). 
 
 Note 1. Comp. also kdupatjan § IS", n. I, which has however the 
 / in tlie part, preter. 
 
 CHAP. VI. PARTICLES. , 
 
 1) ADVERBS. 
 
 § 210. Adverbs of Manner are formed from adjectives, 
 a) Most frequent is the formation with the suffix -ba added 
 to the final vowel of the stem. 
 
 Thus from a-stems (§§ 123. 124); e. g., ubildba, evilly; bairh- 
 taba, clearly. From /a-stems (§ 125 et seq.); sunjaba truly. — 
 Also the original i- and w-stems (§§ 129 — 131) still show here 
 their true stem-endings; analaugniba, secretly; anasiuniba, visibly; 
 arniba, surely; gatemiba, fitly; harduba, severely, hard; man- 
 tvuba, accurately. 
 
 Note 1. The a for u which occurs once each in hardaba, glagg- 
 waba, is wrong. 
 
 § 211. Adverbial adjectives are also very frequently 
 formed b) by the suffix -o blended with the final vowel of 
 the stem; e.g., galeikb, alike; Mieigd in time; />m&y(5, secretly, 
 like a thief; glaggwo, accurately (besides glaggrvuba). 
 
 Note t. The same adverbial termination also in aufld, perhaps; 
 sprauld, quickly; missd, mutually; ufaro, above, thereon; undard, below; 
 aftard behind. 
 
 § 212. An adverbial form has been developped by the 
 comparative from the comparative degress of adjectives, which, 
 without further additional termination, ends in the comparative 
 suffix {-iz-) -is; e. g., hduhis, higher; diris, ere, once; mais, more; 
 framis, farther; nehis, nearer, haldis, more. 
 
 Note 1. Without the i of the suffix are formed : mins, less; wairs, 
 worse; pana-seips, further, more. 
 
 Note 2. With the comparative suffix -ds occur sniumundos, more 
 speedily; aJjaleikds otherwise. 
 
Particles. 81 
 
 Anm o. As superlath-e adverbs aru found the neuter forms /"n/m?*/, 
 first; maist, at the most. 
 
 § 21:!. Adverbs of Place are formed for tlie question 
 whither? either wihout a suffix or by the suffixes -p (-d) and 
 dre; for the question whereV by the suffixes -r and -a; for 
 the question whenceV by the suffixes -pi-d- and -ana. 
 
 Note 1. From pronominal stems are thus formed the correlatives: 
 
 Ivafi, JiradrS, whither? 
 U>ap] {padei, where) 
 jaind, jaindri thither 
 aljap, in another direction 
 
 har, where 
 par, there 
 jainar, there 
 aljar, elsewhere 
 
 haprv, whence 
 paprd, thence 
 jainpro, thence 
 dtjaprO, by another way 
 
 hidri, hither. | hSr, here 
 
 Note 2. Other examples are: a) Whither? dalap , downward- 
 samaf>, together; iup, upward; at, out; inn, into, b) Where? dalapa, 
 below; hipa, above; uta, without; mwrt, within; fairra,ixc; afta, behind, 
 c) Whence?' dalaprd, from below; iupaprd and iupana, from above; 
 ulaprd and'wtoja, from without; innaprd and innana, from within; 
 ullapro, from all sides; fairraprO, from afar; aflana, from behind. 
 
 § 214. Adverbs of Time are mostly formed from sub- 
 stantive-cases; e. g., gistradagis, to morrow; himma daga, to-day; 
 du maurgina, to-morrow; ni aim, never (ace. of aims, time); 
 framwigis, continually. 
 
 Note 1 . Simple temporal adverbs are rare : nu, now ; ju, already ; 
 air, formerly ; simli, once ; ufla, often ; from pronominal stems : f>an, then ; 
 han, when? whenever; suman, once. 
 
 § 215. Besides those mentioned in § 214 other nominal 
 cases are also used as adverbs; e. g., landis, over land, about 
 the countiy; allis, at all; sunja and bi swnjai, in truth. 
 
 § 216. Question and Answer (negation) are in most 
 eases accompanied by adverbial particles. With questions 
 there are found -u (niu, not? § 18, n. 2); an, nuh {= Lat. an. 
 Germ. d^nn?)\ ibai, if, whether; Jau (ja-u) whether; pan, perhaps. 
 — Affirmative particles are: Ja, jai, yes, indeed! A negative 
 particle is ne, no! These adverbs, however, rarely stand alone 
 as answers, the verb of the question being generally repeated. 
 As negative particle in the sentence ni is used. 
 
 Note 1. The interrogative particle -u is enclitically affixed to the 
 first word of the sentence, e. g., skuklu ist kaisaragild giban Mk. XII. 14. 
 In combinations with prefixes the u is attached immediately to the latter; 
 e.g., gaulauhjats patei magjau f>aia iaujan? Mk. IX. 28. 
 
 Bra an e, Goth, grammai'. 
 
82 Inflections. Chap. V. 
 
 2) PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 § 217. a) With the Dative: alja, besides; af, of, from; 
 da, to; mip, with; us, out; faura, before; fram, from; nek-a, uear. 
 
 b) With the Aceusative: awrf, along-, at; pa'trh, through; 
 hmh, without; undar, under; mifira, against; faAr, before, for. 
 
 c) With the Dative and Aeensative: ana, on, upon; <(t, 
 at; afar, after; hi, with, br, about, on; hindar, behind; und, 
 with dat., about, for; with ace. to, till; ?</', under; iiftir, o\er. 
 
 d) With the (ienitive and Dative; it/hrCi, over. 
 
 e) With the Genitive, Dative, and Accusative: m. 
 with gen., on account of; with dat., ace. in, to, on. 
 
 3) CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 § 218. a) Copulative: Jah, and, also; -uh, and (comp. 
 24, u. 2), nih, and not. b) Disjunctive: aippau, or; andizuh 
 — aippau, either — or; Jappe — jappe, whether • — or. 
 c) Adversative: ip, pan, appan, akei, but; ak, but. d) Causal, 
 allis, auk, utile, raihtis, for. e) Conclusive: panuh, paruh, 
 eipan, nu, nuh, pannu, nunu, now, therefore, hence, f) Con- 
 ditional: jahai, if; niha, nibai, if not (§ 10, n. 2), g) Con- 
 cessive: pau, though; pauhjabai, even if; swepauh, however: 
 although, h) Final: ei, palei, peei, pei, tXvdt; ei, swaei, swasmi, 
 so that; ibai (iba) lest, i) Comparative: haiwa, how? sme, 
 as; smaswe, just as. k) Temporal: swe, as, when; pan, pande, 
 when, if, as long as; Mpe, mippanei, whilst; sunsei, as soon as; 
 faurpizei, before ; unte, und patei, pande, till, until, as long as. 
 
 4) Interjectio»s. 
 § 219. 0, oh! ah! rvat, woe! sai, behold! — Interjectional 
 in meaning: come here! sing, hiri, du. hirjats, plur. hirjip (eomp. 
 §20,11.1; §187,n,.4). 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 § 220.. 
 SOURCES OF THE GOTHIC LANGUAGE. 
 
 The Gothic language is known to us from the fragments 
 of a version of the Bible which is — and that with great 
 probability — ascribed to bishop Ulfilas, or (Gothic) Wulfila 
 310 — 380 A. D. The fragments have come down to us in the 
 following manuscripts. 
 
 1) Codex argenteus at Upsala. The codex contained 
 on 330 leaves the four Gospels in the following order: Matthew, 
 John, Lnke, Mark. Of these are still preserved 177 leaves. The 
 Gospel of St. Luke shows abnormal deviations, younger forms 
 of speach (comp. §§ 7, n. 2; 14, n. 3; 56, n. 1; 62, n. 3; 67, n. 2; 
 74, n. 1; 105, n. 2; 204, n. 1). 
 
 2) Codex Carolinus, a palimpsest in Wolfenbiittel con- 
 taining pieces of the 11* — 15"' chapters of the Epistle to the 
 Romans. 
 
 3) Codices Ambrosiani, five fragments (palimpsests) in 
 the Ambrosian library at Milan containing chiefly the Epistles 
 of St. Paul, namely: 
 
 Codex A containing on 95 leaves fragments of the Epistles 
 to the Romans, Corinthians, Ephesians, Galatians, 
 Philippians, CoUossians, Thessalonians , Timothy, 
 Titus, Philemon, and, besides, a fragment of a Gothic 
 calendar. 
 
 Codex B containing on 77 leaves the second Epistle to the 
 
 ' Corinthians complete, fragments of the Epistles 
 
 to the Corinthians I, Galatians, Ephesians, Philippians, 
 
 CoUossians, Thessalonians, Timothy, Titus. — Codices 
 
 6* 
 
84 Appendix. 
 
 A and B are in part identical as to their contents, 
 a fact of great importance for the criticism of the text. 
 
 Codex C. Two leaves with fi-agments of ^Matthew J-'i 27. 
 
 Codex D. Three leaves «ith fragments from the Old 
 Testament, namely of the hooks of Esdras and 
 Xehemias. 
 
 Codex E. Eight leaves three of which are in the Vatican 
 library at Rome. They contain fragments of an 
 inteipretation of the Gospel of St. John and were 
 called by their editor. ^lassmann, Skti?-ei7is dhraggel- 
 jons pairh Johannen, and are therefore still cited as 
 Skeirei7is. 
 
 4) Cudex Tnrinensis. four much damaged leaves on 
 which have been deciphered small pieces of the Epistles to 
 the Galatians and Collossiaus. 
 
 Note 1. Foriuu re about the Gothic manuscripts, see Bernhardt'^ 
 ^'ulfiIa, introduction XXXIX et seq.; for the history of oodex argenteus, 
 conip. also the recent writings by Schultz, ^Gothica minora, in the 
 ..Zeitsi-hrift fiir dentsches Alterthum, 23, 51, 318 and 21, 
 324 et seq. 
 
 Xote 2. Besides the version of the Bible (and Skeireins) there are 
 only a few more — however less weighty — monuments of the Gothic 
 language left. The most important of these are two Latin records with 
 Gothic signatures from Naples and Arezzo, and the fragment of a Gotliic 
 calendar mentioned above with codex A. Both pieces are printed in the 
 editions of Ulfilas. As to the Gothic words and alphabets given in the 
 J.Salzburg-Vienna U.S. (§ 1, n. 5, § 2, n. 2) and other remains of the Gothic 
 language, comp. Massmann's essay Gotthica minora, Haupt's Zeit- 
 schrift I. 2!)4— 393. 
 
 $ 221. 
 
 EDITIONS. 
 
 The first print of the codex argenteus is that of Fr. Junius. 
 Dortrecht 1665. All later editions (for the titles, see Beni- 
 hardt's Vulfila, page LXIII et seq.) are of a more historical 
 value. The editions now important for the study of the Gothic 
 language are the following: 
 
 a) The large edition of „Ulfilas, by Gabelentz and Lobe 
 in 3 quartos published in 1843 — 46. Though the text of the 
 fii'st volume is antiquated (in consequence of Uppsti'om's edition), 
 the dictionary (vol. II. 1) and especially the grammar (vol. II. 2) 
 
Appendix. 85 
 
 are because of their copious material (also on syntax) of great 
 value. 
 
 b) For an exact establishment of the MSS. there are of 
 the g'reatest importance the new readings of the learned Swede, 
 Andrew Uppstrom, who had exact texts printed according to 
 them (Codex argenteus Upsala 1854, — Decem codicis argentei 
 rediviva folia Upsala 1857, — Fragmenta gothica selecta 1861, 
 
 — Codices gotici ambrosiani 1864 — 68). 
 
 c) A critically arranged text based on the readings of 
 Uppstrom, provided with critico-exegetical notes and supple- 
 mented by the original Greek text is given in the edition 
 of E. Bernhardt: Vulfila oder die gotische Bibel, 
 Halle 1876. 
 
 d) A handy edition of Qlfilas \^ ith glossary and grammar 
 is that by M. Heyne (7"> edit), Paderborn 1878. Its text is,' 
 like that by Bernhardt, based on Uppstrom's readings, but is 
 treated however more conservatively than that by Bernhardt, 
 
 § 222. Of the more important grammatical and lexical 
 aids there remain to be mentioned: 
 
 a) Gabelentz and Lobe — in the edition mentioned 
 § 221, a. 
 
 b) Leo Meyer, ^^Die gotische Sprache,,, Berlin 1869. 
 
 — A comparative treatment of the Gothic phonology, and com- 
 plete material. 
 
 e) The treatment of the Gothic phonology in Holtzmann's 
 (Altdeutsche Granimatik,, Leipzig 1870. 
 
 d) Lorenz Diefenbach, ^.Vergleichendes WiJrterbuch der 
 got. Sprache,,. Vol. 1 and 2. Frankfurt 1851. 
 
 e) Ernst Sehulze, ^^Gotisches Glossar,,, Magdeburg 1847. 
 The most complete Gothic dictionary. 
 
 1^0 te 1. For the establishment of some grammatical facts may be 
 used the writings of J. H. Gallee, Gutiska (I.) Lijst van gotische woorden, 
 wier geslaoht of bulging naar analogic van andere gotische woorden, of 
 van het oudgermaansoh wordt opgegeven. Haarlem 1880; ^ II. De ad- 
 jectiva in het gotisch en hunne suffixeu. Utrecht 1882. 
 
SELECTIONS FOR READINO. 
 
 1. FROM THEGOSPKL OF ST. MATTHEW. 
 
 (CODEX ARGENTEUS). 
 
 Chap. V. 17 Xi liugjai)^ ei qemjau gatairan wito)' ai|;l;au 
 praufetuns; ni qam gatairan, ak usfulljan. 18 amen auk qif^a 
 izwis: und f^atei uslei)?i)? himins jali airj^a, jota ains aij)J?au 
 ains striks ni usleit-iip af witoda, unte allata wair)?i)'. 19 i]? saei 
 nu gatairij) aina anabusne ]>i'io minnistono, jali laisjai swa 
 mans, minnista liaitada in piudangardjai himine; i]> saei tanji)? 
 jah laisjai swa, sah mikils haitada in Jnudangardjai himine.. 
 
 20 Qi)7a auk izwis j^atei nibai managizo wair]^ij) izwaraizos 
 garaihteins pan j?ize bokarje jah Fareisaie, ni Jjau qimi)^ in 
 ^iudangardjai- himine. 21 hausidedu)? )?atei qi)?an ist ]>aim airi- 
 zam: ni maurjrjais; ip saei maur)?rei)j, skula waii^i)' stauai. 
 22 a]^j?an ik qi)?a izwis J?atei h'azuh modags brojn- seinamma 
 sware skula wairj^i); stauai; i); saei qij'i]' bro]Ji' seinamma 
 raka, skula wair))if> gaquml^ai; a,p]>ina. saei qi)^i]? dwala, skula 
 wairj)i}5 in galainnan funiris..'' 23 jabai nu bairais aibr j^ein du 
 hunslastada, jah jainar gamuneis ]?atei bro}>ar J>eins habai)^ 
 hra bi Jjuk, 24 aflet jainar ]>o giba )?eina in andwair]?ja hunsla- 
 stadis, jah gagg faur]'is gasibjon bro)?r J>einamma, jah bij^e 
 atgaggands atbair ]>o giba )?eina. . 25 sijais waila hugjands an- 
 dastauin jjeinamma sprauto, und J^atei is in wiga mij? imma, 
 ibai luan atgibai pvik sa andastaua staUin, jah sa staua ]>uk 
 atgibai andbahta, jah in karkara galagjaza. 26 amen qi)?a jius: 
 ni usgaggis jain|>ro, unte usgibis )?ana minnistan kintu. 
 
 27 Hausidedu]? )?atei qij>an ist: ni horinos. 28 a]?)jan ik 
 qi|?a izwis, ]?atei bazuh saei saihrif) qinon du luston izos, ju 
 gahorinoda izai in hairtin seinamma. 29 ip jabai augo pern 
 psAa taihswo marzjai J^uk, usstigg i) ita jah waii-p af ]7us ; batizo 
 ist auk ]?us ei fraqistnai ains lij^iwe {'einaize, jah ni allata leik 
 
 ') usstagg MS. 
 
Matthew V. VI. 87 
 
 j^ein gadruisai in gaiainnan. 30 jali jabai taihswo }>eiiia liancliis 
 marzj'ai Ipiik, afmait ]>o jah wairp af j?us; batizo ist auk ]>ns 
 ei fraqistnai ains lipiwe Jjeinaize, jali ni allata leik }>em ga- 
 driusai in gaiainnan. 31 qij?anuh \>nn ist f^atei hrazuhi) saei 
 afletai qeu, gibai izai afstassais bokos. 32 ip ik qif'a izwis 
 j^atei h;azuh saei afletij; qen seina, inub fairina kalkinassaus, 
 tauji|> 1^0 horinon; jah sa ize afsatida liugaij?, horino]?. „ 
 
 83. Aftra hausidedu)-' ]?atei qi);au ist }»aim airizam : ni ufar- 
 swarais, i]> usgibais fraujin ai|>auM );einaus. 34 a)7|?an ik qil>a 
 izwis ni swaran allis, ni bi himiiia, ante stols ist guj^s; 35 nih 
 bi airjxai, unte fotubaurd ist fotiwe is, nih bi lairusaulymai, unte 
 baurgs ist ]m mikilins J-iiudanis; 36 nih bi haubida l^einamma 
 swarais, unte ni magt ain tagl keit ai|?J?au swart gataujan. 
 37 sijai)?-)'an wanrd izwar: ja, ja; ne, ne; i|? ];ata managizo 
 ]mm us ]mmma ubilin ist. 
 
 38 Hausidedu]-' ]?atei qi)?an ist: augo und augin, jah tun};u 
 und tunjjau. 39 ip ik qi);a izwis ni andstandan allis )jamma 
 unseljin; ak jabai has l?uk stautai bi taihswon J>eina kinnu, 
 wandei imma jah ]>o an)?ara. 40 jah f>amma wiljandin mi]? ]jus 
 stauajah paida ]>eina niman, aflet imma jah wastja. 41 jah jabai 
 h'as ^uk ananau)?jai rasta aina, gaggais mi)? imma twos. 42 
 ^amma bidjandin ]?uk gibais, jah )?amma wiljandin af J>us 
 leiluan sis ni uswandjais. 
 
 43 Hausidedu}^ ]?atei qi)>an ist: frijos nehrundjan J^einana, 
 jah fiais fiand ]?einana. 44 a]?]?an ik qij?a izwis: frijoj» fijands 
 izwarans, |?iuj5jai|? )?ans wiikandans izwis, waila taujaij? Jjaim 
 hatjandam izwis, jah bidjai}? bi )?ans usjjriutandans izwis, 45 ei 
 wair|?ai)? sunjus attins izwaris ]?is in himinam, unte sunnon seina 
 urrannei)? ana ubilans jali godans, jah rigneij? ana garaihtans 
 jah ana inwindans. 46 jabai auk frijo}? ^ans frijondans izwis 
 ainans, hro mizdono habai]?? hiu jah ]?ai ]?iudo )?ata samo 
 taujandV 47 jah jabai goleij) ]?ans frijonds izwarans J>atainei, 
 be managizo tauji}^? niu jah raotarjos )?ata samo taujand? 48 
 sijai}> nu jus fuUatojai, swaswe atta izwar sa in himiriam fulla- 
 tojis ist. 
 
 Chap. VI. 1 Atsaihri]? armaion izwara ni taujan in and- 
 wair}>ja manne du saiban im; aif>]?au laun ni habai]? fram attin 
 izwaramma f>amma iii himinam. 2 j>an nu taujais armaion, ni 
 haurnjais faura )'us, swaswe J?ai liutans taujand in gaqum}?im 
 jah in garunsim, ei hauhjaindau fram mannam; amen qifia 
 izwis: andnemun mizdon seina. 3 ip }>uk taujandan armaion 
 ni witi hleidumei )?eina, ba taujij? taihswo ]?eina, 4 ei sijai so 
 armahairti)7a J?eina in fulhsnja, jah atta )?eins saei saibi)? in 
 fulhsiija, 2) usgibi);' pm in bairhtein. 5 jah ]?an bidjai)?, ni sijai)? 
 
 ') Iva h/azuh MS. '') fulhsja MS. 
 
88 :\rattiiew "\a. 
 
 swaswe ]?ai liutans, unte frijond in gaqum);im jah waihstam 
 plapjo standandans bidjan, ei gaumjaindau mannam. amen, 
 qij'a izwis, J^atei haband mizdon seina. ti i]' pn ]5an bidjais, 
 gagg in lie)?jon j^eina, jah galukands haurdai {^einai bidei du 
 attin l^ei^namma J'amma in fiilhsnja, jab atta ))eins saei saihrij? 
 in fulhgnja,!) usgibi]? \>ns in bairhtein. 
 
 7 Bidjandansu)?-]?an ui filuwaurdjai)?, swaswe p-M J>iudoj 
 jpugkei]? im auk ei in filuwaurdein seinai andhansjaindan. 8 ni 
 galeiko}^ nu )>aim; wait auk atta izwar j^iizei jus jjaurbu]?, faur- 
 ^izei jus bidjai)? ina. 9 swa nu bidjai]; jus: atta unsar ]?u in 
 himinam, weibnai namo ]>em. 10 qimai ];iudinassus peinB. wair- 
 ]>id wilja perns, swe in himina jab ana air]?ai. 11 blaif unsarana 
 ]?ana sinteinan gif uns bimma daga. 12 jab aflet uns ]?atei 
 skulans sijaima, swaswe jah weis afletam ]5aim skulam unsaraim. 
 13 jah ni briggais uns in fraistubnjai, ak lausei uns af j^amma 
 iibilin; unte )?eina ist l^iudangardi jah niahts jah wul)?us in 
 aiwins. amen. 
 
 14 Unte jaliai afletif; mannam missadedins ize, afletij? jah 
 izwis atta izwar sa ufar himinam. 15 i); jabai ni afieti)> mannam 
 missadedins ize, ni ]jau atta izwar afleti}? missadedins izwaros. 
 
 1(5 A)?)>an bijje fastai]?, ni wair]?ai|? swaswe )9ai liutans gaurai; 
 frawardjand auk andwair)?ja seina, ei gasailuaindau mannam 
 fastandans. amen, qi)5a izwis, )?atei andnemuu mizdon seina. 
 17 i)? )?u fastands salbo baubi]> )?ein, jah ludja ]?eina )?wah, 18 ei 
 ni gasaih'aizau mannam fastands, ak attin ];'einanima }?amma in 
 fulhsnja, jah atta ]?eins. saei saihri)) in fulhsnja, usgibi)? pus. 
 
 19 Ni huzdjaifj izwis huzda ana aii^ai, ]jarei malo jah nidwa 
 frawardeif*, jali )?arei J^iubos ufgraband jah hlifand. 20 i|? huzd- 
 jaifj izwis huzda in himina, )?arei nih malo nih nidwa frawardei]?, 
 jah Jjarei )?iubos ni ufgraband nib stiland. 21 )'avei auk ist huzd 
 izwar, ]?aruh ist jah hairto izwar. 
 
 22 Lukarn leikis ist augo: jabai nu augo j^ein ainfal]p ist, 
 allata leik l^ein liuhadein wair)?i)?; 23 i)? jabai augo )?ein unsel 
 ist, allata leik J^ein riqizein wair)?i)?. jabai nu liuha]? psda, in 
 )?us riqiz ist, Jsata riqiz liran filu! 
 
 24 Ni manna mag twaim fraujam skalkinon; unte jabai 
 tijai)? ainana, jah an)?arana frijo}^; ai)7);au ainamma ufhausei]?, 
 i); an]?aramma frakann. ni magu); gu)?a skalkinon jah mam- 
 monin. ^) 25 duj^J^e qil^a izwis: ni maurnai)? saiwalai izwarai h)a 
 matjai)? jah Iva drigkai)?, nih leika izwaramma h^e wasjai)?; 
 niu saiwala mais ist fodeinai jah leik wastjom? 26 insaihri]? du 
 fuglam himinis, ]'ei ni saiand nih snei]?and, nih lisand in ban- 
 stins, jah atta izwar sa ufar himinam fodei)? ins. niu jus mais 
 wul]>rizans siju)? )?aim? 27 ij? luas izwara maurnands mag ana- 
 
 ') fulhlsnia MS. -) in the margin faihupra . ., i. e. faihu- 
 
 praihna Luke XVI. 13. 
 
Matthew VI- Mark I. ' 89 
 
 aukan ana wahstii seinana aleina aina? 28 jab hi wastjos hn, 
 saurgai]?? g-akimnai)? blomans hai);jos, h'aiwa wahsjand; nil) 
 arbaidjand nih spinnand. 29 qij^uh )?an izwis j'atei nih. Sau- 
 laumon in allamma wulj^au seinamma gawasida sik swe ains 
 pile. 30 jail )>ande J^ata haVvi hai)>jos himma daga wisando 
 jah gistradagis in aiihn galagi)? gup swa wasji)), hiaiwa niaia 
 izwis, leitil galaubjandans? 31 ni maumai)? nu qi{^andans: Ira 
 matjam ai)'^au hra drigkam, ai)?)?au hre wasjaima':' 82 all auk 
 l^ata }?iudos sokjand; waitnh pun atta izwar sa ufar himinam 
 )?atei {Jaurbii]^ 
 
 L\ FROM THE G08PEL OF ST. MARK. 
 
 (CODEX ARGEXTEUS). 
 
 AIWAG(4ELJ0 DAIKIi jMAKKU ANASTODEir>. 
 Chap. I. 1 Anastodeins aiwaggeljons lesuis Xvistaus sinaaus 
 
 2 Swe gameli]? ist in Esaiiu praufetau: sai, ik insandja ag- 
 gilu meinana faura pus, saei gamanwei]? wig J^einana faura |?us. 
 3 stibna wopjandins in au]^idai: manwei)? wig fraujins, raihtos 
 wauvkei]^ staigos gnps unsaris. 4 was lohannes daupjands in 
 auj?idaijah mevjands daupein idreigos du aflageinai frawaurhte. 
 5 jail usiddjedun du imma all ludaialand jah lairusaulymeis, 
 jah daupidai wesun allai in laurdane ahrai fram imma, and- 
 haitandans frawauvhtim seinaim. 6 wa8uj>-}^an Johannes gawagi)js 
 taglam ulbandaus jah gairda filleina bi hup seinana, jah matida 
 j^ramsteins jah niili]? hai|?iwisk, ') 7 jah merida qijjands: qimi)? 
 swin)?oza mis sa afar mis, )?izei ik ni im \vair)?s anahneiwands 
 andbindan skaudaraip skolie is. 8 appsna ik daupja izwis in 
 watin, ij? is daupeij? izwis in ahmin weihamma. 
 
 9 Jah war)? in jainaim dagam, qam lesus fram Nazarail> 
 Galeilaias, jah daupij's was fram lohanne in laurdane. 10 jah 
 suns usgaggands us )?amma watin gasahr uslukanans^) himi^ 
 nans, jah ahman swe ahak atgaggandan ana ina. 11 jah stibna 
 qam us himinam: ]?u is sunus mains sa liuba, in }mzei waila 
 galeikaida. 3) 12 jah suns sai, ahma ina ustauh in au]?ida. 13 jah 
 wag in ]?izai auj^idai dage fidwor tiguns fraisans fram Satanin, 
 jah was mi); diuzam, jah aggileis andbahtidedun imma. 
 
 14 I}j afar fiatei atgibans war]? lohannes, qam lesus in 6a- 
 leilaia merjands aiwaggeljon ]?iudangardjos gujjs, 15 qi)>ands 
 J^atei usfulinoda ]?ata mel jah atnehrida sik fiiudangardi gu)?s: 
 idreigo]? jah galaubei]? in aiwaggeljon.v 16 jah luarbonds faur 
 marein Galeilaias gasab Seimonu jah Andraian bro]?ar is. 
 
 ') gloss tvilpi. ^) usluknans MS. ^) in the margin pukei wilda. 
 
90 Mark I. 
 
 J>is Seimoniis. waiqiandans nati in raarcin; wesun auk fiskjans. 
 1 7 jail qa}> ini lesus : liirjats afar mis, jali gatauja igqis ^vairjjan 
 nutans manne. 18 jali suns afletaudans l^o natja seina laistidedun 
 afar imnia. 19 jah jainj^ro inn gaggands framis leitil ') gasah" 
 lakobu )?ana Zaibaidaiaus jah lohanue broVar is, jah I'ans in 
 sldpa manwjandans natja. 20 jah suns haihait ins. jah afle- 
 taudans attan seinana Zaibaidaiu in l^anima skipa mi|> asnjam, 
 gali)7un afar iuiiua. 
 
 21 Jah gali))un in Kafarnauni, jah suns sabbato daga galei- 
 ]7ands in syuagogen hiisida ins. 22 jali usfihnans waur)>uu ana 
 Jiizai laiseinai is; uute was laisjands ins swe waklufni habands 
 jah ni swaswe i^ai bokarjos. 23 jah was in ))izai syuagogen 
 ize nuinua in unhrainjamma ahmiu, jali uf hropida 24 qi|^ands : 
 fralet, lua ims jah )>us, lesu Xazorenai? qamt fraqistjan uns; 
 kanu pnk, h-as j^u is. sa weiha gu]js. 2.5 jah andbait ina lesus 
 ([il'ands: f^ahai jah usgagg nt us I'amma, ahma unhrainja. 
 26 jah tahida iua ahma sa unhrainja, jah hropjands stibnai 
 mikilai ussidja us imma. 27 jah afslau)?nodeduu aHai silda- 
 leikjandaus, swaei solddedun mij> sis misso qij^andans : l«a sijai 
 ]'ata? bo so laiseiuo so niujo, ei mi)? waldufnja jah ahmam 
 ]>a\m unhraiujam auabindi|> jali ufhausjand immaV 28 usiddja 
 jj^n meril?a is suns and allans bisitands Galeilaias. 
 
 29 Jah suns us )>izai syuagogen usgaggandaus qemun 
 in garda >Seimonis jah Andraiins mi)? lakobau jah lohannen. 
 30 i)> swaihro Seimonis lag in brinnon; jah suns qe)?un imma hi 
 ija. 31 jah duatg'aggands urraisida ])o undgreipands handu 
 izos. jah aflailot ]>o so brinno suns, jah andbahtida im. 32 Anda- 
 nahtja I'an waurf'anamma, ]?an gasaggq sauil, berun du imma 
 allans )?ans ubil habandans jah unhulf'ons habandans. 33 jah so 
 baurgs aUa garunnana was at daura. 34 jah gahailida managans 
 ubil habandans missaleikaim sauhtim, jah unhull^ons managos 
 U8war]i. jah ni fralailot rodjan )?os unhul)>ons, unte kunj'edun ina. 
 
 'X> Jah air uhtwon usstandands usiddja, jah galai)> ana 
 aul^jana sta)>, jah jainar ba)>. 36 jah galaistans waur^un imma 
 .Seimon jah ])id mi]? imma. 37 jah bigitandans ina qej^un du 
 imma ]?atei allai )>uk sokjand. 38 jah qa)? du im: gaggam du 
 l?aim bisunjane haimom"^) jah baurgim, ei jah jainar meijau, 
 uute du])e qam. 39 jah was merjands in synagogim ize and 
 alia Galeilaian jah unhul}?ons uswaii-pands. 
 
 40 Jah qam at imma )?ratsfill habands, bidjands ina jah 
 kniwam knussjands jah qij^ands du imma ]?atei jabai wileis, 
 magt mik galu'ainjan. 41 ip lesus infeinands, ufrakjands handu 
 seina attaitok imma jah qaj? imma: wiljau, wairj> brains. 42 jah 
 bi)?e qa)? ]?ata lesus, suns ]?ata }?rutsfill aflai)? af imma, jah 
 brains war)^. 43 jah galuotjands imma suns ussandida ina, 
 
 ') leila MS. ^) hatynon MS. 
 
Mark I. II. 91 
 
 44 jah qaj? du imma: saihr ei mannhnn ni qi)?ais waiht; ak 
 gagg l7uk silban ataugjan gudjin, jah atbair fram gahraineinai 
 jjeinai ];atei anabau]? Moses du weitwodi}?ai im. 45 ip is ns- 
 gaggands dugann merjan filu jah usqi}?an )?ata waurd, swaswe 
 is juj^an ni mahta andangjo iu baurg galeij^an, ak uta aua 
 aujyaim stadim was; jah iddjedim du imma allaJ?ro. 
 
 Chap. n. 1 Jah galaif> aftra in Kafarnaum afar dagans, jah 
 gafrehtm )>atei in garda ist. 2 jah suns gaqemun managai, 
 swaswe juj^an ni gamostedun nih at daura, jah rodida im waurd. 
 3 jah qemuu at imma uslipan bairandans, hafanana fram iid- 
 worim.*) 4 jah ni magandans nefoa qimau imma faura ma- 
 nageim, andhulidednn hrot J^arei was lesus, jah usgrabandans 
 insailidedun j^ata badi, jah fralailotun ana J^ammei lag sa uslij^a. 
 5 Gasaibands ]?an lesus galaubein ize qaj? du }?amma uslij^in : 
 barnilo, ailetanda pus frawaurhteis J^einos. 6 wesunuh ]>an 
 sumai ]?ize bokaije jainar sitandans jah ]?agkjandans sis in 
 hairtam seinaim: 7 hra sa swa rodei)? naiteinins? hras mag 
 afletan frawaurhtins, niba ains gu}?? 8 jah suns ufkunnands 
 lesus ahmin seinamma ]7atei swa j^ai mitodedun sis, qaj? du im : 
 dube mito]> )?ata in hairtam izwaraim? 9 luaj^ar ist azetizo 
 du qi]?an pamma usli)?in: afietanda^) )?us frawaurhteis J^einos, 
 J)au qi)?an: urreis jah nim |?ata badi ]^einata jah gagg? 10 a]?)jan 
 ei witei)? J?atei waldufni liabai}? sunus mans ana airj^ai afletan 
 frawaurhtins, qa)? du )>amnia usli]?in: 11 ]?us qi]?a: urreis nimuh 
 )?ata badi J^ein jah gagg du garda }>einamma. 12 jah urrais 
 suns jah ushafjands badi usiddja faura andwair)>ja allaize, 
 swaswe usgeisnodedun allai jah hauhidedun mikiljandans gu)?, 
 qi))andans j»atei aiw swa ni gaseluum.^) 
 
 13 Jah galaij) afti'a faur marein, jah all manageins iddjedun 
 du imma, jah laisida ins. 14 jah hrarbonds gasahr Laiwwi J^ana 
 Alfaiaus sitandan at motai, jali qa]? du imma: gagg afar mis. 
 jah usstandands iddja afar imma. 15 jah Avar]^, hipe is ana- 
 laimbida in garda is, jah managai motaijos jah frawaurhtai mi|> 
 anakumbidedun lesua jah siponjam is ; wesun auk managai jah 
 iddjedun afar imma. 16 jah )?ai bokarjos jah Fareisaieis ga- 
 saihjandans ina matjahdan mi|> ]?aim motaijam jah frawaurh- 
 taim, qe]?un du J?aim siponjam is; lua ist )7atei mi}^ motaijam 
 jah frawaurhtaim *) matji)? jah driggki)?? 17 jah gahausjands 
 lesus qa)7 du im: ni ]?aurbun swin^ai lekeis, ak J?ai ubilaba 
 liabandans; ni qam la)>on uswaurhtans ak frawaurhtans. 
 
 18 Jah wesun siponjos lohannis jah Fareisaieis fastandans; 
 jah atiddjedun jah qe)?un du imma: duhre siponjos Johannes 
 jah Fareisaieis fastand, i]? }?ai )?einai siponjos ni fastand? 19 jah 
 
 ') fidtvorin MS. ^) aflepanda MS. ') gasehu MS. ■") fraurh- 
 taim MS. 
 
02 Mark 11. m. 
 
 qa}> ini lesns: ibai magun siinjus bnijjfadis, unci )5atei mi)? 
 im ist brul>fa}?s, fastanV swa lagga lueila swe iui}> sis haband 
 hruj'facl, ni magun fastan. 20 a^j^an atg-ag'gand dagos pun afni- 
 mada af im s;i brujjfajjs, jah pun fastand in jainamma daga. 
 21 ni mauua plat fanins niujis siuji)? ana suagan faimjana; ibai 
 afnimai fullon af J?amma sa niuja l^amma feirujin. jah wair- 
 siza gataura wairjji]?. 22 ni mauna giuti)? wein juggatain balgins 
 fairujans; ibai aufto distairai wein Jjata niujo J^ans balgins, 
 jah wein usgutni)?, jah ]^ai balgeis fraqistnand; ak Mein jng- 
 gata in balgins uiujaus giutand. 
 
 23 Jah war)? )>airhgaggan imma sabbato daga )?airh atisk, jah 
 dngunnun siponjos is skewjandans raupjau ahsa. 24 jah Farei- 
 saieis qe)?uu du imma: sai, h-a taujand siponjos )?einai sab- 
 batim )?atei ni skuld istV 25 jah is qtx]> du im: niu ussuggwuj? 
 aiw ka gatawida Daweid, )>au fiaurtta jah gredags was, is jah 
 )>ai mi)j imma'? 26 Iraiwa galai)> in gard gujjs uf Abia)?ara gudjin 
 jah hlaibans fauiiageinais matida, ]?anzei ni skuld ist matjan 
 niba ainaim gudjam, jah gaf jah );aim mi]? sis wisandamV 27 jah 
 qa)? im: sabbato in mans war)> gaskapans, ni manna in sab- 
 bato dagis; 28 swaei frauja ist sa sunus mans jah )>ammu sabbato. 
 
 f 'liap. 111. 1 Jah galai)» aftra in synagogen, jah was jainar 
 manna ga)?aursana habands handu. 2 jah witaidedun imma, hai- 
 lidediu sabbato daga, ei wi'ohidedeina ina. 3 jah qa)? du )?amma 
 mann Jiamma ga)?aursana habandin handu : urreis in midumai. 
 4 jah qt\\> du im: skuldu ist in sabbatim ]nn]> taujaii ai)?]'au 
 ujii'iu)' taujan, saiwala nasjau ai)')?au usqistjan? i)» eis )'ahai- 
 dedun. 5 jah ussaihands ins mi]? moda, gaurs in daubi)?08 
 hairtins ize, qa)? du Ifamma mann: ufrakei )?o handu l?eina! 
 jah ufrakida, jah gasto)? afti'a so handus is. 
 
 6 Jah gaggaudans )?an Fareisaieis sunsaiw mi)? J?aim Hero- 
 diauum garnni gatawidedun bi ina, ei imma usqemeina. 7 jah 
 lesus aflai]? mi)? siponjam seinaim du marein, jah filu manageins 
 us Galeilaia*) laistidedun afar imma, 8 jah us ludaia jah us 
 lairusaulymim jah us Idumaia jah hindana laurdanaus; jah 
 j'ai bi Tyra jah Seidona, manageins filu, gahausjandans ban 
 filu is tawida, qemun at imma. 9 jah qa)? )?aim siponjam 
 seinaim ei skip habai)? wesi at imma in )?izos manageins, ei ni 
 l?raiheiua ina. 10 managans auk gahailida, swaswe drusuu ana 
 ina ei imma attaitokeina, 11 jah swa managai swe habaidedun 
 wuudufnjos jah ahmans unhrainjans, )?aih )?an ina gasehrun, 
 drusuu du imma jah hropidedun qi)?andans )'atei )?u is sunus 
 gu)?s. 12 jah filu andbait ins ei ina ni ga8wikun)?idedeina. 
 
 13 Jah ustaig in fairguni jah athaihait )?anzei wilda is, jah 
 gali)?un du imma. 14 jah gawaurhta twallf du wisan mi)> sis, 
 
 ') Galeilaian MS. 
 
Mark IH. IV. 93 
 
 jah ei insandidedi ins merjau, 15 jah habau waldufni du liailjau 
 sauhtins jail uswairpan unhul);on.s. 16 jah gasatida Seimona namo 
 Paitrus; 17 jah lakobaii J^amma Zaibaidaiaus, jah lohanne bro)n' 
 lakobaus, jah gasatida im nanina Bauanaivgais, ]?atei ist: sun- 
 jus )jeiluon,s; 18 jah Andraian jah Filipjju jah Bar]?aulaumaiu 
 jah Mat})aiu jah I>oman jah lakobu l^iana Alfaiaus, jah Pad- 
 daiu jah Seimona ]3ana Kauaneiten, l!:l j;ili ludan Iskarioten, 
 saeijah galewida ina 
 
 20 Jah atiddjedun in gard, jah gaiddja sik managei, swaswe 
 ni mahtedun nih hlaif matjan. 21 jah hausjandans fram imma 
 bokarjos jah an]?arai usiddjedun gahaban ina; qej^uu auk 
 ])atei usgaisil's ist. 22 jah bokarjos ]?ai af lairusaulymai qi- 
 mandans qej>un )>atei Baiailzaibul habai)?, jah ]?atei in ]?amma 
 reikistin unhulj^ono uswairpi)? ]?aim unhul)?om. 23 jah athaitands 
 ins in gajukom qa|? du im: hraiwa mag Satanas Satanan 
 uswairpan? 24 jah jabai J^iudangardi wi]?ra sik gadailjada, ni 
 mag standan so )?iudangardi jaina. 25 jah jabai gards wifra sik 
 gadailjada, ni mag standan sa gards jains. 26 jah jabai Satana 
 usstojj ana sik silban jah gadailij>s war)?, ni mag gastandan, 
 ak audi habai)^. 27 ni manna mag kasa swinj?is galeij^ands in 
 gard is wilwan, niba faur)->is j^ana swinf^an gabindi)?; jah /<an') 
 ^ana gard is diswilwai. 28 amen, qi}?a izwis, )?atei allata afletada 
 )?ata frawaurhte sunum manne, jah naiteinos swa managos 
 swaswe wajamerjand; 29 aj>|?an saei wajamerei)? ahman 
 weihana, ni habai]? fralet aiw, ak skula ist aiweinaizos fra- 
 waurhtais. 30 unte qej»un: ahman unhrainjana habai)?. 
 
 31 Jah qemun J>an aij^ei is jah bro)?ijus is jah uta stan- 
 dandona insandidedun du imma, haitandona ina. 32 jah setun 
 hi ina managei ; qe)?un pan du imma , sai, ai)?ei l^eina jah bro- 
 ]?ijus ]?einai jah swistrjus )?einos uta sokjand J;uk. 33 jah andhof 
 im qi)?ands : luo ist so ai)?ei meina ai)?]?au ]?ai broj^rjus meinai ? 
 34 jah bisaihrands bisunjane )?ans bi sik sitandans qa)>: sai, 
 ai]?ei meina jah }?ai bro]?rjiis meinai. 85 saei allis waurkei)? 
 wiljan gups, sa jah bro)>ar meins jah swistar jah ai)?ei ist. 
 
 Chap. IV. 1 Jah aftra lesus dugann laisjan at marein, jah 
 galesun sik du imma manageins filu, swaswe ina galeij)andan-) 
 in skip gasitan in marein; jah alia so managei wi]?ra marein 
 ana staj^a was. 2 jah laisida ins in gajukom manag, jah qa|> 
 im in laiseinai seinai: 3 hauseij?! sai, urrann sa saiands du saian 
 fratwa seinamma. 4 jah war)^, mijjf'anei saiso, sum raihtis ga- 
 draus faur wig, jah qemun fuglos jah fretun l?ata. 5 an]?aru)?- 
 ]?an gadraus ana stainahamma, l^arei ni habaida air)?a managa, 
 jah suns urrann, in f>izei ni habaida, diupaizos air)?os; 6 at sun- 
 nin )3an urrinnandin ufbrann, jah unte ni habaida waurtins. 
 
 ') wanting MS. -) galeipan MS. 
 
94 Mark IV. 
 
 ga)?aursnoda. 7 jah sum gadraus in Jjatirnuns; jah ufarstigun 
 ^ai }?aurnjus jah afluapidedun J?ata, jah akran ui gaf. 8 jah 
 sum gadi-aus in air)'a goda, jah gaf akran urrinnando jah 
 wahsjaudo, jah bar ain ■!• jah ain j jah aiu t. 9 jah qa]^: saei 
 habai ausona hausjandoua, gahausjai. 
 
 10 Ip bi)?e war]) sundro, frehun ina );>ai bi iua mi)? J^aim tvva- 
 libim ]>izos gajukous. 11 jah qa]' im: izwis atgiban ist kunnau 
 runa jjiudangardjos g'u]'s, i|) jainaim ]nnm uta in gajukom ') 
 allata wair)?!)?, 12 ei sailuandans sailuaina jah ni gaumjaina, jah 
 hausjandans hausjaiua jah ni fraj^jaina, nibai ban gawand- 
 iaina sik jah afletaindau im frawaurliteis. 13 jah qa)? du im: 
 ni witu]? ]>o gajukon, jali luaiwa alios ]>os gajukons kunnei)?? 
 14 sa saijands waurd saiji)?. 15 a^J^'an )?ai wipra wig sind, ]?arei 
 saiada )?ata waurd, jah J?an gahausjaud unkarjans, suns qimi]:" 
 Hatanas jah usnimij? waurd )>ata insaiano in hairtam ize. 16 jah 
 sind samaleiko )?ai ana stainahamma saianans, }jaiei ]?an haus- 
 jand p-ata waurd, suns mif> fahedai nimand ita. 17 jah ni haband 
 waurtins in sis, ak hreilaluairbai sind; Jjafroh, bi)?e qimi)? agio 
 ai)>]'au Avrakja in );is waurdis, suns gamarzjanda. 18 jah ]>&i 
 sind fnxi in ]7aurnuns saianans, )>ai waurd liausjandans, 19 jah 
 saurgos f>izos libainais jah afmarzeins gabeins jah )mi bi )?ata 
 an)?ar histjus inn atgaggandans afluapjand pata waurd, jah 
 akranakius wair))i]j. 20 jah ))ai sind |?ai ana air)?ai j^izai godon 
 saianans, )?aiei hausjand ]?ata waurd jah andnimand, jah akran 
 bairand, ain V jah ain 'j' jali ain 'r'. 
 
 21 Jah qaj) du im: ibai lukarn qimi)^ du)^e ei uf melan 
 satjaidau aif^j^au undar ligr? niu ei ana lukarnasta)?an satjai- 
 dauV 22 nih aliis ist Iva fulginis ]>sdei ni gabairhtjaidau : nih 
 war]j analaugn, ak ei swikun]? wairjjai. 23 jabai luas habai 
 ausona hausjandona, gahausjai. 
 
 24 Jah qiip du im: sailuip', Iua hausei)?! In )>izaiei mita)? 
 miti].", mitada izwis jah biaukada izwis )>aim galaubjandam. 
 25 unte Jnshrammeli saei habai]? gibada imma; jah saei ni 
 habai]? jah ]?atei habai]? afnimada imma. 
 
 26 Jah qa)?: swa ist ]?iudangardi gu]?s, swaswe jabai 
 manna wairpi)? fraiwa ana air]?a. 27 jah slepi^ jah urreisi]? 
 naht jah daga, jah ]?ata fraiw keini]? jah liudij? swe ni wait is. 
 28 silbo auk air]?a akran bairi)?: frumist gras, }?aJ'roh ahs, ]?a- 
 )?roh fuUeij? kaurnis in )?amma ahsa. 29 ]?anuh bi}?e atgibada 
 akran, suns insandeij? gil)?a, Tinte atist asans. 
 
 30 Jah qa]?: be galeikom ]?iudangardja gu]?s, ai]?)?au in 
 bileikai gajukon gabairam )?o? 31 swe kaurno sinapis, ^atei 
 ]?an saiada ana air]?a, minnist allaize fraiwe ist )?ize ana air]?ai; 
 32 jah ]?an saiada, urrinni]? jah wair]?i]? allaize grase maist, jah 
 
 ') gajukon MS. 
 
Mark IV. V. 95 
 
 gatauji)? astans mikilans, swaswe rnagun uf skadau is fuglos 
 himinig gabauan. 33 jah swaleikaim managaim gajukom rodida 
 du im ]?ata waurd, swaswe mahtedun hausjon. 34 i]> inuli gaju- 
 kon ni rodida im, ip suiidro siponjam seiiiaim andband allata. 
 35 Jah qa)> du im in jainamma daga at andanahtja j^an 
 waur]?anamma : wslei]?am jainis stadis. 36 jah afletandans j'o 
 managein andnemun ina swewas in skipa; jah pan an]?ara skipa 
 Avesun mi]:» imma. 37 jah war]^ skura windis mikila jah wegos 
 waltidednn in skip, swaswe ita Julian gafuUnoda. 38 jah was 
 is ana notin ana waggarja slepands, jah urraisidedun ina jah 
 qe}>un du imma : laisari, niu kara ]>nk ]?izei fraqistnam '? 39 jah 
 urreisands gasok winda jah qaj* du marein: gaslawai. afdumbu! 
 jah anasilaida sa winds jah warj> wis mikil. 40 jah qa|' 
 du im: dulue faurhtai sijuj? swaV luaiwa ni nauh habaij^ 
 galaubein? 41 jah ohtedun sis agis mikil, jah qe)>un du sis 
 misso: hras }>annu sa sijai, unte jah winds jah marei ufhaus- 
 jand imma? 
 
 Chap. V. 1 Jah qemun hindar marein in landa Gaddarene. 
 2 jah usgaggandin imma us skipa suns gamotida imma manna 
 us aurahjom in ahmin unhrainjamma, 3 saei bauain habaida in 
 aurahjom: jah ni naudibandjom eisarneinaim manna mahta 
 ina gabindan. 4 unte is ufta eisarnam bi fotuns gabuganaim 
 jah naudibandjom eisarneinaim gabundans was, jah galausida 
 af sis ]JOS naudibandjos, jah ]>o ana fotum eisarna gabrak jah 
 manna ni mahta ina gatamjan.*) 5 jah sinteino nahtam jah 
 dagam in aurahjom jah in fairgunjam was hropjands jah bligg- 
 wands sik stainam. 6 gasailuands 2) )?an lesu fairraf^ro rann 
 jah inwait ina, 7 jah hropjands stibnai mikilai qa]?: hra mis 
 jah pVLS, lesu, sunau guj<s ^is hauhistins ? biswara )?uk bi gu]>a, 
 ni balwjais mis! 9 unte qa]; imma: usgagg, ahma unhrainja, us 
 l^amma mann! 9 jah frah ina: hra name )jein? jah qa]> du 
 imma: namo mein Laigaion, unte managai sijum. 10 jah ba]? 
 ina filu ei ni usdrebi im us landa. 11 wasuh ]?an jainar hairda 
 sweine haldana at );amma fairgunja. 12 jah bedun ina alios I'os 
 unhul}?ons qi)?andeins: insandei unsis in Jjo sweina, ei in po 
 galei}?aima. 13 jah uslaubida im lesus suns, jah usgaggandans 
 ahmans )?ai unhrainjans galij>un in )?o sweina, jah rann so 
 hairda and driuson in marein; wesunu)?-]?an swe twos jjusundjos, 
 jah afluapnodedun in marein. 14 jah j^ai haldandans ]?o sweina 
 ga)>lauhun, jah gataihun in baurg jah in haimom, jah qemun 
 sailuan hra wesi l^ata waur)?ano. 15 jah atiddjedun du lesua, 
 jah gasaihrand J^ana wodan sitandan jah gawasidana jah fra]?- 
 jandan, Jjana saei habaida laigaion, jah ohtedun. 16 jah spil- 
 lodedun im ]?aiei gaseluun, hraiwa war)) bi ]>ana wodan jah 
 
 ') gloss in tlie margin, gabindan. ^) gasaisaih/ands MS. 
 
96 Mark V. 
 
 l)i ])0 sweina. 17 jali dugunuuu bidjan ina g-alei)>aii Inudai; 
 markos seinos. 18 jah inn gaggandan ina in skip \k\]> ina. sa^i 
 was wods, ei mi)) imma wesi. 19 jali ui lailot ina, ak q}W ™ 
 imma: gagg du garda Veiuamma du J^einaim, jali gateili uu, 
 luan tilu l^us frauja gatawida jali gaarmaida Jvuk. 20 jah galaip 
 jail dugann merjau in Daikapaulein, luan lilu gatawida innna 
 lesus; iali allai sildaleilddedun. 
 
 21 Jah iisleil^andin lesua in skipa aftra hindar marein, 
 gaqemim sik maiiageins tilu du imma, jali was faura marein. 
 22 jah sai, qimi)' ains phe synagogafade namin Jaeirus; jah 
 sailuands ina gadraus du fotum lesuis, 2o jah ba)? ina filu, qi- 
 )jands ]?atei dauhtar meina aftumist habaij^ ei qimands lagjais 
 ana po handuns, ei ganisai jah libai. 24 jah galai]? mi]) imma, 
 jah iddjedun afar imma manageins filu jah Jn-aihun ina. 25 jah 
 qinono suma wisandei in ruua blo])is jera twalif, 26 jah manag 
 ga})ulandei fram managaim lekjam jah fraqimandei allamma 
 seinamma jah ni waihtai botida, ak mais wairs habaida, 27 ga- 
 hausjandei bi lesu, atgaggandei in managein aftana attaitok 
 wastjai is. 28 unte qaj? )?atei ja,bai wastjom is atteka, ganisa. 
 29 jah sunsaiw gaj^aursnoda sa brunna blo)?is izos, jah ufkunj^a 
 ana leika j^atei gahailnoda af ])amma slaha. 30 jah sunsaiw 
 lesus ufkun)?a in sis silbin J^o us sis maht usgaggandein; ga- 
 wandjands sik in managein qa)): luas mis taitok wastjom? 
 31 jah qe|?un du imma siponjos is: sailuis po managein J)fei- 
 liandein )?uk, jah qi))is: hras mis taitok? 32 jah wlaitoda sai- 
 luan po ^lata taujandein. 33 ip so qino ogandei jah reirandei, 
 witandei )?atei war)? bi ija, qam jah draus du imma, jah qa]) 
 imma alia )po sunja. 34 ip is qap du izai: dauhtar, galaubeins 
 J^eina ganasida )3uk, gagg in gawair)?i, jah sijais haila af )?amma 
 slaha Jjeinamma. 
 
 35 Nauh))anuh imma rodjandin qemun fram pamma syna- 
 gogafada, qif^andans ]?atei dauhtar J^eina gaswalt; lira t?ana- 
 mais draibeis )?ana laisari? 36 i); lesus sunsaiw gahausjands ]?ata 
 waurd rodi)?, qa)? du ]?amma synagogafada: ni faurhtei; ]?a- 
 tainei galaubei. ;i7 jah ni fralailot ainohun ize mi)? sis afar- 
 gaggan, nibai Paitru jah lakobu jah lohannen bro})ar lakobis. 
 38 jah galaip in gard )'is synagogafadis, jah gasahr auhjodu jah 
 gretandans jah waifairbjandans filu. 39 jah inn atgaggands 
 qsip du im: hra auhjo)' jah greti])? l-ata barn ni gadaujjnoda, 
 ak slepi)). 40 jah bihlohun ina. i}) is uswairpands' allaim gani- 
 mij) attan ^-is barnis jah ai)?ein jah pans mi)) sis, jah galai)? 
 inn ])arei was psda, barn ligando. 41 jah fairgraip bi handau 
 ])ata barn qa)'uh du izai: talei)7a kumei, )'atei ist gaskeiri)?: 
 mawilo, du )?us qij^a: urreis. 42 jah suns urrais so mawi jah 
 iddja; was auk jere twalibe; jah usgeisnodedun faurhtein miki- 
 lai. 43 jah anabau]? im filu ei manna ni fun)>i j^ata: jah haihait 
 izai giban matjan. 
 
St. Luke, 11. , 97 
 
 3. FROM THK GOSPEL OF ST. LUKE. 
 
 (CODEX ARGENTEUS). 
 
 Chap. II. 1 ^y^.\\•\> pan in (lagans jainans, urraun gagrefts 
 fram kaisara Agustau, gameljau allana raidjungard. 2 soh J^an 
 gilstrameleins frumista. wai'l' at [wisandin kiudiini SyriaisJ ') 
 raginondin Samim Kyreinai;iu. -Sjali iddjedun allai, ei nielidai 
 weseina, Irarjizuli in seinai hanrg. 4 urrann )^an jah losef us 
 flaleilaia, us baurg Nazarait-', in ludaian, in baurg Daweidis sei 
 liaitada Beldaliaim. duj^e ei ^^'as us gavda fadveinais Daweidis, 
 5 anameljan mi|^ Maviin sei in t'ragit'tim whs imma qeins, wi- 
 sandein inkilj^on. (i War]; |;an, mit^l^anei I'o wesun jainar, usfull- 
 nodedun dagos du bairan izai. 7 jah gabar sunu seinana ]>ana 
 frumabaur, jah biwand ina, jah galagida ina in uzetin, unte ni 
 was im rumis in stada J-iamma. 8 jah hairdjos wesun in ]?amma 
 samin landa, |?aii'hwakandans jah witandans wahtwom nahts 
 ufaro hairdai seinai. i]> aggilus fraujius anaiiam ins jali wul- 
 j?us fraujins biskain ins, jah olitedun agisa mikilamma. 10 jah 
 qa]:" du im sa aggilus: ni ogei]^ unte sai, spillo izwis faheid 
 mikila, sei wair|;>il? allai managein, 11 );atei gabaurans ist izwis 
 himma daga nasjands, saei ist Xristus frauja, in baurg Dawei- 
 dis. 12 jah )?ata izwis taikns: bigitid barn biwundan jah galagid 
 in uzetin. 13 jah anaks war); mi|? };amma aggilau managei har- 
 jis himinakundis hazjandane gu];" jah qi)?andane: 14 wul}?us in 
 hauhistjam guj^a jah ana air];>ai g-awair|<i in mannam godis 
 wiljins. 
 
 15 Jah war);, bi))e gali);un fairra im in himin f;ai aggiljus, 
 jah J>ai mans ];ai hairdjos qe|;uu du sis misso: ];airhgaggaima 
 ju und Be);lahaim, jah saihraima waurd ];ata waurf'ano, )?atei 
 frauja gakannida unsis. 16 jah qemun sniumjandans,jahbigetun 
 Marian jali losef jah pidii barn ligando in uzetin. 17 gasaih?an- 
 dans ];an gakannidedun bi J^ata waurd J?atei rodi|; was du im 
 bi );ata barn. 18 jah allai fiai gahausjandaus sihlaleikidedun bi 
 ];o rodidona fram );aim hairdjam du im. 19 i}; Maria aUa ga- 
 fastaida po waurda, ];agkjaudei in hairtin seinamma. 20 jah ga- 
 wandidedun sik ];ai hairdjos mikiljandans jah hazjandans gu]? 
 in allaize )?izeei gahausidedun jah gasehrun swaswe rodi); was 
 du im. 
 
 21 Jah bi|;e usfulnodedun dagos ahtau du bimaitan ina, jah 
 haitan was namo is lesus, l^ata qij^ano fram aggilau, faur);izei 
 ganumans wesi in wamba. 
 
 22 Jah bi)?e usfulnodedun dagos hraineinais ize bi witoda 
 Mosezis, brahtedun ina in lairusalem, atsatjan faura fraujtn, 
 23 swaswe gamelid ist in witoda fraujins: |;atei Ivazuh gumakun- 
 
 1) wisandin Idndina Syriais is evidently a marginal gloss of the 
 manuscript which was acciaenlally put in the text 
 
 Braune, Goth, grammar. ^ 
 
98 i^t- i^iii^f- n. 
 
 daize uslukands qijni weilis fraujiiis liaitada, 24 jah ci gebeiua 
 fram imma hnnsl, swaswe qij^an ist in witoda franjins. gajuk 
 liraiwadubouo aitJl^-au twos juggous ahake. 25 j'anili was maiiua 
 in lairusaleni, ]jizei namo Symaion, jah sa manna was garaiuts 
 jah gudafaurlits, l)eidands ia]?onais Israelis, jali ahma i\eilis 
 was ana imma. 26 jala was imma gataihan fram ahmin l^nmma 
 weihin ni sailvau daujm, faurj'ize selri Xristu fraujins. 2i jah 
 qam in ahmin in )jizai alh; jah mil'];'anei inn attauhun berus- 
 jos pata. barn lesu, ei tawidedeina bi biulitja witodis bi ina. 
 28 jah is andnam ina ana armins seinans, jah j^iuHda gu];a jali 
 qa]>: 29 nu fraleitais skalk jjeinana, franjinond frauja, hi waurda 
 J>einamma in gawair])ja; 30 l^ande seluun augona meina nasein 
 ]>eina, 31 J-ioei manwides in andwairj^ja') allaizo nianageiuo, 32 liu- 
 ha]? du andhuleinai ])iudom jah wulj^n managein peinai Israela. 
 33 jah was losef jah ailpei is sildaleikjandona ana );aim )^oei 
 rodida wesun bi ina. 34 jah ]>iu]^ida ina Symaion jah qa^ du 
 Mariin, ai)?ein is: sai, sa ligi]^ du drusa jah usstassai mana- 
 gaize in Israela jah du taiknai andsakanai. 35 jah ]:>an )?eina 
 silbons saiwala pairhgaggi); hairus, ei andhuljaindau us mana- 
 gaim hairtam mitoneis. 36 jah was Anna praufeteis, dauhtar Fa- 
 nuelis, us kunja Aseris; soh framaldra dage managaize liban- 
 dei mit;" abin jera sibuu fram magaj^ein seinai, 37 soh ]?an widuwo 
 jere alitautehuud jah fidwor, soh ni afiddja fairra alh fastubn- 
 jam jah bidom blotande fraujan nahtam jah dagam. 38 soh ]:>izai 
 Iveilai atstandandei andhaihait fraujin, jah rodida bi ina in 
 allaim j-iaim usbeidandam laj^on lairusaulymos. 39 jah bij^e ustau- 
 hun aliata bi witoda fraujins, gawandidedun sik in Galeilaian, 
 in baurg seiua Nazarai);'. 40 ip ]?ata barn wohs jah swinjmoda 
 ahmins fullnands jah handugeins, jah ansts guj^s was ana imma. 
 41 Jah wratodeduu j^ai birusjos is jera Ivammeh in lairu- 
 salem at dul]? paska. 42 jah bi[^e war]; twalibwintrus, usgaggan- 
 dam )jan im in lairusaulyma bi biuhtja dul}?ais, 43 jah ustiuhan- 
 ■ dam l^ans dagans, mij^j^'ane gawandidedun sik aftra, gastop 
 lesus sa magus in lairusalem, jah ni wissedun ^) losef jah aij^ei 
 is. 44 hugjandona in gasinj?jam ina wisan qemun dagis wig jali 
 sokidedun ina in gani)?jam jah in kun]?am. 45 jah ni bigitandona 
 ina gawandidedun sik in lairusalem sokjandona ina. 46 jah war)? 
 afar dagans prins, bigetun ina in alh sitandan in midjaim lai- 
 sarjam jah hausjandan im jah fraihnandan ins. 47 usgeisnodedun 
 pan allai ]?ai hausjandans is ana frodein jah andawaurdjam is. 
 48 jah gasailuandans ina sildaleikidedun, jah qa)? du imma 
 so ait?ei is: magau, lua gatawides uns swa? sai, sa atta J>eins 
 jah ik winnandona sokidedum ]?uk. 49 jah qaf> du im: Iva 
 Jjatei sokidedu); mik? niu wissedu]? ]?atei in piaim attins meinis 
 skulda wisan? 50 jah ija ni ivopnn )jamma waurda Jjatei rodida 
 
 ') anandwairfija MS. ') wisedun MS. 
 
St. Liiku. IT. — rr. Cor., I. 99 
 
 du im. 51 jjili iddja mi|) im jah qam in Kaziwai]?, jali was uf- 
 hausjands im; jah ai|5ei is gafastaida ]>o waurda alia in hairtin 
 seinamma. 52 jah lesus I'aih frodein jali wahstau jah anstai 
 at gul'a jah mannam. 
 
 4. FROM THE SECOND EPISTLE TO ' 
 THE CORINTHIANS. 
 
 (CHAPS. I— V IN CODEX AMBR. B; I. 8-^lV, lo AND V ALSO IN 
 CODEX AMBR. A). 
 
 DU K.VUEINDAIDJt ANl'ARA DUSTODElJ). 
 
 Chap. 1. 1) 1 Pawlus apaustaulus lesiiis Xristaus ]?airli wiljan 
 gu]?s jah Teimau].iaiiis bro);ar aikklesjon g'u|'s fnzai wisandein 
 in Kaurin]>on ini|> allaim ];iaim weiham ]'aim wisandam in allai 
 Akaijai. 2 ansts izwis jali gaAvairfji fram gnj^a attin unsaramma 
 jah fraujin lesu Xristau. 
 
 3 Piujnl.'S gup jah atta fraujins unsaris lesuis Xristaus, atta 
 bleij'eino jah gu]' allaizo ga];lailite, 4 saei ga]n'afstida uns ana 
 allai aglon unsaiai, ei mageima weis gaj^rafstjan ];ans in allaim 
 aglom ]^airh ]'o ga|'laiht ]'izaiei gafn-afstidai sijum silbans fram 
 gu]:'a. 5 unte si\'a,s\\'e ufarassus ist jndaine Xristaus in uns, swa 
 jah ]n\h]i Xristu ufar lilu ist jah gajn-afsteins unsara. 6 a];i])an 
 ja)7)?e l^reihanda, in izwaraizos gal^laihtais jah naseinais fnzos 
 waurstweigons in stiwitja ]nzo samono ]^ulaine, ]^ozei jah weis 
 winnam, jah wens unsara gatulgida faur izwis; ja)?]'e ga]n'afst- 
 janda in izwaraizos ga);laihtais jah naseinais, 7 witandans j^atei 
 swaswe gadailans pulaine siju]?, jah gaj^laihtais wairj^i)?. 8 unte 
 ni wileima izwis unweisans, hrofnjus, hi aglon unsara ]>q waur- 
 J^ianon uns in Asiai, unte ufarassau kauridai wesum ufar maht, 
 swaswe'^) skamaidedeiiua uiis jah liban. 9 akei silbans in uns 
 silbam andahaft dauj^aus habaidedum, ei ni sijaima trauandans 
 du uns silbam, ak du gul'a J^amma urraisjandin dauj^ans, 10 izei 
 us swaleikaim daujjum uns galausida jah galausei}>, du J^ammei 
 wenidedum ei galausei);', 11 at hilpandam jah izwis bi uns bidai, 
 ei in managamma andwairpja so in uns giba pairh managans 
 awiliudodau faur uns. 12 unte luoftuli unsara so ist, weitwodei 
 mijjwisseins unsaraizos, |;atei in ainfal)5ein jah hlutrein gu]ps, 
 ni in handugein leikeinai, ak in anstai guj-^s usmeitum^) in 
 l^amma fairhrau, if; ufarassau at izwis. 13 unte ni alja meljam 
 izwis, alja ]?oei anakunnaip ai)->]?au jah ufkunnai]?; aj^J^an wenja 
 ei und audi ufkunnai)?, 14 swaswe gakunnaidedu}.* uns bi 
 sumata, unte luoftuli izwara sijum, swaswe jah jus unsara in 
 daga fraujins lesuis Xristaus.*) 
 
 ') According to codex B, from verse 8. onward, ivith the various 
 readings of A. ^) In A: swaswe afswaggwidai weseima jal liban, and 
 the additional marginal gloss skamaidedeiiua. ^) iisinetum A. ") Xristaus 
 rvanting in A. 
 
100 11. Cor.. I. 11. 
 
 15 Jail J'izai tranainai wiltla faur}>is qiman at iz^\is, ei au- 
 l^ara anst habaidedei)'. 16 jali*) ]>airh izwi.s galeil^an iu Makidon- 
 ja2) jail aftra af Makidoiijai qimaii at izwis, jali fvaiii izwis 
 gasandjau niik in luda.ia. 17 l^atul^-lJau uu mitonds, ibai ;>i^™ 
 leihtis brulita? ai}>|.iaii |'atei inito. bi leika I'agkjan, ei sijai''j 
 at mis [."ata ja ja jah I'ata ue iieV 18 al'l^iaii tvigpvs ^iil', ci pata 
 waui-d unsar l^ata dii izwis uist ja jali ■•) lie. 10 luite gnJAS snnus 
 lesiis Xristiis, saei in izwis ))airli uns wailainerjada-^), )>nirh 
 mik jail Silbauu iali Teiuiau)nxiu, uih") wait V<^ .i:'li') ^^_^ "'^ 
 ja iu iimua wav\>. 2<i Ivaiwa niauaga gabaita gups, in imnia 
 l^ata ja, duH>e jyli*) f^airb iiia amen, 'gu]ni du wul|'_au piiivh 
 uns. 21 Aplnm sa gat^vastjands unsis") mi]' izwis in Xristau jab 
 salbonds'") mis guK 22 jab sigljands uns jali gibands wadi ali- 
 naau in bairtona unsara. 2:! al^j^an ik weitwod gu|^ aualiaita ana 
 ineiuai saiwalai, ei freidjands izwara )jaiiasei)'s ni (jam in 
 Kauriu].'ou ; 24 ni }>atei fraujiuoma ' ') iz^\arai gabiubeiuai, ak ga- 
 waurstwans sijum anstais izwaraizos; unte galaubein;iigasto]ni].>. 
 
 Cbap. n.''^) 1 Aj.'l^an gastauida jjata silbo at mis, ei aftra 
 in saurgai ni qimau at izwis. 2 unte jabai ik gaurja izwis, jab 
 b-as ist saei gailjai mik, niba'^) sa gaurida us mis? 3ja}'-i'') 
 ]>ata silbo gamelida izwis, ei qimands saurga ni habau tram 
 ]?aimei skulda faginon, gatrauands in allaim izwis ^atei meina 
 fabeps '^) allaize izwara ist. 4 aj^l^an us managai aglon jab agg- 
 wij'ai bairtins gamelida izwis ]'airb managa tagTa, ni j.'eei 
 saurgail^ ak ei frijal^wai") kunnei)^ f.'oei baba ufarassau dn 
 izwis. •') a]'l?an jabai Ivas gaurida, ni mik gaurida, ak bi su- 
 matai'), ei ni anakaurjau allans izwis. 6 ganah jpamma swalei- 
 kamma andabeti*) f>ata fram managizam, 7 swaei ]?ata andanei).'o 
 izwis mais fragiban jag-i")ga)?laihan, ibai aufto managizein 
 saurgai gasiggqai sa swaleiks. 8 inuj'-2''))'is bidja izwis tul- 
 gjan in imma fria)>wa. 2 du)?]?e gamelida, ei ufkunnau kustu 
 izwarana, sijaidu in allamma ufbausjandans. 1(» a];pan ];animei 
 lira fragibi).', jab ik; jab ];an ik, jabai Iva fragaf, fragaf'^') in 
 izwara in andwair)^ja Xristaus, 11 ei ni gaaigiuondau ^^) fram 
 Satanin; unte ni sijum unwitandans munins is. 
 
 12 A)?)?an qimands in Trauadai in aiwaggeljons^^) Xristaus 
 jab at haurdai mis uslukanai in fraujin, 13 ni babaida gahreilaiu 
 abmin meinamma, in j^ammei ni bigat Teitauu bro}?ar nieina- 
 na; ak twisstandands im^-i) galai)? in Makaidonja. 's) 14 ajj]?an 
 
 ') ja}? A. ■■') Makaidonja, Makaidonjai A. ') ei ni sijai B. 
 
 ^) jan A. '■") merjada A. ^) Timai)>aiii ni A. ') jan A. 
 
 ») ja):' A. ") uns A. '») salbonsd A. ") fraujoma B. 
 
 '-) Chaps. II. III. according to A, with the various readings of B 
 '3) nibai B. '") jali B. ■=) faheds B. '«) fria>wa B. •') bi sumatal 
 bi sum ain B. '») andabeit B. '») jah B. =") iniili B. •") For 
 tragaf in both crises fragiba B. -^) inarginot gloss ni gafaihondau in. A. 
 ■■'^) aiwaggeljou B. -*) twistandands iuiiua B. -'■') in iu Makidonja B. 
 
11. Cor. IT. III. 101 
 
 giipa awiliu]'') J^amma sinteino ustaiknjandin ]iro)?eiga,ns iins 
 in Xi'istau jah daun kunj^jis seinis gabairhtjandin };airh ims 
 in allaim stadim; -) 15 unte Xristaiis^)^ dauns sijum wo)?i guf>a in 
 ]'aim ganisandam jah in psdm fraqistnandam''): 19 sumaim dauns 
 ns daul^au^) du dau)?au, sumaimu)j-)>an dauns us libainai du 
 libainai; jad-'*)du ]?amnia bas wair]-'S? 17 unte ni sium swe') 
 sumai maidjandans waurd guj'S, ak us hlutri}>ai, ak swaswe us 
 gn]>ii in andwair}>ja. gu}^s in Xristau rodjam. 
 
 Chap. 111. 1 Dugiunam aftra ujis silbans anafilhanV ai)^)^au 
 ibai l;'aurbuin savc sumai anafiUiis boko du izwis, ait?)>au us 
 izwis anafilhisV 2 aipistaule unsara jus siu]^^), gamelida in hair- 
 tam uusaraini, kun)?a jah anakunnaida fram allaim mannam. 
 3 swikun)^ai '■') |'atei siu]?'") aipistaule Xristaus, a.udbahtida fram 
 uns, inn") gamelida ni swartiza '2), alv ahmin gu].is libandins, 
 ni in spildom staineinaim, ak in spildom hairtane leikeinaim. 
 
 4 Af>]^an trauain swaleil^a habam pairli Xristu du guj'a, 5 af 
 j^atoi wairj-'ai sijaima ]?agkjan ha af uns silbam, swaswe ni 
 uns silbam, '3) ak so wair]3ida unsara us guj^a ist, 6 izei jah wair- 
 ]7aus brahta uns andbahtans niujaizos triggAvos, ni bokos, ak 
 alimins; unte boka usqimi]'. i]> alima gaqiuji]^. 7 a)?pan jabai 
 andbaliti dauj^aus in gameleinim gafrisahtijj in stainam war)? 
 Avul)'ag, swaei ni mahtedeina'*) sunjus Israelis fairweitjan du 
 wlita Mosezis in A\'ul]5aus Avlitis is ]'is gataurnandins, 8 hraiwa 
 nei mais andbaliti ahmins wair);'ai in wulj^aiiV 9 jabai auk and- 
 bahtja's) wargi]ws wul};us, und filu mais ufarist andbahti ga- 
 raihteins in '•>) wulj'au. 10 unte ni was wulj-iag ])ata wulj^ago in 
 l^izai halbai in ufarassaus wul]nxus; 11 jabai auk )>ata gataur- 
 nando jpairh wulj?u, und iilu mais })ata wisando in wulp>au. 
 
 12 Haliandans nu swaleika wen managaizos balj'eins bruk- 
 jaima, 13 jan-'") ni swaswe Mosez 's) lagida hulistr ana andaAvleizn, 
 du)?e ei ni fairweitidedeina sunjus Israelis in andi J^is gataur- 
 nandins; 14 ak afdaubnodedun *^) fra])ja ize, unte und hina dag 
 }?ata samo hulistr in anakunnainai Jnzos fairnjons triggwos 
 wisi)' unandhuli)', unte in Xristau gatairada. 16 akei und hina 
 dag mijppanei siggwada Moses, hulisti- ligi); ana hairtin ize. 
 
 16 a)3];an mip')-'anei gawandei]? du fraujin, afnimada )?ata hulistr. 
 
 17 aj^jjan frauja ahma ist; a)>|?an J>arei ahma fraujins, |?aruh frei- 
 hals^") ist. 18 aj^j^an weis allai andhulidamma andwair)?ja wul)?u 
 
 ') awiliud B. ^) J^airh uns after stadim B. ^) XristaiLs rvanling 
 ill A. '') gloss fralusnandam in A. ^) sumaim auk dauns dau)?aus B. 
 '') jah B. '') sijum B, swe rvanling in B. *) jus sm\>] jusijuf' B. 
 
 ") swikunl' B. "*) siju{> B. ") inna B. '2) swartizla B. ") swaswe 
 af uns silbam rvanling in A. ") mahtededeina B. "^) andbahti B. 
 »<*) us B. ") jah B. '«) Moses B. '») gloss afdaubnodedun in A. 
 2") freijhals A. 
 
102 n. Cor. Ill- y. 
 
 fraujins I'airhsailraudaiiK. ];o sauum fi'isalit iiii;alcikim(la at 
 wul)?au iu wiilpu, 1) swaswe af fraujins ahniiii. 
 
 C'liap. IV.2) 1 Dii];l;e habandaus l^ata aiidlialiti.^) suaswe 
 g-aarmaidai waiujnmi, ui waiij'aima') nsgrudjaus, 2 ak iitsto]nxm 
 l?aim aualaugujam aiwiskiis. ni gaggivudans in -warein iiili ga- 
 liug taujandans waurd guj's. ak bairlitein sunjos^) ustaiknjaii- 
 dans uiis silbans du allaiiii mi|nvisseira manne in andwair]ya 
 gu])S. 3 al^l^an jabai ist gahnlida aiwaggeljo unsara, in ]>i\m\ 
 fralusuandam ist galiulida', 4 in |-'aimei gii)' ]ns niwis gablindida_ 
 fi-al'ja Jnze ungalaubjaudane, ei ni liulitjai im liuliadein ")' 
 aiwiiggeljons wuljnius Xristaus, saei ist tVisalits gu];s uugasai- 
 fcaniui^.'') 5 ajjpian ni uns silbans mer.iara, ak Tesii Xristu fraii- 
 jau, i\> iins skalkans^) izwarans in lesnis. 6 nnto gn\) saei qa]; 
 ur-riqiza liuha]' skeiuan, saei jali liulitida iu Uairtam iinsaraini 
 du liuhadein kunjjjis Avulpaus guj's in andwairjjja lesuis Xristaus. 
 
 7 Al-ilniu habandaus )>ata buzd in airj'einaini kasam, ei ufaras- 
 sus sijai malitais gu]?s jali ni us unsis. 8 in allanima prailianai, 
 akei ni gaaggwidai; andbitanai, akei ni afslaupidai; It \vrikanai, 
 akei ni bilipianai; gadrausidai , akei ni fraqistidai, 10 sinteino 
 dauj^ein fraujins lesuis ana leika uusaramma'-') bairandans , el 
 Jail libains lesuis (ina leika unsaramina '") uskunj^a sijai. 11 sinteino 
 weis libandans in dau]>u atgibanda in lesuis, ei jali libains 
 lesuis 8wikun]-'a wairf.'ai in riurjamma leika unsaramma. 12 swaei 
 nu daulnis in uns M'aurkeif*, i]^ libains in izwis. 13 habandaus nu 
 I'ana sauian ahman galaubeinnis bi pamma gamelidin: galau- 
 bida, in J^izei jah rodida, jah weis galaubjani, in f.'izei jah rod- 
 jam, 14 ^\'itandans )nitei sa urraisjands fraujan lesu jah unsis 
 ]'airli lesu urraiseip jah fauragasatii)-' mi); izwis. 15 ]?atuli ]^an 
 allata in izwara, ei austs mauaguandei )^airh nianagizaus awi- 
 liud ufarassjai du wulj^au gu|?a. 16 inuh pis ni wair];ani usgrud- 
 jans, ak jjauhjabai sa utana unsar manna frawardjada, aif'l'au 
 sa innuma ananiujada daga jah daga. 17 unte J-iata andwairf^o 
 Ireilalvairb jah leiht ") agTons unsaiaizos bi ufarassau aiweiuis 
 wul)?aus kaurei ^vaurkjada unsis, 18 ni fairweitjandam ];izei ga- 
 sailrauaue, ak J^izei ungasaihranane ; unte ]>o gasaibanona riurja 
 sind, \\> ]>Q ungasaihranona aiweina. 
 
 Chap. V. 1 Witum auk )?atei, jabai sa airj^eina unsar gards 
 )>izos hlei)jros gatairada, ei gatimrjon us'-) gu);a habam, gard 
 unhanduwaurhtana aiweinana iu luminani. 2 unte jah in )?amma 
 
 ') ■vvul|:'au B. -) Chaps. IV. V. according to B., with the various 
 readings of A. ^) andbahtei A. ^) wair'j'am A. '") siuijus A. 
 
 ") liulikleins A. ') ungas. wanting iu A. ^) imskalkans A. '») uu- 
 saraiii — B stops here. '") The words pul hi Italics are ivanling in 
 Ihc mtinuscripl, they are iiiler//o/ate<l translations fr<ini the Greek nrii/intil. 
 ") lueilit MS. '-) Here A begins again. 
 
II. Cor. V. 103 
 
 swogatjam, bauaiuai uiiyaiai pizai us liimiua ufarlianion gaini- 
 jandaus, 3 jabai swel-'auli jali ') gawasidai, ni uaqadai bigitain- 
 dau. 4 jail auk wisandans in jsizai hlei}n-ai swogatjam kauridai, 
 nua ]^ammei ni wileima afhamon, ak anahamou, ei fraslin- 
 daidau pata diwano fram libainai. 5 a}>)3an saeijali-) gaman- 
 wida uns du pamma gu);, saei jali gaf uns-") wadi aliman. 
 6 gatrauandans nu sinteino jali witandaus l^atei wisandans in 
 I'amma leika afhaimjai sijum tram fraujin; 7 unte j^airli galau- 
 bein gaggam, ni ];iairli siun. 8 a]^)'an gatrauam jali waljam mais 
 usleij-'an us jnimma leika jali anahaimjaim wisan at fraujin. 
 9 inulH) ]ns usdaudjam, jaj^^e aualiaimjai jaj-'jje afhaimjai, waila 
 galeikan imma. 10 unte allai weis ataugjan skuldai sijum faura 
 stauastola Xvistaus, ei ganimai Irarjizuli ]>o SAvesona leikis, 
 afar ^aimei gatawida, ja]>)?e ]>m]> jupj'e uu))iu]^. 
 
 11 Witandans nu agis fraujins mannaus fullaweisjam, i)? 
 gii}.>a swikun};ai sijum. a)5]?an wenja jali in mifjwisseim izwaraim 
 swikunl^ans wisan uns. 12 ni ei aftra uns silbans uskannjaima^) 
 izwis, ak lew gibandans izwis Ivoftuljos fram uns,*") ei babaij^ 
 wijvra j^ans in andwair}>ja h'opandans jali ni liairtin.") 13 unte 
 jaj^j^e usgeisnodedum, guj^a, ja])]^e fullafra);jam, izwis. 14 unte 
 friaJAva Xristaus dishabai)? uns, 15 domjandans pata ];atei ains 
 faur allans gaswalt, )?annu allai gaswultun, jah faur allans 
 gaswalt, ei ];'ai libandans ni ];anasei);s sis*) silbam libaina^), 
 ak )>amma faur sik gaswiltandin jah urreisandin. 16 SAvaei weis 
 fram ]?amma nu ni ainnohun kunnum bi leika; ip jabai ufkun- 
 l^eduni bi leika Xristu, akei nu ni ];'anasei]?s ni kunnum ina.'") 
 17 swaei jabai li^o in Xristau niuja gaskafts, ]:'o aljrjona uslijjun; 
 sai, waur]:'un niuja alia. 18 ajjj^an alia us guj^a, j^amma gafri- 
 l^ondin uns sis'') j^airh Xristu jali''-) gibandin uns'^) andbahti 
 gafriponais. 19 unte swej-'auh gu); was in Xristau manasej? gafri- 
 j^onds sis, ni rahnjands im missadedins ize, jah.lagjands in 
 uns waurd gafrij^onais. 20 faur Xristu nu airinom, swe at gu)?a 
 ga)?laih'andin p-airh uns; bidjam''') faur Xristu gagawair^nan 
 gu];a. 21 unte j^ana izei'^) ni kunj^a frawaurht, faur uns gata- 
 wida frawaurht, ei weis waur]?eima garaihtei gulp's in imma. 
 
 ') jah rvanling in A. -) jag A. ^) uusis A. *) inn)? A. 
 
 '") gloss anafilhaima i)i A. ") imsis A. ') jau-ni iu liairtin A. 
 
 *) sis manthig in A. "J libainai B. '") ina wanting in A. ") xms 
 sis] imsis AB. '-) jag A. ^^) nnsis A. ") bidjandan,s A. 
 
 '") ize A. 
 
104 Skeireins 19. 30. 
 
 5. FROM THE SKEIUEINS. 
 
 (LEAVE VU. — OF JOHN VI, 9—13.)') 
 
 (ii l!») — ahun knnuandins fratijins malit jali aud}'aggkjaii7 
 dins rik is waldufneis. nih Stains ains,^) ak ^ali Andraias, saei 
 qa|': ist magula ains lier, saei habai]' 'e- hlaibaiis 
 barizeinans jah twans fiskaus, analeiko swe Filippus ga- 
 snkada. ni wa'iht mikilis hiigjauds nih ^vai^tidos laisareis aiid- 
 t^aggkjands, ])airli ]9oei usbav qijjands: akci ]>ata hra ist 
 du swa managaimV i]) frauja andtilouds he niuklahein (b) 
 qa]': wanrkei]' )'ans mans anakumbjan. i)' eis, at hauja 
 managamma wisaudin in I'amma stada, )?o filusna anakumbjan 
 gatawidedun, fimf ]nisundjos \vaire inuh qinons jali barna. 
 swe at mikilamma ualitamata anakumbjandans wesun'^) at ni 
 ■\visandein *) aljai ^\•aihtai ufar ]'ans fimf hlaibans jah twans 
 fiskans, J'anzei niniands j;vh awiliudouds ga]nu)nda, jah swa nia- 
 nagai ganohjands ins wailawiznai ni ]'atainei ganaiihan )?anrf- 
 tais im fra-(e 50) gaf, ak iilaus niaizo; afar )?atei matida so 
 managei, bigitan was ])izei hlaibe 'ib' tainjons fullos, ]?atei 
 afiifnoda. samaleikoh ]mn jah J?ize fiske, swa f'ilu swe 
 wildedun. nih )?an ana ]'aim hlaibam ainaim seinaizos mah- 
 tais filusna nstaiknida, ak jah in ]>aim fiskani; swa filu auk^) 
 ganianwida ins ^vairj^an, s^vaei ainhaijammeh s^a filu swe ^vilda 
 andnimau is,'') tawida; jah ni in waihtai waninassu jnzai filus- 
 nai wair]?an gafawida. akei (d) nauli us ]?amma iihi mais 
 siponjans funafahida jah an]javans ganiaudida gaumjan, jjatei 
 is was sa sama, saei in au)?idai 'm' jere attans ize fodida. 
 I'annh, bij?e sadai waurj^un, qa}j siponjam seinaini: 
 galisi]? }>os aflifnandeins drausuos, ei waihtai ni fra- 
 qistnai. ]^anuh galefcun jah gafullidedun llr tainjons 
 gabrnko us );aim -e' hlaibam barizeinam jah 'h' fiskani, 
 j^atei afiifnoda at J^aim — 
 
 ') John VI, '.I — l:i accurding to Codex Argenluus: '.1. ist magula aiu.s lier, 
 saoi habai)7 -e' hlaibaus barizeinans jah "b' fiskans; akei j'ata lira ist du 
 swa inanagaimV Id. if" lesns qa]':' waurkeif' I'ans mans anaknnibjaii. 
 wasuli Jpan hawi luauag ana jiamina stada. {'aruli anakiimbidednn wairos 
 ra)?jon swaswe fimf ):'nsundjos. 11. namuli )7an }?ans Idaibans lesus jali 
 awiliudonds gadailida ]5aim anakumbjandam; samaleiko jali )Mze fiske, 
 swa filu swe wildedun. 12. pamih, hVpe sadai A\am-)7un, (|a)7 du siponjam 
 soiuaim: galisi}? )'os aflifnandeins draiihsnos, j^ei wailitai ni fraqistnai. 
 I.'i. fianuli galesun jali gafullidedun 'ib' tainjons gabniko us fimf hlaibam 
 I'aim barizeinam, fiatei afiifnoda, ]>Vi\m niatjandam ^) ains interpolaled 
 by Uppslrdm. ^) wesun interpolated by Vollmer. ") wisandiu MS. 
 •■) swe after auk in MS. e) ist MS. 
 
GLOSS VltY. 
 
 Rem a lies: Verbs compoujulcd "with prefixes and preposiUonal adverbs 
 are given under the simple verbs. — Tlie signs hf, i/, ]■> come immediately 
 
 after /(, k, t respectively, 
 the grammar. 
 
 Aba, m. ('1U'^. u.l) husband, man. 
 Abiabar, pr. n., 'AfiiaO-uQ. 
 Abraham, pr. n., (61, n. 3). 
 af (5G,n.l) prp. w. dat. (217): of, 
 
 from, out of, away from. 
 afar, prp. (217) (U w. dal.: after, 
 
 according to; (2) rv. ace: after 
 
 (only of time), afar f'atei, after 
 
 thai. 
 af-Otja, III. (5b, n. 2), voracious 
 
 cater, glutton. 
 •■ af-haimeis, adj. (127) absent 
 
 (from liaims, home; cf. auahai- 
 
 ineis). 
 af-Iageins, f., a laying aside, re- 
 mission ilk. I. 4 (from lagjan). 
 af-niarzeins, f., offense, deceil- 
 
 fulnes (from marzjan). 
 af-stass, f. (103, n.3), a (standing) 
 
 falling arvay ; afstassais b6k6s, a 
 
 writing of divorcement (from 
 
 statidan). 
 afta adv. (2l3,n. 2), behind. 
 aft ail a, adv. (213, n. 2), from 
 
 behind. 
 aftar6, adv., (211, n.l) behind. 
 aftra, adv., back, again. 
 aftuma (139) and aftumists 
 
 (I39,n.l), sup., the last; aftnmist 
 
 naban, to lie at the point of death 
 
 Mk. V. 23. 
 aggilus, m,. (120,n.l), ayysXoQ, 
 
 angel, messenger. 
 aggwi^'a, f., anguish, distress, 
 
 tribulation. 
 ga-aggwjan, rv. v., to constrain, 
 
 distress. 
 
 The figures enclosed in ( ) refer to the §§ of 
 
 131), narrow. 
 (35. 04), Hire, 
 
 78, 11. 4), lo 
 
 aggwus, adj. (GS; 
 agis, g. aglsis, n. 
 
 fear. 
 us-agian, w. v. (3."). 
 
 frighten utterly. 
 agI6, f., anguish, distress'^ 
 aglus, adj. (131), difjiciiH. 
 Agustus, pr. n. Avynvatoc. 
 aliaks, f? (103,11.2), dove. 
 ahiua, m. (lus), spirit. 
 ahs, n., ear (of corn). 
 alitaii, num. (141), eight. 
 alitati-tSluiud (143) eighty. 
 alituda (140), the eighth. 
 alva, f. (',17), river, stream, water. 
 aibr, n„ an offering ^tlt.Y. 2H. 11 
 
 is undoubtedly a corrupt form 
 
 for tibr (A.-S. tifer, 0. H. G. zcbar, 
 
 sacrifice). 
 aigan, pret.-pr. v. (203), to own, 
 
 have, possess. — Comp. fairailian 
 
 (203). 
 ga-aigiuon, w. v., lo take posses- 
 sion of, lo get an advantage of 
 
 II. Cor. II. 11. 
 illhts, f (20,11.2), property. 
 ailva-tiindi, f. (M),bramble-bush. 
 af-aikan, red. v. (17!)), lo deny. 
 aikklesjo, f., ixxXtjola, church. 
 Aik'isabai]:', pr. re. (23). 
 ailoe (6, n.l) Hwi, my God! 
 aiii-fal^ei, /'., simplicity. 
 aiii-falps, adj. (148), single. 
 ain-lwarjizuh (105, n.l), every 
 
 one. 
 aiii-hra)?ariili (100), each of two. 
 *ainlif, num. (56, n.l; 141) eleven. 
 
106 
 
 ains — anda-neijjs. 
 
 aiiiti, Hiiiii. [IH)), (IIU-. (Dill/, /done. 
 
 ;uns-luin, pni. (Ui-'ic), only in 
 negative sentences: not any, 
 none. 
 
 ;ii i)isk,-u'ijuis, m. {I2u,u.]1, bishop. 
 
 aiijistaiilO (,l2(i.ii.3), intoToh], 
 ej/isl.'e, letter. 
 
 ;'iir, adv. (i\i,\\.\). early (ere']. 
 
 I'l iriiiOm, w. v., to be a messenger. 
 
 i'liris, aile. compar. (212) earlier. 
 
 airizii, compar. nfiav, pliir., living 
 formerly, ancestors. 
 
 ail-pa, /'. (!)■), earth, land. 
 
 airl'cins, adj., of earth, earthen, 
 earthly. 
 
 ilirus. ni. (20, n. 2; lo:::). messenger. 
 
 airzLis, adj. (12b), astray. 
 
 *ais. aiz, n. (7S, n. ] ), ore. 
 
 ail^L'i, /: (ll:)). mother. 
 
 aij's, g. aifiis. m. (91), oath. 
 
 ai|']'au, conj. (2(), D; 7ln.1; 2ls), 
 or; unless, else. 
 
 Aiull', /;;•. u. ((io.n. I). 
 
 ai wagii'OljO, /'., i-vayyl/.ior. 
 
 aiwcius, adj. (124), elernal. 
 
 aiwi.sk i n., shame, dishonest)/ 
 II. Cor. IV. 2. 
 
 aiws, »j. (91,11. 5), time, life-time, 
 cternily, ukov. — Ace. sg., to- 
 gether with the negative particle, 
 is used adverbially, ni aiw (214), 
 never. 
 
 aj u k d 11 )^ s . /: ( 2 1 . II. 2 ; 1 o:j), eternity. 
 
 ak, conj._ (21 s), Init. for. 
 
 Akaija, pr. n., lA/aia. 
 
 akri, conJ. (218), '/>»/, yet. 
 
 a k cits (V 91 11.2), vinegar. 
 
 akran, ;;., fruit. 
 
 aknina-laux, adj., fruitless, un- 
 fruitful :\lk.IV. 19. 
 
 aki-s, m. (91,11.1), field, [acre). 
 
 aqizi, f, <ix. 
 
 alabalstrauii, /; w. (2J,a.o; 46,a.2; 
 12(1,11.2) dXaf!aatQov. 
 
 alau, St. v. (177), to grow up. 
 
 ala-]Jarba, adj. {\32,n.2), poor. 
 
 Albila, pr. n. (54 a. 2). 
 
 aids, f. (73; 74,ii.;j), age. 
 
 aleina, f, ell, cubil Mt. YI. 27. 
 
 alew, /(. (119), oil (Lat. oleum). 
 
 Alfaiiis, pr. re., jiX<palog. 
 
 a His, f. (116), temple. 
 
 alja, conj., except, unless; prep. 
 (217). 
 
 alja-kuns, adj. (130), foreign. 
 
 alja-leikos, adv. (212, n. 2), other- 
 wise. 
 
 aljar. adv. (213,ii. 1), elsewhere. 
 
 alja]', adv. (213,ii.l), in another 
 
 direction. 
 alja))ro , adv. (213,ii. 1), by another 
 
 way, from elsewhere. 
 uljis, adj., another, other. 
 al'lal'i-d, adv. (213, ii. 2), from 
 
 every quarter. Mk. 1. 4J. 
 alli.s, 0) ('■dv. (215), in general, 
 
 whollq, at all; iii — allis, not at 
 
 alt; (2) conj. (always foUowinq 
 
 the word to whicti it belongs), 
 
 for (2 Is). 
 alls, adj. (122, ii. 1), all, whole, 
 
 every. 
 all-wiildauds, m. (I \b), almighty. 
 iis-al|?aii, red. v. (179,u.l), to grow 
 
 old. 
 al)'eis, adj. (12s), old; neut. pi. 
 
 l?o all'jOna (II. Coi. "\'. 17), old 
 
 things. 
 Am aiaborga, pr. n. (."i4,ii.2). 
 .Wualafrigda, pr. n. (3,n.2). 
 amen, afii]v (verily). 
 amsa, m., shoulder. 
 au, interrogative particle (21U) 
 
 (Lat. an, (rcrm. denn?). 
 ana, prep. iv. dat. and ace. (217), 
 
 to, on, upon; in, over; — ana 
 
 I'amiiiei, for that (iip'ui) II. Cur. 
 
 V.4. 
 ana-busn.s, f. (75,u.l), command- 
 ment, command. 
 aua-1'ilh, n., commendation (cf. 
 
 fillian). 
 *ana-liaimois, adj., at home, 
 
 anaks, adv., suddenly. 
 ana-kunuains, /"., a reading, 
 
 avdyrcoaiQ (camp, ana-kunnau). 
 ana-laugniba, adv. (210), secretly. 
 ana-laugns, adj. (130), secret. 
 ana-leik6, adv., in like manner. 
 iis-aiian, st. v. (7S, n.4; 177, n. 1), 
 
 to breathe out. 
 ana-siiinSj adj. (130), visible. — 
 
 adv. anasiuniba (210). 
 aua-stodeins, /'., beginning (cf. 
 
 stOdjan). 
 and, prep. w. ace. (217): denoting 
 
 motion over, along; on, in, 
 
 over, at. 
 anda-beit, (B, andabet A) «., ft/ame 
 
 (comp. aud-beitan). 
 anda-liafts, f., answer, reply; 
 
 sentence II. Cor. I. 9; resolution 
 
 (comp. and-hafjan). 
 anda-nahti, n.. evening. 
 anda-nel))s, adj., hostile, con- 
 
ancla-nSm — azymus. 
 
 107 
 
 (retry; |)ata aiiclauL'i]'6, coiiirari- 
 tvise {cf. ncif', /(., ertvy). 
 
 auda-nfim, w. (a3), a receiving. 
 
 anda-nSms, adj. (33; 13(1), ac- 
 ceptahle, pleasant. 
 
 auda-numts, f. (33), acceptation. 
 
 anda-s6ts, adj. (34; 130), abomi- 
 nable. 
 
 anda-stat'jis, m. (92), an adver- 
 sary. 
 
 auda-staua, an opponent in court. 
 
 aiid-augjO, openly, publicly (and- 
 augi, n., face). 
 
 anda-waiirdi, n., answer. 
 
 anda-wleizu, n. (?), countenance. 
 
 ■d-aA-ha,hti,n.(idb,-a.\Vo/fice, service. 
 
 and-balitjan, m.v. (187), to serve; 
 
 — also with ace. of the tiling, to 
 perform, administer. 
 
 and-bahts, m. (a), servant, minister. 
 aiideis, ?n. (92,n.l), end. 
 and-huloins, /., uncovering, illu- 
 
 minalion Lu. II. 32; revelation 
 
 (comp. and-huljan). 
 audizuh, conj. {il8), otherwise, else. 
 Andraias, g. Andraiins, ace. An- 
 
 draian, pr. n., jivSQcciag. 
 and-wairf'i, n. (95), presence, 
 
 face; in andwairpja, in presence 
 
 of, before. 
 and-wair}'s, adj., present. 
 Anna, pr: re., 'Avva. 
 Annas, pr. n. (3,n.l). 
 *ans, m. (91,n.4), beam. 
 ansteig.s, adj. (124), gracious. 
 ansts, f. (102), favor, grace, joy; 
 
 donation, qifl. 
 aul7ar,ac/;'.(l22,n.l; 12411.1.4; 146), 
 
 another, the second. 
 apaustauIiLS, m. ()20,u. 1), anu- 
 
 azoXoc. apaiistulus (13,n.l). 
 arbaidjan, rv.v, to work. 
 arbaij^s, f. (103), work. 
 arbi, n. (95), inheritance. 
 . arbj a,?H. (108), heir. — arbj6, /'. (112). 
 Ariamirus, pr.n. (61,n.l). 
 Ariaricus, pr. n. (3,n.2). 
 ark-aggilus (57), archangel. 
 arma-liairtit'a, f, mercy. 
 armaio, f., merqy, alms. 
 arman, w. v., to have w.ercy on. 
 
 — Compound ga-arman, Ih. s. 
 arms, m., (i) arm. 
 
 arniba, adv. (130,n.3; 210), surely. 
 arwj6, adv., gratuitously. 
 asans, /'. {W.',), harvest. 
 A ser, pr. n. 'lar/(). 
 Asia, pr. u. f., Asia. 
 
 asilus, m. f. (105), ass (rn. and f.). 
 
 asneis, ni. (92), servant. 
 
 asts, m., (a) branch. 
 
 at, prep. w. dat. and ace. (217): at, 
 by, lo. 1) tvith the dat. when it 
 has reference to place or lo space: 
 at, to by. 2) ?v. ace. when it 
 refers to lime: at, at drnVp, at the 
 feast; w. dat. especially for the 
 sake of emphasis with the dative 
 absolute expressing lime, for 
 example, Mk. IV. G. 35; Lu. II. 2. 
 
 Atbanaildus, pr. n. (05, n. 1). 
 
 Athanarious, pr.n. (3,n.2). 
 
 atisk, n. (()ratisks,m.V), seed, corn- 
 field. 
 
 atta, m. (0!),n. 1; JOS), father. 
 
 Attila, pr.n. (lo8), Jittle father,. 
 
 ajjl^an, conj., (218), but, however, 
 but yet, hut still (always at the 
 beginning of the senlence). 
 
 Auciericus, pr.n. (25, n. 2). 
 
 auft6 (24,n.l ; 211,n.l), adv., per- 
 haps, jirobably, surely. 
 
 angjau, w. v., lo show. — Comp. 
 ataiigjan, //;. s. 
 
 aiiga-daurO, n. (110), window. 
 
 augu, /(. (110), eye. 
 
 auhjOdus (ai'ilijodus?), m., luinult, 
 noise. 
 
 auhjon (aulijOu?), rv.v., to make 
 a noise. 
 
 *ai'ihns, wi. (91,n.2), 02;t;)i Mt. VI.30. 
 
 aulisa, m. (lUS,u.l), ox. 
 
 aubuma (139), higher, aubumists 
 (]39,n. 1), I he highest. 
 
 auk, conj. {immediately following 
 the word with which it is closely 
 connected), for, but. 
 
 aukan, red. v. (179) , to increase. — 
 Compounds (a) ana-aukan, to add. 
 (b) bi-aukan, lo increase, add to. 
 
 Aunisimus, pr. n. (9,n. 1). 
 
 *aura]ii (or aurabjOV, an'?),/'., tomh. 
 
 aurali, n. (5 a.), napkin. 
 
 Ausila, pir. n. (25,n.2). 
 
 auso, n. (110), ear. 
 
 Austrovaldus, pr. n. (25, n. 2). 
 
 aufnda, /'., desert. 
 
 '■'a,\\]>e:U {or ally's 130, n. 2), adj., 
 desert, waste. 
 
 a-vv(3|?i, n., flock of sheep. 
 
 awiliuf' (awiliud), n., thank. 
 
 awiliudon, w. v. (190), to thank. 
 
 awistr, n. {A), sheevfold. 
 
 az6ts, adj., easy, light. 
 
 azgO, f. (1 12), ashes. 
 
 azyiuus (77), wdeaoened bread. 
 
lOS 
 
 Badi — brail's. 
 
 Badi, /(. (ll.i), lu-il. 
 
 li:igm,s. m. (4&.11. 1). ircc {cf. EugL 
 
 hf(im). 
 anfl-balitjan, see aud-b. 
 hai (140,11.1), holh.'- 
 ISaiailzaibul, jir.ii., li^i-'/.'Ci^Un-).. 
 bairan, st. v. (ITJ), fo bear, hrimj, 
 
 carry. — Coinponnds: (a) at-bairau, 
 
 10 bring, carry, offer, (b) ga- 
 
 bairan, to hear [children): lo carry 
 
 loycther, compare Jlk. IV. 3(1. (c^ 
 
 us-bairau, to bear, carry out, 
 
 briny forth {answer). 
 bairgaii, si. r. (ITJ.ii.l), lo hide, 
 
 keep. 
 liairhtaba, <iilv. (2lii), brightly. 
 bairhtri, f., briylihicss. clearness, 
 
 nianifeslation, 11. C'or. W. 1: in 
 
 bairhtein, openly. 
 Iiairlitjaii, w. v., lo brighten, shoto, 
 
 nuDiifest. — Compound ga-bai'rht- 
 
 jau, th. s. 
 biiirlits, adj.. Iiri//lil. 
 baitrs. adj. (2(1, ;i), bitter. 
 baj6)'s (I'lT.ji. I; I 111.11. 1), both. 
 balgs, tii. (lOO), wine-skin. 
 ball'ni, f., boldness (adj. *lial|'s, 
 
 liold). 
 balwjaii. /('.('., lo torment. 
 bandi, /■. ('.li'.), baud, bond. 
 baiidja, in. (^12), prisoner. 
 baiidwa, f. ('.iT,ii. I), sign. 
 baiists, //(. (i). barn. 
 barizriii.s, adj., of barley. 
 barn, n. (33), child. 
 bariiilo, /(. (110). little cliild, 
 
 dear child. 
 liarl'aiilai'imaius. pr. n. (21, n.5), 
 
 Hiiijitohiiii'.Ji}:;. 
 batiza. coinpur. (138), better. 
 li ail a ins, f., a dwelling. 
 baiiail, W.U. (21); I7!l,n.2; I'.I3,11.1), 
 
 lo dwell. — IJompound ga-bauan, 
 
 th. s. 
 liauaiiairgais, Boave(>yeg, a sur- 
 
 nnine of James and John. 
 ut'-bauljan, m. v. (2J,ii.l) lo pujf 
 
 up, blow up. 
 baiir, m. (33; 101, u. 2), son. 
 bai'irgs, f. (1Hi), burgh, town, city. 
 bcidan, if. w. (172,ii. 1) w. g. lo 
 
 expect, lo abide, wait for ; Com- 
 
 poiind iis-beidan w. ace. , lo wait 
 
 patiently. 
 ga-beistjan (lS7,ii.3), to leaven. 
 beitan, st.v. (I72u. 1), to bite. — 
 
 Camp, and -beitan, lo address 
 
 harshly, rebuke, threaten. 
 
 brnisjos (binisjos 7, n. 3), Z'^'""- 
 
 (sing. "bOrn-sois, m.), parenls (33). 
 
 Be|>laliaim (coot/). 01. n. 3). pr. n., 
 
 bi. /)/■/*. (21')) by. (1) «'. ace. (ex- 
 pressing both space and time: 
 tig, at, about, towards; concer- 
 ning, hi sumata, in part. (2) w. 
 dai, by, al, on account of; ac- 
 cording to. 
 
 bid a, f. (il7), rei/uesl, prayer. 
 
 bidjau, st.v. (17G,n.5), to ask, beg, 
 pray (cf. E. bid). 
 
 bindan, st. v. (171), to hind. — 
 Compounds (a) aiid-bindan, lo iin- 
 hiiid. loosen, expound Jlk. IV. 31, 
 (b) ga- bindan, lo hind, tie up. 
 
 bi-sitand.f, m. (115), see sitaii. 
 
 Iji-sunjaiic, adv., about, round 
 about. 
 
 Bi]'auia, pr. n. (9,n. 1). 
 
 bi-l'T', (1) adv., hereafter, then, 
 after ward. (2) conj. (2)8), whilst, 
 when. 
 
 bindan, sl.j\ (170; 173), to offer; 
 only in coiiipou.nds , aiia-biudaii, 
 lo command, instruct, bid. 
 
 bingan, st. v. (173, n.l), to bow, 
 bend. — Compound ga-biugau, 
 th. s. 
 
 binhti, n., custom. 
 
 biu|'s, ?n. (74, n. 2), table. 
 
 blaudan, reil. v. (17!l, a. I), to blend, 
 communicate with. 
 
 bleil^ei, f, pity, mercy. 
 
 lileiljs, adj. (130,n.2'), kiiul. 
 
 uf-blCsan, red. v. (179, n. 1) to 
 blow up. 
 
 bliggwan, st.v., (0^. 174. n.l), to 
 beat (cf E. blow). 
 
 ga-blindjan, w. v,, to blind. 
 
 blinds, adj. (123), blind. 
 
 bloina, m. (108), flower (cf. E. 
 bloom). 
 
 - b 1 o s t r B i s (G9, n. 2) , worshipper 
 (only in guj^bldstreis). 
 
 blolan, red. V. (179,11.1), to wor- 
 ship. 
 
 blood, 
 ion 
 
 bluj', </. bluf-is, n. (94) 
 bn'nau (26; 179,n.2), .„,„„. 
 boka, f, letter; ;>/. bfikos , the 
 
 writings, scriptures, book, letter 
 
 (com,p. afstass). 
 bflkareis, m. (92), scribe. 
 b tj &n,m.v.w. ace, to boot, better, 
 
 help, advantage. 
 braidoi, f. (113), breadth. 
 '■' b r ai 1? s , braids, adj. (74, n. 2) broad. 
 
brakia — dreiban. 
 
 109 
 
 brakja, m. (33,n. 1), slruqgle. 
 in-brannjan, m. v. (SO,n.'.l; 187), 
 
 to set on fire. 
 briggau, an. v. (174, u. 2; 2iiS), /o 
 
 bring, lo guide, lead; to make 
 
 {e. g. wairf'ans briggan , lo make 
 
 worthy). 
 brikan, si. v. (;i3, n. 1; 175,n. 1), to 
 
 break. — Compound ga- brikan, 
 
 to break, break to pieces. 
 brinuan, st. v. (171, u.l), to bum 
 
 (inlr.). — Compound uf-brinnan, 
 
 to burn up. 
 brinno, f., fever. 
 brOtar, m. (114), brother. 
 briikjan, an. v. (15; 209), to want, 
 
 make use of (w. gen.); leilitis 
 
 brfikjaii, to use tightness II. ('or. 
 
 I. 17. 
 us-bruknan, 7V. v. (194), to be 
 
 broken off. 
 brfiks, adj. (15; 13(1), use/ill. 
 brunjO, f. (112), breasl-ptate. 
 bruiina, m., welt, spring, fountain 
 
 Mk. V. 29. 
 -brunsts, f. (49), in ala-bnmsts, 
 
 holocaust. 
 b rusts, f. (ll(j), breast. 
 bru('-fa|'s,^. -ladis, m. (.101), bride- 
 groom. 
 bruj's, f. (15), bride. 
 bugjan, an.v. (209), to huy. 
 and-bundnan, w.v. (194), to be 
 
 unbound, loosened. 
 
 ga-Daban, si. v. (177, n.l), to 
 
 be fit. 
 daddjan, m. v. (73, n.l), to give 
 
 suck to, suckle. 
 Dagalaiphus, pr. n. (21,n. 1; 52). 
 dags, m. (90), day; — daga jab 
 
 daga day by day, daily ; himma 
 
 daga, to-day. 
 Daikapaftlis, dative Daikapaiilein, 
 
 pr. n., dexanoXiq. 
 dailjan, w.v. (188), to deal (out) 
 
 — Compound ga-dailjan, deal, 
 
 distribUfte, divide. 
 dails, /". (103), deal, part, portion. 
 dal, n, (94,11.2), dale, valley. 
 dala}?, adv. (213, n. 2), downward. 
 dalajja, adv. (213,n. 2), below. 
 dala|'r6, adv. (213, ii. 2) /rom be- 
 low, beneath. 
 daiibij^a, f, deafness, hardness 
 
 of heart Mk. III. 5. 
 af-daubnan, w. v., lo become deaf, 
 
 obtuse (com}}, preceding word). 
 
 us-daudjan, w. v., to apply one's 
 
 self (to), to strive {cf us-daups). 
 -daufs. adj. (.'i6, n. 1; 124, n.2), 
 
 deaf. 
 daug, prt.-prs. v. (Mi'i), il is good 
 
 for, fit. 
 dauhtar, f. (114), daughter. 
 daiins, /■., odor, savor II. Cor. 
 
 11.15. 
 daupeiiis, f, baptism. 
 daupjan, m. v., to baptize. — 
 
 daupjands, par tic., m. (115), the 
 
 Baptist. 
 daur, n., door, gate. 
 ga-daiirsan, pr.-prs.v. (199), to 
 
 dare. 
 dau|?oiiis, f, the dying II. Cor. 
 
 IV. 10 (dauj'jan, m. v., to kill. 
 daufinan, w. v. (194), to die. — 
 
 Compound ga-daujinan, the s. 
 dau)?s, g. dauf>is, adj., dead {cf. 
 
 diwan). 
 daiijpus, m. (105), death. 
 Daweid, pr. n., Jlavi'd. 
 deigan, st. v. (172, n.l) to knead. 
 '-'Aeps, deds, /■. (74, n.2; 103), deed; 
 
 only in compounds , comp. missa- 
 
 dg)JS. 
 diabaulus, diabulus (13, n. 1), 
 
 devil. 
 dis-, inseparable pai-ticte before 
 
 verbs, meaning in twain, to piece.'! 
 
 {cf. Lat. dis-, L-ei-m. zer-). 
 diupei, f. (113), depth. 
 diups, adj., deep. 
 dius, g. diuzis, n. (94), beast. 
 diwan, st. v. (176,n.2), to die. |>ata 
 
 diwano that which is mortal, 
 
 mortality II. Cor. V. 4. 
 af-d6jan, w.v., 26; 187), to tire, 
 
 harass. 
 domjan, w. v., to deem, judge 
 
 (d6ms, m., doom, judgment). 
 ga-draban, st. v. (177,n. 1), to hew. 
 dragan, st.v. (177,n.l), lo drag, 
 
 draw. 
 dragk, n. (32), drink. 
 dragkjan, w. v. (188), to give to 
 
 drink. 
 draibjan, w.v., to trouble, vex 
 
 {cf. dreiban). 
 drauhsna (clrausna 62, n. 4), f., 
 
 crumb, fragment. 
 dravihtinassus, m. (105), war- 
 fare. 
 ga-draiisjan, w. v. (188), to cast 
 
 down. 
 dreiban, st. v. (172, n. 1), lo drive. 
 
110 
 
 drigkan — fijands. 
 
 — Compound us-ilreiban (usdrebi 
 10, n. o) lu drive oul, dispel. 
 
 drig-kaii, st. v. (174, n.l), to drink. 
 
 drhigan. sl.v. (17:t,n. 1). lu serve 
 as a soldier. 
 
 driusan. si. p. (173, n.l), io fail 
 (doien). — Compound ga-driusan, 
 to full, be cast. 
 
 drhisO, /". (ill), slope. 
 
 dni.tckanei, /'■ i'M: 113). drunken- 
 ness. 
 
 -drugkja, m. (:'.2), drinker: in 
 W(nnilni,u-kja. 
 
 driis. m. '(k'iI. n. 1, 2). /«,'/. 
 
 du (Jl 7), prp. «'. d. (denoliiiff moliini 
 towiirds), Io. 
 
 -dubo, f. (I-")), see hrahvadubO. 
 
 du-lrc, adv., wherefore, why. 
 
 dul)?s, f. (IKi and ii. 1), feast. 
 
 af-dumbnan, w. v., lo be siill 
 (dumb). 
 
 dumbs, adj., dumb. 
 
 dn-f>0, and duhhe {i. e. dii-h-|Je), 
 adv. and eoiij. [lil. thereto), there- 
 fore. du|'G I'i. for the reason thai, 
 i?i order that. 
 
 d w al s. adj., foolish, dwala. m., fool. 
 
 Ei (1) conj. (21 s), ihal, in. order 
 that; (2) relaf. parliele affixed as \ 
 an enclitic lo pronouns (\bl. ]b^) 
 anil particles with which il forms '■ 
 relatives. [ 
 
 Eila, pr. n. (li.'i. n. 1). 
 
 ails = liaiLs (21. n.l; oi, n. 1). 
 
 I'isaru. n.. iron. j 
 
 oisarnoins, oilj., iron. 1 
 
 oi-tJaii, conj. (21s), therefore. 
 
 Erelicva_, pr. n. (.jl, n. 2). ; 
 
 Ermanarii'us, pr. n. (2li. n. 3). 
 
 Ermenberga, pr. n. (2(i. u. 3). 
 
 Esat'ias, dal. Esai'in, pr. n. , 
 ''Haai'ag. 
 
 Fadar, m. (114), father. 
 fadrein, n. (94, n. 4), paternity, 
 
 parents. 
 fadreins, f. (103), family (lineage). 
 faginon, 7V. v. (BB, n. 1; 190) to 
 
 rejoice. 
 fagrs, adj., suitable, fair. 
 faiian, red. v. (ob; 17li), to catch. 
 fahefis (faheds), f. (103), joy. [ace. 
 
 faheid 7, n. 2). 
 ga-faili6n, 7V. v., io take, gel an 
 
 advantage of II. Cor. II. 11, gloss. 
 faihu, n. (lOU), (cattle), pro per ly, 
 
 money [cf. K. fee). 
 
 *falliu-Jn'a'ihns (?«., or falbu- 
 
 ^railin. a. V). riches, wealth. 
 fair-, inseparable particle, having 
 
 the same force as Germ. rer-. 
 
 enh, er-. 
 fairgiuii, /;. (Dj), mountain. 
 fairlvus, m. (lOo), world. 
 fairina, f.. cause, accusation. 
 I'airnois, adj. (I2S), old. 
 fairra, adv. (213, n. 2), far; w. dal.. 
 
 away, away from. 
 fairra|'r6, ado. (213, n. 2), from 
 
 afar. 
 falfian, red. v. (17;i). to fold. 
 -fal]:'S, adj. (14S), -fold. 
 fana, )/(., a small piece of cloth, a 
 
 patch Mk.ll. 21. 
 EanuSl, pr. n., <I>avov)jX. 
 faran, sl.v. (177, n.l), to fare, go. 
 Faroisaiiis, ?n., (paQiaaZoq, Pha- 
 risee. 
 fastan, iv. v., to hold fast, keep, 
 
 observe; lo fast. — Compound. 
 
 ga-fastan, to hold fast. 
 fastubni, n., observance, fasting. 
 faur, prp. w. ace. (217), before, 
 
 first, along ; for, for the sake of, 
 
 concerning. 
 fai'ira (1) adv., before, in front. 
 
 (Tj prp. with dal. (217), before. 
 faura-gaggja, m. ((.)!, n.l),steward. 
 fanr-liah, n. (ob), curtain (cf. 
 
 lialian). 
 faurhtei, f, fear. 
 faurhtjan, 7U. v. (iss), /o fear, to 
 
 be afraid. 
 faurhts, adj., fearful. 
 fai'ir-lagoins, /"., a laying before. 
 
 hlaibos faurlageinais, show-bread 
 
 Mk. II. 26 (cf lagjan). 
 faur-]? is, adv., first, beforehand, 
 
 formerly. 
 faur-]7iz-ei (faurfazS), co/ij. (21^;), 
 
 before. 
 *faus, adj. (124,n.3) few, a little. 
 in-feinan, w.v., io be moved with 
 
 compassion Mk.I. 41, to pity. 
 fSra, f. (S), country, side. 
 fidur-, num., four (in compounds, 
 
 141, n.l). 
 fidur-fal)7s (148), fourfold. 
 fidwOr, num. (141), four, fidwOr- 
 
 taihuu (141), fourteen. fidwOr 
 
 tigjus (142) forty. 
 figgrs, m., finger. 
 f ij an (fian, 1 0, n.4), w.v.(\ 93), to hale. 
 fijands, fiands, parlic. subsl. (Wj), 
 
 m., enemy. 
 
fillian — fuUo, 
 
 m 
 
 fillian, si. V. (174, n.1), In hide, 
 conceal, hury. — Compound ana- 
 filhan, (0 deliver up, liand down, 
 commend. 
 
 Filippus, pr. n., 'PilinTtoc. 
 
 -fill, «., skin, hide {in )'rnts-fill). 
 
 filleins, adj., leathern. 
 
 fihi, adj. {neiil), much, very [also 
 used adverbially); — filn mana- 
 geins, much people ; Ivan filu, hotv 
 great Mt. VI. 23; — rv. compar , 
 filu mais, much more, und filu 
 mais, much more; ivUh compar. 
 also in the gen. , filaus, much 
 [litteratly of mucli) , filaus maizS, 
 sometliing much greater {literally 
 of much more) Skeir. 49. 
 
 filusna, /"., abundance multitude. 
 
 filu-waurdei, /., much speaking. 
 
 filu-waiircljau, w. v., to use many 
 words. " 
 
 fimf, num. (141), five; firaftaihun 
 (141), fifUen; fimf tigjus (142), fifty. 
 
 fimfta-taihunda, ord.numb. (14B), 
 the fifteenth. 
 
 fin]?an, St. v. (174, n.l), to find, to 
 find out. 
 
 fiskja, m. (107), fisher. 
 
 fiskSn, w.v. (190), to fish. 
 
 fisks, m. (91), fish. 
 
 fitan, St. V. (?17C,n.l), to travail 
 {in birth), bear. 
 
 fl6dus (105), flood. 
 
 fl6kan, red. v. (179 and n. 4), to 
 lament. 
 
 fodeins, f., food. 
 
 f6djan, rv. v., to feed, bring up. 
 
 f6n, g. funins (118), fire. 
 
 fotu-baurd, n., foot-board, foot- 
 stool. 
 
 fotus, m. (105), foot. 
 
 fra-gifts, f., promise, espousal 
 Lu. II. 5. 
 
 frailinan, st.v. (176,_n.4), to ask. 
 — Compound ga-frailinau, to find 
 out by asking, hear (cf. A-S. 
 gefricgean with the same meaning). 
 
 fraisan, red. v. (179), to tempt. 
 
 fraistubni, f. (98), temptation. 
 
 fraiw, H. (94,11.1), seed. 
 
 fra-lets, m. {or fral§t, n. ?) re- 
 mission , forgiveness. 
 
 fra-hists, f (103), lost. 
 
 fram, prep. 7V. d. (217) (1) with re- 
 ference to space; from, away 
 or distant from; (2) referring to 
 time, since; 3) tropically, of, on 
 the part of; with, of, for. 
 
 fraiTi-aldr.s, adj., very old. 
 
 framis, adv. compar. (212),- fur- 
 ther, onward. 
 
 fram-wigis, adv. (214), conli- 
 nually. 
 
 fra)^i, 1). (74, u. 3), undersUmding, 
 mind II. Cor. III. 14. 
 
 fra)>jan, st.v. (177, n.2), to under- 
 stand, know, perceive, io he sen- 
 sible. — Comp. fullafraj'jan. 
 
 franja, m. (1,n.4), lord, master. 
 
 fraujinun, w. v. (190), to be master, 
 io rule; fraujinonds, m. (1 !•")). 
 
 fra-waurhts/ a'lj. sinful; subst., 
 m., sinner. 
 
 fra-waurhts, f, sin. 
 
 fra-weitands. m. (115), s. -weitan. 
 
 freidjan, w. v., to spare. 
 
 froi-hals, m. (91,u.4), freedom. 
 
 freis, adj. (126,n.2), free. 
 
 frijaf>«'a, frial^wa, /'. (I0,n.4), love. 
 
 frijon (1(1,11.4; 190) w. v., to love. 
 
 frijoiidi, f (98), friend (fein.). 
 
 frijQnds, partic, m. (115) friend. 
 
 fri-sahts, f. image, example. 
 
 ga-frisahtjan, w.v., to make an 
 image, engrave II. Cor. III. 7. 
 
 ga-frif'on, w. v., to reconcile. 
 
 frius, n., cold, frost. 
 
 frodei, /. (74, n. 3; 113), under- 
 standing, prudence, judicious- 
 ness. 
 
 fro]?s, adj. (35; 124, n.2), prudent, 
 wise. 
 
 fruma and frumists, superl. (139 
 ands,.\) the first (^146); fnimist, 
 adv. (212,n. 3), first. 
 
 fruma-baur, m. (101, n.2), a first- 
 born. 
 
 fugls, m. (91), fowl, bird. 
 
 fulgins, adj. (t)6,n. 1), hidden. 
 
 fulhsni, n., that which is hidden,. 
 
 fulla-fahjan, w.v., to satisfy. 
 
 fulla-fra[?jan, st. v., to have a 
 sound understanding , in he sober 
 II. Cor. V. 13. ~ Comp. fraj^jan. 
 
 fulla-tdjis, adj., perfect. 
 
 fulla-weisjan, w.v., to convince. 
 
 fulleif's (103,11.2), fullness. 
 
 fuUjan, IV. v., to fill. — Compounds 
 (a) gafulljan, to fill out, (b) us- 
 fulljan, to fill out, fulfill. 
 
 fiillnan, fulnan (SO), w. v. (lo.'i). 
 to become full, be fulfilled. — 
 Compounds (a) ga-fuUnan, to be 
 filled up, to fill up. (b) us-fuUuan 
 to be fulfilled. 
 
 fullo, f,' fullness , a filling up. 
 
112 
 
 fulls — ga-)?liiilits. 
 
 fulls, iidj. (122.11.1), fu/l. 
 ffils. adj. (15). foul. 
 
 (la-, iu.separah/e particle prefixed 
 If) verbs, substantives , and ad- \ 
 jectivex. j 
 
 ga-baur. w. (!i].n.4). u festive 
 meat. 
 
 -■a-liaiir)>s. f. \W.\). birth. 
 
 galifi, f. ['■'•X). riclies. 
 
 iva-liinila, [M). hand, bond. 
 
 (ialiriel, ;//■. n. ((i). 
 
 i;-a-bruka. f. (:i:i.ii.1), a hralwn 
 bit. frrif/mint. 
 
 ji'a-buudi, f. {'■'•2). bond. 
 
 j;'a-ilaila. ;«., purl<i.her. 
 
 (laddaronus. /)/■. n., Val)a(>iivo^. 
 
 *fi-a-cl6fs. rtr// (.M;, n. li l:t(). n.'2). 
 //(. fittinrj. 
 
 i;'a-falis, m. (5li). calcli. haul. 
 
 sa-f;Vurs. ndj.{\'.W). weU behaved. 
 
 S'a-fri|;ons. f, reciiiiciliiilii>ii (cf. 
 ga-frif'on). 
 
 .i;'aggan, aJt. r. (17!). n.S; 207). to 
 go, malic, come. — I'ompoitnds: 
 (a) af-gaggan to gn away., (b) 
 afar-gaggan, to ijo after, to foUorv 
 (after), (e) at-gaggaii, to go to, 
 come, flu atgaggan, inn atgaggan, 
 th.s. (d) ga-gaggan, to come to- 
 gether, assemble, (e) l^airh-gaggan, 
 'to go through, (t) us-gaggan, to 
 go out, come out; to go up, 
 go uiraij. 
 
 i;'a-grCfts, f., decree, command. 
 
 ga-gudei, f. (113,n.2), piety. 
 
 ga-liahjo, adv. (tIi) connectedly. 
 
 ga-hait, /(., promise. 
 
 ga-hraincins, /"., " cleansing \ 
 (brainjan). 
 
 -galits, f. (oil) a going (only in 
 compounds). i 
 
 ga-hugds, /. (S],n.l; 103). wnrftr- j 
 standing, mind. 
 
 ga-k'eilains, f., a slaying for a 
 while, ?'tf5<(hjeilan, w. v., to cease). 
 
 (Jaiainna, m., yfevva, Gehenna. 
 
 gallj an , iv. v., to make glad. 
 
 Gaina, pr. u. (21,u. 1; 6.5, n.l). 
 
 Gainnesarai^, pr. n. (23). 
 
 g air da, f., girdle. 
 
 bi-galrdan, si. v. (174, n.1). to 
 begird. 
 
 gairnjan, w. v., to yearn for, 
 desire. 
 
 giliru, )(. {20,n.2; 106), sting. 
 
 us-gaisjan, w. v., lit make aghast, 
 to distract. 
 
 ga-juk, n., a pair (comp. jnk). 
 
 ga-juk6, f. parable. 
 
 ga-j nk6, /(. ( 1 M). yoke-follow, cnm- 
 jianion. 
 
 ga-kusts. /■. (lo:(), trial, test. 
 
 ga-i|iss, iidj. (124, n.l), consenting- 
 
 ga-qumfis, f. ussembly, meeting. 
 
 ga-laista, m. , a follower, coiii- 
 panioii. 
 
 ga-huibcins, /; (31; 103. n. I), 
 belief. 
 
 "ga-laufs, Iidj. (56, n. 1), precious, 
 costly. 
 
 ga-l('i'k."i, aito. (211), like. 
 
 (>alellaia, g. Ualcilaias, d. (lalei- 
 laia, ace. (Taleilaian. pr. n. f., 
 ViO.ihda. 
 
 ga-ligri. «. (O.'i), consummation of 
 niiirriage. 
 
 i;'a-liug, /(., lie. galiug taujan, to,' 
 falsify. 
 
 gamaindufis, f. (103), fellowship, 
 communion. 
 
 ga-mains, adj. (130'), common. 
 
 *ga-mait's, «(//. (74n.2), maimed. 
 
 ga-mSleins, f., a writing, the 
 scripture (cf. mSljanJ. 
 
 ga-nauba, m.. sufficiency (st^tf ga- 
 nahl. 
 
 ga-nists, f. (34; 103), salvation. 
 
 ga-uifijis, m., kinsman. 
 
 ga-n61is, adj. (122, n.l), enough. 
 
 ga-raihtei, f., justice, righteous- 
 ness. 
 
 ga-raibts, adj., righteous, just. 
 
 =''ga-rail:'s, adj. (74,a.2), com- 
 manded, fixed, ready. 
 
 gards, m. (101), yard, house, do- 
 mestic concerns, family. 
 
 ♦ga-rlul^s, adj. i74,n.'2), honest, 
 honorable. 
 
 ga-rnni, n, (%h), counsel (cf.mna). 
 
 ga-runs, f. (103, n. 3), street. 
 
 ga-sin):»ja, m., travelling com- 
 panion. 
 
 ga-skafts, f. (51, n. 2; 103), crea- 
 tion, creature (a shaping) (see 
 gaskapjan). 
 
 gastSj m. (101), guest. 
 
 ga-taura, m., a rent (see ga-tairan). 
 
 ga-taurf's, f. (103), destruction. 
 
 ga-t6miba, adv. (33; 103, n. 3; 210). 
 
 ga-timrjo, f., a building {t\mx]3.n, 
 w. v., to build (timber)). 
 
 gatw6, /■.-(112), street, lane. 
 
 gs.-]>f>.\\xhs,adj.(b^,u.^)temperate. 
 
 ga-filaihts, f, consolation, com- 
 fort, (see ga-)7laihan). 
 
ga-Jrafsteins — h aitan. 
 
 113 
 
 ga-Jjrafsteins, f., consolation 
 {see ga-Vrafstjan). 
 
 ga-]jrask, n. (32), t/ireshmg-floor. 
 
 gaumjau, tv.v., lo see, perceive. 
 
 gaurjan, rv. v., lo makesorry, to 
 grieve. 
 
 gaurs, adj.(2i,n.'S),sorromful,sad. 
 
 ga-wair}?!, u. (!l5,n.:!), peace. 
 
 ga- waurki, n. (95), 9V09-k, business. 
 
 ga-wai'irstwa, m., a fellorv- 
 worker. 
 
 gawi, n. (95), district, region, pro- 
 vince. 
 
 ga-wiss, f., juncture, joint, con- 
 nection. 
 
 gazds, m., sting. 
 
 ns-geisuaii, w. v., lo be amazed. 
 
 Gelinier, pr. n. (6,n.2). 
 
 giba, /■. (96), .9;/t 
 
 giban, s<. «;. (56,ii. 1; 176), to give. 
 — Compounds (a) at -giban, to 
 deliver Mt. V. 25, to give over, 
 lo give Mk. IV. 11. (b) fra-giban, 
 to forgive, grant, (c) us-giban, 
 to give away, restore, pay, re- 
 ward. — gibands, m. (115), giver. 
 
 -gifts, f. (56,n.4), gift, in fragifts. 
 
 -gildan, sl.v. (174,n.l), to pay 
 [yield) (only in cotnj)ounds). 
 
 gilstr, n. (7'5,n. 1), tribute. 
 
 gilstra-meleins, f., assessment. 
 
 gilfia, /., sickle. 
 
 dii-ginnan, st.v.(\li,n.\\ to begin. 
 
 Grisaleicus, pr.n. (21,n.l). 
 
 gistra-dagis*), adv. (214), lo- 
 morrow. 
 
 bi-gitan, si. v. (17li,n.l), lo find, 
 meet, get. 
 
 giutan, si. v. (173, n.l), lo pour 
 [cf. E. gush). 
 
 glaggw&, adv. (211), carefully, 
 accurately. 
 
 glaggwuba, arfw. (210), accurately. 
 
 *glaggwus, adj. (tiS; 131, n.2). 
 
 glitmunjan, w. ?;. (187), to glitter. 
 
 g6]?s, g. g6dis,«rf7. (124,11.2; 138), 
 good, able. 
 
 g61jan, w. v., lo salute, greet, 
 welcome. 
 
 graba, f. (35), ditch (cf. grave). 
 
 graban, sl.v. (56,ul ; 177,n. 1), lo 
 grave, dig. — Compounds (a) uf- 
 graban, to dig up. (b) us-graban, 
 to dig out. 
 
 gras, g. grasis, n. (94), grass, herb. 
 
 gredags, adj., greedy, hungry. 
 greipan, st. v. (172) to gripe, seize. 
 
 — Compounds (a) fair-greipau, to 
 take hold of, seize, (b) undgreipan, 
 
 III. s. 
 grStan, red. v. (ISl), to weep. 
 grets, m. (101, n.l), weeping. 
 *gril:'s, /■. (74,11.2), step, degree. 
 grOba, /; (35), hole, cave. 
 gnda-faurhts, adj., God-fearing, 
 
 devout Lii. II. 25. 
 gudja, m., priest. 
 gulf', n. (94), gold. 
 guma, m. (107), man. 
 g u m a - k u n d s , adj., male. 
 (jumundus, pr.n. (65,n.l). 
 us-giitnan, w. v. , to be poured, 
 
 gushed out, to flow out. 
 gu]7, m. (In. 4; 94), God. 
 
 Haban, w. v. (192), lo have, hold, 
 habai)? wisan at, to be kept (be 
 wailing, ready Mk. III. 9). aftumist 
 haban, to lie at the point of death 
 (lit. lo have the last); with adv., 
 to be, as ubilaba haban, to be ill, 
 sick; mais wairs haban, to be 
 worse. — Compounds (a) dis- 
 haban, to seize, constrain, (b) 
 ga- haban, to have, hold fast, 
 catch. 
 
 hafjan, st.v. (177, n.2), lo heave. 
 
 — Compounds (a) and-hatjan, to 
 answer, b) us-hafjan, to heave or 
 (ake up, lift. 
 
 ufar-hafnan, w. v. (35), lo exalt 
 
 one's self. 
 hahan, red. v. (5b.; 179), to hang. 
 Haibraiiis, pr. n. (23; 61). 
 haihs, adj. (20,n.2), one-eyed. 
 hailjan, 7V. v. (188), to heal. — 
 
 Compound ga-hailjan, th. s. 
 ga-hailnan, w. v. (\^i), lobe healed. 
 hails, adj. (124), whole, hale, 
 
 sound. 
 haims, /'. (103, n. 4), village, country 
 
 town,. 
 hairaisis (23), heresy. 
 hair da, f., hei-d, flock. 
 hairdeis, m. (90), herd, shepherd. 
 hairto, n. (109), heart. 
 hairus, w. (105), sword. 
 haitan, red. v. (170; 179), to name, 
 
 passive, to be called, call, invite, 
 
 bid, command. — Compounds 
 
 *) Probably an error owing lo Ihe translator, Ulfilas; the Gothic 
 word for jnorrow , is afardags. 
 
 Uvaaue, Goth, grammar. 
 
114 
 
 haifii — horiuon. 
 
 (a) ana-haitau , to call on, upon 
 
 b) and-haitan w. dal. to confess 
 
 publicly, praise, c) at-haitan, lo 
 
 call to (unto) one 
 liai|7i, f. (9S), heath, field. 
 haij^iwisks, adj. (124), mild 
 ha lb a, f., the half, part; in yizdX 
 
 halbai, in this respect. 
 halbs, adj. (122,ti. 1), half. 
 baldan, red. v. (179), lo feed, keep 
 
 (liold). 1 
 
 haldis adv. (212), more. < 
 
 balja, /'. (!)7,n. 1), hell. \ 
 
 hals, m. (Hl,n.4), neck. 
 ham Is, adj. (h'.i), maimed. 
 hamon, iv. v. only in compounds 
 
 (a) af-hamon , 1 1 strip of clothes, 
 
 divest, (b) ana-hamOn, to put on 
 
 clothes. (0) iifar-hamoii m. d., to 
 
 put on clothes over, to be clothed 
 
 upon II. Cor. V. 2. 
 ban a, m. (lOS), cock. 
 handugei, f., wisdom (haiidiness). 
 bandugs, adj. (124), 7vise. 
 bandus, f. (105), hand. 
 bans a, /. (97), coinpany, band of 
 
 men. 
 barduba, adv. ('iiO and n.\) hard. 
 bardu-hairtei, f. (ll.'i), hard- 
 
 hearledness. 
 bardus, adj. (131), hard. 
 barjis, ?«. (90), army, multitude. 
 batis, n. (94««(in.5), hatred. 
 batizOn, w. v. (78), to hale. 
 batjan («/trf hatan 193 n.1), w.v., 
 
 to hale. 
 baubi}^ n. (93), head. 
 bauhei, f. (113, n.l), heiylil. 
 hi'iubeins, f. (103,n. I), a raising 
 
 on high, glory. 
 bauhis, aclv. (212), higher. 
 bauhisti, x. that which is highest. 
 ha uhlan, w, v. (ISS), lo raise on 
 
 high, glorify. 
 bauhs, adj. high. 
 bauns, adj. (130,n.2), low, base. 
 haurds, f, door. 
 haiirn, n. (94), horn. 
 haiirnja, m. (108), hornblomer. 
 haiirnjan, w. v. (1S7), to blow a 
 
 horn. 
 hausjan, 7V. v. (187), rarely baus- 
 
 jon, 7V. V. (187, n. 3), to hear, listen. 
 
 — Compounds (a) and-bausjan to 
 
 hear, grant. (1)) ga-bausjan, lo 
 
 hear, (c) uf-hausjau w. d., to obey. 
 
 ut'hausjaiids, obedient, subject. 
 Ii:i\vl, )!., buy, grass 
 
 haze ins, /. praise. 
 
 hazjau, w. v. (187), lo jiraise. 
 
 her, adv. (S; 213,n. 1) /«''V, Intlier. 
 
 Herodi;s, pr. 7t. ((il). , 
 
 HGrodianus, ?«. 'HqcuSmvoq, o 
 Herodian. 
 
 liS])jo, f., chamber. 
 
 hidrS, adv. (213,n. 1), hither. 
 
 Ilildcricus, ;«■. n. (tjla.l). 
 
 Ilildibald, pr. n. (54n.2; tiln.l). 
 
 bilpan, st. v. (174, n.l), to help. 
 
 bimina-kuiids, adj., heavenly. 
 
 himins, 7n. (91), heaven. 
 
 hiinma, hina, bita (155), forms 
 of a defective pron., this. — 
 himma daga, to-day, und liina dag, 
 unlit to-day. 
 
 bindana, adv. 7V. gen., behind, 
 beyond. 
 
 bindnmists, sup. (149,n.l) hind- 
 most, uttermost. 
 
 -hin]:'an, st. v. (174,n.l) to catch 
 (only in compounds). 
 
 hindar, prep. w. d. a7id ace. (217), 
 behind, on that side of, beyond. 
 
 hirl, inter jeclional imperative 
 (21) n.l; 219), come here! 
 
 biufan st. v. (173, n.l) to la77ient. 
 
 biubma, m. (fi2,n. 4), crowd, multi- 
 tude. 
 
 hlahjan, st. v. (177n.2), to laugh. 
 
 — Compound bi-hlahian, to 
 lau^h at. 
 
 hiaits, g. blaibis, m. (5G,n. 1; 90), 
 
 bread, (cf E. loaf). 
 hlaiw, 71. (42), grave. 
 af-bla]:'an, st. v. (i77,n. 1), to load. 
 iis-blaupaii, red. v. (179,n. 1), to 
 
 leap up. 
 lileiduma, superl. (139), left. — 
 
 subst f, the left hand. 
 blei}-'ra, /'., hut, lent. 
 blifan, st. v. (17(i,n. 1), to steal. 
 bliiima, m. (luS), hea7-i7ig. 
 blntrei,/;, and \^\vAri\>&l,f.,p7l,7•ity, 
 
 since7-ily. 
 blutrs, adj. (15), pure. 
 bnaiwjan, w. v. (187), to abase, 
 
 cast dow7i. 
 hnaiws, adj., low, humble. 
 hnasqus, adj. (131, n.l), soft. 
 dls-hniupan, st. v. (173,n.l), to 
 
 tear lo pieces. 
 hneiwan, st.v. (172,n.l), to bend 
 
 downwards , bow, decline. 
 
 Compound ana-lmeivvan, th. s. 
 borinun, 7V. v., lo cummiL adulleru. 
 
 — Ciinipou}id ga-horinuii, ih. »-.' 
 
h6rs — in. 
 
 115 
 
 hOrs, m., rohoremonger. 
 hraineins, f., purificalion. 
 hrainjan, w.v. (1S7), to cleanse. 
 
 — Compound ga-lirainjau, th. s. 
 brains, adj. (130), pure, dean. 
 liraiwa-dubo, f., turtle-dove. 
 hr6pjan, rv.v., to call, cry out. 
 
 Compound uf-hr6pjan, //(. s. 
 lirOt, n., roof. 
 hrdl'eigs, adj , victorious. 
 hrukjan, n>. v. (15), to crow. 
 huggrjan, w. v. (6(i, n. 1), to 
 
 hunger. ' 
 hiigjan, W.V., to think, mean. 
 huE'rus, »?. (15; Gl'),ii.l; 105), /m/iiyt'r. 
 hulistr, n., veil, covering. 
 liuljan, rv.v. (1S7), to cover, veil. 
 
 — Compounds (a) aiid-huljan, lo 
 uncover, reveal, (b) gsi-]niljan to 
 cover, veil. 
 
 -bun, enclilic (Hi:)), any. 
 
 bund, n. (144), a hundred. 
 
 bun si, n., sacrifice {cf. E. housel). 
 
 bunsla-stafis, m. (i), place of 
 offering, altar. 
 
 bups, m. (i), hip. 
 
 -hfls, n. (15), house {in gud-bus). 
 
 biizd, n., a treasure. 
 
 huzdjan, n>. v., to heap up trea- 
 sure. 
 
 hjairban, st. v. (174, n.l), to walk, 
 
 wander. 
 Ivairnei, /. (113), skull. 
 luaiteis, m. (92), wheat. 
 hraiwa, adv. and conj. (218), 
 
 how, as. 
 hran, adv. (214^n. 1), when? at any 
 
 time, perhaps (-ibai h;an, lest); 
 
 before adv. and adj., how; hran 
 
 filu, how much. 
 af-hrapjan, w.v., to choke. 
 at-hrapnan, w. v. intr. , to be 
 
 choked. 
 bjar, adv. (2 13, n.l), where. 
 hjarbOn, w. v. (190), to go about, 
 
 walk {cf. luairban). 
 hrarjis, pron. (160), which'' 
 Iwarjiz-ub, pron. (147,n.l; 165), 
 
 every, each. 
 luas, vron. (159) intcrrog., who? 
 
 indefin. (162, u. 2), any one, some- 
 body. — neut. bra what? why? ; 
 
 instrumental case IvS, wherewith? 
 
 in what? how much Mt. V. 47? 
 
 to what? 
 hras-bun, pron. (1113), any one, 
 
 some one. 
 
 Iw a s s e i , /'. , severity. 
 
 bra)', adv. (213,n.l), whither. 
 
 luafar, pron. (124, n.l. 4; 100), 
 
 which of two ? 
 lva)?ar-uh, pron.{\ii&), eachoftwo. 
 Iva|?r6, adv. (213, n.l), whence. 
 Ivaz-nb, pron. (147 n. 1 ; 154), each, 
 
 every. 
 lueila, f. (97), while, time, hour. 
 
 —■ hreilohun (y7,n.2; 163, n.l). 
 hjeila.-hrairbs, adj., lasting only 
 
 for a while, trajisitory, incon- 
 stant. 
 lueits, adj., white. 
 IvSlaul^s, adj. (161), what, how 
 
 great. 
 brileiks, adj. (161), what sort of 
 
 a, what kind of a. 
 b/6ftuli, f. (51 a. 2; 98), boasting, 
 
 glory. 
 Ivopan, red. v. (179), to boast. 
 hrotjan and compound ga-hj6tjan, 
 
 w. v., to threaten (Ivota, f, threat). 
 
 lairusalem, f. '^TsQovaaXijfi, and 
 lairusaiilyma, f. %Qoa6Xv/xa Jeru- 
 salem. 
 
 lairusaiilymeis, plur., Jerusa- 
 lem; also the inhabitants of Je- 
 rusalem. 
 
 lakob, pr. n. (54). 
 
 lakObus, pr.n., g. lakdbaus a«rf 
 lakobis 'Idxw^oq. 
 
 lared, pr. n. (6). 
 
 laurdanes, pr. n. 'lo^ddv^g and 
 laiirdanus 'lo^davog pr. n., the 
 river Jordan. 
 
 ibai, iba (1) interr. particle (216): 
 if, perhaps , perchance. (2) conj. 
 (218), that not, lest. 
 
 ibnassus, m., (105), evenness, 
 equality. 
 
 ibns, adj., even, flat. 
 
 iddja, (73 n.; 207), see gaggan. 
 
 idreiga, f., repentance, penance. 
 
 idreigSn, w. v. (190), to repent, 
 do penance. 
 
 Idumaia, pr. n. f., 'Idovfiaia. 
 
 lesus, g. lesnis, d. lesua, a. ISsu., 
 pr. n. (l,n.4) Irjaovq. 
 
 iftuma, sup. (139), the following, 
 next. 
 
 ili, pron. (150), 1. 
 
 im, an. v. (204), see wisan. 
 
 In, prep. (217), (1) w. gen., on ac- 
 count of, through, by. in ]pis, 
 in-ub I'iz, on this account, there- 
 fore; in ('iz-ei, for the reason 
 
116 
 
 inkil)>o • 
 
 knustan. 
 
 that, because; therefore. — (2) iv. | 
 dal. and ace., in, at, on, lo , lo- \ 
 wards, etc. , iin I'amiua, in that; | 
 in l^ammei, for that because, since. ' 
 
 iii-kil)?6, f., adj. (i:i-2,ii.2), preg- 
 nant (cf. kiljiei). 
 
 iWTX, adv. (213,n.2), in. ll'ilh verbs 
 its force is often 7veakencd , for 
 example, inn gaggan Mk. I. 9, in 
 go forward. 
 
 iuna, adv. (213,ii.2), ivithin. 
 
 innana«?irfinnal'rO, uili\ (2i:i,n.2), 
 within. 
 
 innuma, super!. (l:ilt)i '''" inner, 
 innermost. 
 
 inuli, prp. w. ace. (217). witlionl. 
 
 in-winds, adj., unjust. 
 
 lodas, pr. n. s (1 l,n.2). 
 
 lohannes, pr. n. (Bl,n. I) 'Ivjarrijg. 
 
 I6sef, pr. n, 'iwai'jcp. 
 
 is, proa. (Ii2), he. 
 
 IskariStes, pr. n., 'laxaQnoxiK. 
 
 IsraSl, pr. n., 'loQaijX. 
 
 Israeleites, pr.n. (I20,n.2). 
 
 itan, si. V. ()Tt),n..'l), lo eat. — Com- 
 pound fra-itan, lo eat up, devour. 
 
 it', conj. (218) (always preceding 
 the ftrsl word of the sentence) 
 (1) but, now, thus, (2) if. 
 
 ludaia, pr. n., 'lovSaia. 
 
 ludaia-land, «., the couninj of 
 Judaea. 
 
 ludas, Judas, ace. Indan, pr. n., 
 'lovSaq. 
 
 iup, adv. (213, u. 2) up, upwards. 
 
 iupa, adv. (2i;5,n. 2), above. 
 
 iiipana, and iupalrO, advs. 
 (2)3, n. 2) from above. 
 
 iz-ei \vz,Q)pron. (157, n. 3), he who, 
 he that. 
 
 izwar, pron. (124, n.1. 4 ; 151 ), your. 
 
 Ja, jai, adv. (216), yes. 
 
 jabai, conj. (218), if, jabai — 
 aif'f'au, either — or. 
 
 Jaeirus, pr. n., 'laeiQoq. 
 
 jak, conj. (217), and, also, jak — 
 jak, both — and. — For assimi- 
 lation of h, see 62, n. 3. 
 
 jainar, adv. (2)3,n. 1), there. 
 
 jaind, jaindrO, advs. (213, n.l), 
 there, thither icf E. yonder). 
 
 ]j\,ins,pron. (156), that (cf. E. yon). 
 
 jainfrO, adv. (213,n. 1), from that 
 place, thence. I 
 
 jaf" I'g, conj. (21S), and if, jaf'f'e — 
 jajj)'e, be it that — or that, either — 
 ur; it matters not, whether — or. 
 
 jau, adv. (216), whether, if. 
 
 )Sr, n. (94), year. 
 
 iota, ni. iiHra. 
 
 "in, adv. (214,u.l), already, now. 
 
 juggs, (.124), adj.. ijoung, fresh. 
 
 new. — compar. jfikiza (1>; "i'; 
 
 n. I; 135, n.l). 
 juK , )(. (04), yoke. 
 jii-|)an, rtrfi). ,«/;■(■«(///, ,iii|iini n\ no 
 
 more Mk. I. 45. 
 
 Kafarnaum, pr. n., Kcinr-Qraovn. 
 
 kaisar, m. (ill,n.4; llil), naioait. 
 
 Kajafa, jn: n. (52). 
 
 kalbO, /"., ca/f. 
 
 kalds, adj., cold. 
 
 lialkinassus, m., fornication, 
 
 adultery. 
 Kananeites, vn., Kavavkijc. 
 kannjan, w.v., lo make known, 
 
 announce. — Compounds (a) ga- 
 
 kannjan, th. s. (b) us -kannjan, 
 
 to make known, commend {cf. 
 
 Icunnan). 
 kara, f., care, mik ist liara, 1 care, 
 
 care for [and without ist) Ivarist 
 
 (2(14, n. 3). 
 kai'kara, /". ( 1 19), prison (L. career). 
 kas, g. kasis, «., vessel, pitcher. 
 kaupatjan, tv. v. (187, u.l) to box 
 
 one's ears. 
 Ivaiirazeift, pr. «. (57). 
 liaurei, /"., gravity, weight, plenty. 
 Kaurinf'aius, KaiirinJ'ius, m., Ko- 
 
 Qiv&iog. 
 Kaurinf>6, pr. n., f, KoqivS-oq. 
 kaiirjan, w.v., to press, trouble, 
 
 burden. — Compound ana-ltaur- 
 
 jan, th. s. 
 kaixrn, n., corn, grain. 
 kaiirno , n. (1 10), corn, grain of corn. 
 kaurus, adj. (131, n.l), heavy. 
 Kiifas, pr. n. (6). 
 keinan, si. v. (172, n.2; 195, n.2), 
 
 lo germinate, spring up. 
 kilf.'ei, f. (113), womb. 
 kindins, m., governor. 
 kinnus, f. (105), cheek. 
 kintus, m., farthing. 
 kiusan, st.v. (173, n.l), lo choose, 
 
 lest, prove. 
 Icniu, n. (93), knee. 
 kn6j?s, (74, n.2), race. 
 knussjan, w. v., to kneel down. 
 Kreks, m. (8; 119), a Greek. 
 Kreta, pr. n. ((i). 
 kriustan, si. v. (173, n.l) to ijuasli 
 
 with the teeth. 
 
ga-kroton ■ — ga-leik6n. 
 
 117 
 
 ga-krolun, iv. v. (12, n. I) la break 
 
 lo fragmeiUs, crush, bruise. 
 kriists, m. (l(IJ,ii. I), gnasking of 
 
 leelh. 
 ana-kurab jan, iv. v. (54,ii.l), lo 
 
 tie down, recline (al table), sit 
 
 down (Lat. acciimbere). 
 kuinei, xovfii {Hebrew), arise! 
 kuni-, n. (93), kin, race, tribe. 
 kunnan, pret.-pr. v. (199), to know. 
 
 — Compounds (199, n. J) (a) fra- 
 kimnan, to despise, (b) ga-kunnau, 
 lo subject one's self. 
 
 kunnan, w. v. (199,ii. 1) {only in 
 compounds), (a) ana-kunnan, to 
 read, (b) at-kunnan, to award, 
 give, (o) ga-kunnan, lo become 
 acquainted with, gain knowledge 
 of, know, consider, (d) iif- kunnan 
 (prel. -kunj^a ]99,n. 1), to know, 
 recognize, learn. 
 
 kun)?!, n., intelligence, knowledge. 
 
 kun)7s, part, pret., known. Subst. 
 in., acquaintance. 
 
 k list us, m., proof, test {from 
 khisan). 
 
 Kyreiuaius, pr. n., KvQi'jVioq. 
 
 Qairniis (11)5), mill {in asilii-qair- 
 nus). 
 
 qairrus, adj. (Kil), gentle. 
 
 Qartus, pr. n. (59). 
 
 qeus (qeins 7,n.2), f. (lOlj), wife 
 {comp. E. queen). 
 
 qiman, st. v. (175, n.l), to come, 
 arrive. — Compounds (a) ana- 
 qiman, w. ace, to approach, (b) 
 fra-qiman, w. dat., to expend, 
 spend, (c) ga-qiman, lo come to- 
 gether, gaq. sik, to assemble, (d) 
 us-qiman, 7V. dat., to kill. 
 
 qino, f. (112), woman. 
 
 -qiss, (7li,n. 1), speech {only in 
 compounds). 
 
 qistjan, w.v., to spoil, destroy. 
 
 — Compounds (a) fra-qist-jan, th. s. 
 (b) us-qistjan w. dat. or ace. to 
 ruin, kill. 
 
 fra-qistnan, w. v., to be ruined, 
 to perish. 
 
 qij'an, «<.».( 1 7(i, n.l), lo say, speak, 
 mean, name. — Compound us- 
 qijian, to speak out, blaze abroad. 
 
 qi^us, m., womb. 
 
 ga-qiujan, w. v. (42-, 187), to 
 quicken. 
 
 ga-qiunan (42, n. 3), to be quicken- 
 ed, become alive. 
 
 qius (I24,n.:5), alive. 
 
 qiims, m. (101, n.l), arrival. 
 
 Laggei, f. (113), length. 
 
 laggs, adj., long {only used with 
 reference to time). 
 
 lagjan, w. v. (1S7), to lay {down), 
 give. — Compound ga-lagjan, to 
 lay {down) {cf. ligan). 
 
 laian red. v. (22; 182), to revile. 
 
 laigaion, Xe'/ewv, legion. 
 
 laikan, red. v. (179), to leap. 
 
 laiktjo, f. (57), lesson {Lat. lectio). 
 
 lais, pret.-pr. v. (30; 179), / know. 
 
 laisareis, m. (92), teacher, master. 
 
 laiseins, f. (103,n.l), a teaching, 
 doctrine. 
 
 laisjan, w.v. (30; 197). lo leach. 
 
 lais tj an, w.v., to follow, follow 
 after. 
 
 Laiwweis, pr.n. Aev'tq. 
 
 lamb, n., lamb. 
 
 land, n., land, region, country. 
 I^ata bisunjane, environs. — gen. 
 landis, adv. (215), ove?i,and. 
 
 lasiws, adj. (42,n. 1), tveak. 
 
 lapfin, w.v., to invite, call. 
 
 lap&ns, (103,n.l), invitation, con- 
 solation, redemption. 
 
 laubjan, w.v. (31), only in com- 
 pounds, (a) ga-laubjau, to believe. 
 (b) us-laubjan, lo permit, suffer. 
 
 laiifs, m. (5(), n. 1; 91) foliage, 
 leaves. 
 
 laugnjan, w. v. (31), to deny. 
 
 lauhmuni, f. (14,u.3), lightning. 
 
 Lauidja, pr. 71. (26,n.l).' 
 
 laun, n., pay, wages, reward. 
 
 laus, adj. (78,n.2) without {cf. E. 
 -less). 
 
 laus-handus, arf;.(131,n.l), empty- 
 handed. 
 
 lausjan, w.v., to loosen, redeem. 
 — Compound ga-Iausjan, Ih.s. 
 
 bi-leiban, st. v. (56, n.l; 177,n. 1), 
 to remain. 
 
 leihts, adj., light; — subst, m., 
 leihts (?), levity. 
 
 leilwan, st. v. (172), to lend, leiluan 
 sis, to borrow. 
 
 leik, n., body, flesh. 
 
 leikan, w. v., to please. — Com- 
 pound ga-leikan, to please, waila 
 galeika, / am well pleased. 
 
 leikeins, adj., bodily, of flesh, 
 fleshly. 
 
 ga-leili6n, w. v., to liken, to he 
 like. — Compound in-ga-leilion, 
 to change into the image or like- 
 
118 
 
 leitils ~ maTi>vufi. 
 
 iicss of II. C'lir. III. IS. (galeiks, 
 adj., like). 
 
 Icitils, ailj. (l:ts), lUUc. 
 
 \a\^&n,sl. 0.(172,11.1), to go; only 
 in compoHnrts (a) af-leijjan, lo go 
 away, (b) bi-leif>an, to leave, leave 
 behind, (c) ga-Iei|7an, to go, come. 
 (d) us-leil'an, to go away, go out, 
 l>ass away. 
 
 h'ij'iis, m. fruil-wine. 
 
 lOkois, ?n., physician {cf. E. leech). 
 
 lOtan (leitan 7, n. 2) red. v. flM), lo 
 let, permit, leave, leave behind — 
 Compounds (a) af-letan, to let off, 
 send away; to leave, depart; to 
 forgive ; to let one have, (b) fra- 
 letan, to let go, dismiss ; to remit, 
 forgive; lo let go, allow; to let 
 down. 
 
 and-letiian, w. v., to be released, 
 dismissed. 
 
 lew, n. (9-1,11.1), opporltinily, oc- 
 casion. 
 
 li'wjaii, w. v., to betray. — Com- 
 pound ga-lewjau, th. s. 
 
 libains, f. (l(i:i,ii. I), life. 
 
 liban, w. v. (I'.i:t), to live. 
 
 ni-lif tian , w. v., to be left remaining. 
 
 ligaii, St. V. (17(1 n.l), to lie. 
 
 Hgrs, m. (a), couch, bed. 
 
 af-liiinan, st. v. (17t, n. 1), to 
 depart. 
 
 lisan, St. v. (I7H, n. 1), to gather, 
 collect (cf. fi. to lease = lo glean). 
 — Compound galisan, to gather 
 together, gal. sik, to ussemble. 
 
 list's, f. (3U; 103), jvilo. 
 
 li)?us, m. (lU.T), limb. 
 
 liufs, gen.\\\\\ns, adj. (31; -ili,!!. 1; 
 124,ri.2), dear, beloved. 
 
 liudan, st} v. (I7.s,ii. I), to grow. 
 
 Hugan, St. v. (tl; 173, n. 1) to lie. 
 
 liugan, w. v. (192, n.l; 193), to 
 marry. 
 
 liugn, 71. (31), lie. 
 
 liugnja, a- liar. 
 
 linn ad ei, f, and liuhadeins , f. 
 (113, n. 2), light, illumination. 
 
 liuhadeins, adj., lightening, 
 bright. 
 
 liuhaj', g. liubadis n. (91), light. 
 
 liuhtjan, w.v., to lighten, shine. 
 
 fra-liusan, */. w. (173,n. 1), to lose. 
 
 liuta, m., hypociite. 
 
 lofa, m., the palm of the hand. 
 
 jubains, f. (31), hope. 
 
 jubja-leisei, f. (30), witchcraft. 
 Iub5 , f. (31), love {in brojra-lubo). 
 
 Indja, /., five. 
 
 luftus, ni. (10.5), air. 
 
 lllkan, .r(. 2). (15; 173,ii.2). iolock; 
 
 only in compounds (a) ga-lukan, 
 
 ((( shut, shut up. (b) vis-lukan, 
 
 to unlock, open. 
 lukarn, n., light. 
 lukarna-sta]7a, m., candlestick. 
 fra-lusnan, w.v. (194), lo be lost, 
 
 perish. 
 luston, w. v., 10 desire. 
 lustus, m. (lo."i), lust, desire. 
 
 Magan, prel.-pr. v. (201), lo be 
 able; can. 
 
 in a g ajj c i , f. (11 3), virginity. 
 
 inagal?s, f. (103), maid, virgin. 
 
 magiila, m. (lOh), little boy, boy. 
 
 mitgus, m. (10.5), boy. 
 
 mahtuigs, adj. (124), mighty. 
 
 uiahts, f. ((i(),n.l), might, strength. 
 
 maidjan, w. v., to deform, corrupt, 
 falsify. 
 
 mai'hstus, m., dung. 
 
 mais, adv. {belonging to niaiza 
 (212)), more, rather, ban mais, 
 tuaiwa mais, how much, more; 
 mais, w. d., more than. 
 
 maitan, red. v. (179), to cut. — 
 Compounds (a) af-maitan, to cut 
 off. (b) bi-maitan, to circumcise. 
 
 maif'ms, m. (91, n.l), a present. 
 
 maiza, co?npar., greater; supcrl. 
 maists, the greatest (13s). Adv. 
 niaist (212,n.3). 
 
 Makaidonja, Makidouja, pr. n., 
 (ll.n.l), May.eSovia. 
 
 malan, st. v. (177, n.l), lo grind. 
 
 malo, f., moth. 
 
 mammona, m.,- /ja/iifKorfig, riches. 
 
 managduj^s, /. (103), abundance. 
 
 managoi, f. (Ill), multitude. 
 
 managnan, w. v., to increase; 
 abound. 
 
 manags, adj. (124), much, many. 
 
 mana-maurfrja, m. (los), mm-- 
 derer. 
 
 mana-sej^s, (/. -sSdis, f. (103), man- 
 kind, world {-s&ps, seed, belon- 
 ging to saian). 
 
 manna, m. (117), man. ni manna, 
 nobody. 
 
 manna-hun, pron. (163), with ni, 
 no one. 
 
 manwjan, w. v., to prepare. — 
 Compound ga-manwjan, th. s. 
 
 manwus, adj. (131), ready. — 
 Adv. manwuba (210). 
 
marei — nasjan. 
 
 119 
 
 marei, f. (Il.'l), sen. 
 
 JIari;i, Marja, pr.n., MaQia. 
 
 uiarikrcitus, in. (110), pcarL 
 
 marka, /'., boimdury {cf. I£. mark). 
 
 ^larkus, pr. n., MaQxoq. 
 
 martyr, (3"J), marlyr. 
 
 marzjan, tv. v., to offend. — Com- 
 pound ga-marzjan, ih. s. 
 
 matjau, iv. v., to eal. 
 
 mats, m. (101), food (cf. E. meal). 
 
 Mat]7aius, pr. n. lilar&aioc. 
 
 ma|-'l, M (l)-l,n.2), market. 
 
 maudjan, w. v., tu remind. — 
 Compound ga-inaudjan, ih. s. 
 
 maurgins, m. (!)l,n.l; 214), morn- 
 
 maurnan, m. v., to mourn, to be 
 anxious. 
 
 maurtr, n. (94), murder. 
 
 mai'irprjan, w. v., to murder, kill. 
 
 mawi, /'. (42; 94), girl. 
 
 mawilo, /"., damsel Mk. V. 41. 
 
 megs, m. (91n.l), son-in-law. 
 
 mt'ins, poss. pron. (151), my, mine. 
 
 racl, ;/., lime, hour. 
 
 mela, a measure, bushel. 
 
 meljan, rv. v. (1S7), to write, write 
 down. — Compounds (a) ga-mSljan, 
 ih. s. (b) ana-moljan, to enroll. 
 
 mena, m. (lOS), moon. 
 
 miino]>s, m. (117), month. 
 
 mcrij?;!, /. rumor, fame. 
 
 morjan, w. v.i to announce, preach. 
 Partic. mGrjands, m. (115). — 
 Compounds (a) waila-merjan, to 
 bring glad tidings, (b)waja-mgrjan 
 (21,ii.'2), to blaspheme. 
 
 mes, n. (8), table. 
 
 raidjis, af//. (122,n. 1 ; \2o), middle. 
 
 midjun-gards, m. (i), rvorld, earth 
 {literally middle-world). 
 
 *miduma (or midums?), f., midst. 
 
 midiim6nds, part. m. (115), me- 
 diator. 
 
 mikildiif's, f. (113), greatness. 
 
 mikilei, /'. (113), greatness. 
 
 mikiljan, w.v. (ls>5), to j'raise, 
 glorify. 
 
 mikilnan, w.v. ( 194), to bemagnified. 
 
 mikils,' adj. (138), great, strong 
 (cf. 1£. much, ^micfclc ,). 
 
 mildifia, f (97), mildness. 
 
 milhma, m. (108), cloud. 
 
 mili)?, n. honey. 
 
 miluks, f. (110), jnilk. 
 
 *mims, mimz, >t.('iS,Ti.l),flesh,meat. 
 
 minniza compur.; minists, supert. 
 (cf. leitils (138)). 
 
 mins, adv. (78,n.l; 212,n.l), ^ew. 
 
 *missa-du)'s (missadeds), /'., mis- 
 deed, sin (cojnp. dcps). 
 
 missa-lciks, adj., various. 
 
 miss&, adv. (211,ii.l), one another, 
 reciprocally ; always with pers. 
 pron., izwis, uns misso (you, us) 
 one another. 
 
 mitan, St. V. (176), to mete, mea- 
 sure. — Compound ns-mitan, to 
 dwell permanently, behave. 
 
 mita)7S, /". (103, n.l), measure. 
 
 miton, w.v. (190), to think, con- 
 sider, think over. 
 
 mitOns,/. (lo3,n.l), consideration, 
 thought. 
 
 mi|:> (liiid 74, n.l) (\) prn. w. d. (217), 
 with, together with. (2) adv.,-lh. s. 
 (used in connection with verbs). 
 
 mifi-lJan-ei, conj. (218), when, 
 while. 
 
 mi]7-wissei, /. (30), conscience. 
 
 mizdo, /., reward. 
 
 modags, adj. (124), angry, moody. 
 
 *af-mojan, w. v. (20; 187), lo 
 weary. 
 
 M6ses, g. MSsezis, pr.n., Mcooijg. 
 
 m6ta, custom. 
 
 ga-m6tan, prel.-pr. v. (202), to 
 find room. 
 
 m6tareis, m., toll-gatherer, publi- 
 can. 
 
 ga-m6tjan, rv. v., to meet. 
 
 m6)?s, g. m6dis, m. (74,ii.2; 91, n. 2), 
 courage, anger. 
 
 muka-m6dei, /. (15), meekness. 
 
 faiir-mfilian, w. v. (15), to bind 
 up one s mouth, muzzle. 
 
 mil nan, pret.-pr. v. (200), lo 
 think. — Compound ga-miman, 
 to remember, be mindful (200, n.l). 
 
 miinan, w.v. (200,n.l), to remem- 
 ber, intend. 
 
 muns, m. (101), thought, purpose, 
 device II. Cor. II. 11. 
 
 Naen, pr. n. (0). 
 
 ga-nali, bi-nah (201), see naiihan. 
 
 nahta-mats, m. (i), supper. 
 
 nahts, f (11(3), night. 
 
 naiteins, /. (103, n.l), blasphemy 
 (ga-naitjan, m. v., to abus^). 
 
 naqa)?s, g. naqadis, adj., naked, 
 bare. 
 
 namnjan, w.v. (187), to name. 
 
 nam6, w. (110,n.l), name. 
 
 naseins, f. (103, n.l), rescue, sal- 
 vation. 
 
 nasjan, w. v. (185), to save, nas- 
 jands, m. (115), the Savior. — 
 
120 
 
 nati — rahnjan. 
 
 ga-nasjan, to make sound, to heal, 
 save. 
 nati, n. (d.i), ncl. 
 Nafian, pr. n. (711). 
 Naiibaimbair, (ri-ln. 1), JSovciiiber. 
 naurti-bandi, /'., feller. 
 Xauel }>r. ii. {2(i,n. 1). 
 ni'uli, adv., ;/el ; ni nauh, tiol yel. 
 pi-naiihan, pret.-pi-. r. (2(11), to 
 
 suffice, to be enough. 
 nai'in-J'Kiiiili, adv., slill, yel. 
 nans, in. (joi.ii.,'!), a dead man. 
 naul'jan, iv.v., to force . compel. 
 — Coinjioiinil smi-wAwpiim, III. s. 
 nauj's, /■. (Iii;<), need. 
 Nazarai):', pr. n., Nfc'C.a()it. 
 Nazorgnus, or. n., ISaC.t.Oifijvoi. 
 
 rocalivc Xazoronai Mk. I, 24. 
 no, adv. (216), no, nay. 
 nrhr, adv. (114), near. 
 nob' a, adv., prep. (217), near. 
 nrb'is, eonipar. adv. {'l\'l), nearer. 
 ni"'h'J:in and compound at-nehijan, 
 w. V. {with or ivilhout sik), to 
 dram near, approach. 
 nOb'unflja, m., neighbor. 
 nci, inlerrog. particle, not'.' 
 ni neg. parlicte (2 Hi), nol, nor. 
 nibn a?id nibai (lo,n.2), conj. 
 (21''), except, if not, unless. 
 nibai Ivan , lesl at any lime Mk. 
 IV. 12. 
 niflwa, f., rust. 
 
 nih (211, n. t and (i2,n.:i) eonj. (2)^), 
 a7id not, nor; not; nib — nib, 
 nih — ni, ni — nib, neither — nor. 
 MikaiirtOmus, pr. n. (2:ta. I). 
 niman, st. v. (170; i75), to take, 
 accept, receive. Compounds (a) 
 af-niman, to take off, to lake 
 away {from), (b) and-niman, to 
 accept, receive, (c) ga-niman, to 
 lake with one, to conceive Lu. II. 
 2!, lo receive, (d) us-niman, to 
 lake out, lake away. 
 ga-nisau, st. v. (176,n.l), to be 
 rescued, saved; to become whole, 
 recover. 
 nij'an, sl.v. (176, n.l), to help. 
 ni '.jis, m. (92), cousin. 
 nipjo, f. (112), cousin. 
 ni-u, interrog. particle (216), nol'! 
 
 is it not so? 
 ana -nil! j an, m. v. (187), to renew. 
 niujis, adj. (126), new, young. 
 niu-klahei, f., pusillanimity 
 (niuklahs, adj., childish, under 
 age). 
 
 niun, num. (141) nine. 
 
 niunda, ord. numb. (14H). the 
 ninth. 
 
 niuntchund, num. (141)) ninety. 
 
 ninfan, sl.v. (I7:(,n.l), lo enjoy. 
 
 ga-nohjan, w. v., satisfy, conlenl. 
 
 not a, in., hinder part of a ship, 
 slern. 
 
 nil, adr. ami conj. (214,n. 1; 2IS), 
 now, at present, therefore, hence- 
 forth. - Snbst. fram hbuma mi, 
 from henceforth. 
 
 nub, adv. (216; 218), then, thus. 
 
 -niunja, m. ('.V.\), laker (in arbi- 
 nunija). 
 
 uunu, conj. (218), therefore. 
 
 nnta, in., calclier. fisher. 
 
 0, inlcrjeclion (21it), "■' "''•' "/'■' 
 ogan. prct.-pr. v. (.'t^i; 202), lo fear, 
 
 be afraid of; also 6§an sis. 
 ogjan, «'. V. i'6h), to frighten. 
 osanna, foreign w. (61). 
 
 Paida, f. (51), coal. 
 
 paintckustc (i:i,n. 1), reniccost. 
 
 Paltrus, pr. H. TlkxQoq. 
 
 paraskiuwe (;3'.)), day of prepa- 
 ration. 
 
 paska, naox"-, the feast of the 
 passover. 
 
 Pauntius, pr. n. (24, n. 5). 
 
 paiirpura paurpaura (24, u.2.5), 
 purple. 
 
 Pawlus, pr. n., Havkog. 
 
 peika-bagms, m. (51), palm-tree. 
 
 Pcilatus, pr. n. (5a). 
 
 Pbaeba, pr. n. (52). 
 
 pistikoins, adj. (51), genuine. 
 
 plapja, /. (S)',n.l), street {Lai. 
 platea). 
 
 plats, m. (aori?), patch. 
 
 plinsjan, iv.v. (51), to dance. 
 
 ana-praggan, ?•«;</. -y. (51), to harass. 
 
 praitoriaun (120,n.2), Pretorium. 
 
 praufeteis, /', nQ0(prii:iQ. 
 
 praiifetus or praufStes, m., kqo- 
 (p7]T-)]g. 
 
 puggs, m.'i (51), purse. 
 
 pund, ra. (51), pound. 
 
 Q , see the letter following K. 
 
 Radagaisus, pr. n. (20,n. 1). 
 raginon, w. v., to be counselor, 
 
 governor (ragin, n., advice; ra- 
 
 gineis, m., counselor). 
 rannj an , rv.v.,to reckon, compute, 
 
 impute. 
 
raihtis — Saillatimfin. 
 
 121 
 
 raihtis, adv. (218). (hen, perhaps, 
 
 indeed. 
 raihts, adj., riglU, slraighl. 
 ur-raisjan, w'.v. (.188), lo cause 
 
 (ti rise, lo raise up. 
 ur-rannjan, m. v. (.')2), to malce 
 
 lo rise. 
 raka, paxu (Hebrew, ffOod-/or-HO- 
 
 thivq fellow). 
 ut'-va"lijan, m. v., lo stretch out. 
 rasta, /'., mile. 
 ga-rafijan, st. v. (177, n. 2), to 
 
 number. 
 ral?.jo, f. (I I2>, number, account. 
 bi-raubOu, rv.v., lo rob, despoil. 
 raiipjan, w. v., lo pluk. 
 *'raul^s, adj. (7'ln.2), red. 
 Ki'ccared, pr.n. (6,u.2). 
 -redan, red. v. (181), lo counsel. 
 
 (otily in compounds). 
 reiki, >t. (95), power, aulhorily. 
 reikinon, w. t;. (190), lo govern, 
 
 rule. 
 rciks, m. (117), ruler. 
 reilts, adj., mighty, honorable. 
 reiran, tv. v., to tremble. 
 ur-rcisan, st.v. (172, n.l), to arise. 
 rignjan, w. v., to rain {rign, n., 
 
 rain). 
 rikan, st.v. (176,n. 1), to heap. 
 riqis, riqiz (7S,n.l), n. (94), dark- 
 ness. 
 riqizeins, adj., dark, gloomy. 
 rinnan, St. v. (17-1, n.i), to run, 
 
 race. — Compounds (a) ga-rinnan, 
 
 10 run together, come together. 
 
 (b) ur-rinnau, lo go out, come out, 
 
 come forth, spring up. 
 rinno, f. (32), orook. 
 *riureis {or riurs according to 
 
 §180?), adj. transitory. 
 rodjan, m. v., to speak. 
 Rum a, Eiimoueis, pr.ns.{lo,M.1). 
 ur-Tumnan, w. v. (78, n. 4), lo 
 
 spread out, be enlarged. 
 riims, m.? (15), room, space. 
 runa, f. (15), mystery. 
 runs, m. (32; 49; 101, n. 1.2), a 
 
 running, course, issue. 
 
 Sa.,' pro7i. (153), this, the, he. 
 sablsato, indeclinable subst.. or 
 
 sabbatus, m. (120, n.l), aap^a- 
 
 rov. 
 sa-ei, pron. (157), that, who. 
 saggws, m. (101), song, singing. 
 sa-h, pron. (154), this, that, he. 
 sa-h;az-uh,prore. (164,n.l). 
 
 sai, inlerj. (219; 204, n.2) see! be- 
 hold! 
 
 saian (saijan 22,n. t), red. v. (22; 
 182), to sow. — Compound in- 
 saian, to sow in. 
 
 saih.s, num. (141), six. 
 
 s a i h s t a , ord. numb. (140), the sixth. 
 
 sailuan, st. v. (34, n.l; 170, n.l), to 
 see, look at, look into, look on. 
 
 — Compounds (a) at-saihian, to 
 look on, regard, lake heed lo 
 (b) bi-sailwan, to view, look at, 
 look round about, (c) ga-sailuan, 
 10 see, behold, (d) in-saihran, to 
 look at with atlention. (e) fiairh- 
 saihran, lo look through, look 
 into, (f) us-sailuan, to look up; 
 to look round about for. 
 
 in-sailjan, w.v., in I he phrase 
 (insailjan |7ata badi, Hk. II, 4, lo 
 let down the b. with cords. 
 
 ■sair, n. (20, n. 2; 94), pain, sorrow. 
 
 saiwala, f. (97), soul. 
 
 saiws m. (101, n.l), sea, lake. 
 
 sakan, .^t.v. (177, n.l), to dispute. 
 
 — Compounds (a) and^sakan, to 
 speak against, (b) ga-sakan, to 
 threaten, forbid. 
 
 sakjo, f. (35), strife. 
 
 salc^cus, m. (58, n.l), sack. 
 
 salb6n, w. v. (189), to anoint 
 (salve). 
 
 salb6ns, f. (103, n.l), ointmeni, 
 salve. 
 
 saltan, red. v. (17!i,u.l), lo salt. 
 
 sama, ;;ron.(132,n.3; 150), the same. 
 
 sama-lauj's, adj. (74, n. 1) of 
 equal size or fjuantily, as much. 
 
 s a m a - 1 e i k o , adv., equcdly, like- 
 wise. 
 
 sama]?, adv. (213,n.2), together. 
 
 sandjan, w. v. (74,n.3; 1S7), lo 
 send. — Compounds (a)ga-sandjan, 
 to accompany, (b) in-sandjan, In 
 send in, send, (c) us-sandjan, to 
 send out, away. 
 
 Sat an a and Satanas, m. aatavSq. 
 
 satjan, w. v. (187), to set, put. — 
 Compounds (a) af-satjan, to dis- 
 
 . miss, divorce Mt. V. 32. (b) at- 
 satjan, to present, (c) ga-satjan, 
 to set, place; to give (a name). 
 (d) faiira-gasatjan, to place before. 
 
 sa]?s, g. sadis, adj., enough, full. 
 saiihts, (58, n. 2), sickness. 
 sauil (26; 94), n., sun. 
 Sanlaiimon, pr. n., SoXofioiv. 
 
122 
 
 bisauljan — atsiaupnan. 
 
 bi-siuiljaii, ii: v. {21. n. J), In sullij, 
 
 tlc/ilc. 
 bi-SMuln:ui, m. v. (24,n. 1) lu de- 
 file one's self. 
 Sai'ir, /;;■. n., in. (i), ^Ti'oc (24, !).,=>). 
 saurga, /'., eare {sorrow). 
 sai'irgaii, iv.c.lo care, be Kiixioiis 
 
 ctbuiil. 
 ,s;inl>s, m. (Ull), sacrifice. 
 Scidoiia, pr. n., 2^idc6y. 
 Seimoii {ace. Seimona) and Sci- 
 
 monus , jjr. n., Zi/twy. 
 scina, f/en. refl, pron. (t.'iO). 
 Ki'ins, proH. (151), his, their. 
 si-i|Mis, adj. (l:il), I ale. 
 sOls, adj. (V.W), kind. 
 sibja.,/! (97,11.1), relationship. 
 ?;-:i-sibjon, w. v., to be reconciled 
 
 to. 
 sibun, num. (141), seven. 
 .sibiiii-tOhund, num. ('4:!), sev- 
 en ii/. 
 sidon, 7V.V. (lltO), lo pracliee. 
 sidus, in., custom. 
 sigjj;\vaii, St. v. ((^; 174,n. I), to 
 siuff, read, read aloud. — Coni- 
 jiouud iis-siggwan, lo read, read 
 aloud. 
 sigi.s, n.. victor;/. 
 Sigis-inures, pr. n. ((;,ii.2). 
 Kisqan (sin-n-(|aii), st. v. (174, n.l) 
 to sink. — ('«;/(;/(;»/(f/ ga-siggqan, 
 lo sink, sink under, to be ab- 
 sorbed, swallowed up in. 
 sigljo, n. (110), seal. 
 sihu, n. (20,n. 1; lOG), victory. 
 sigljan, W.V., lo seal. 
 aiia-silan, w. v. (liW), to be .lileiil. 
 silba, pron. (l;i2,u.3; 15(1), self. 
 Siltianiis, pr. n. (5,a; 54, n. 1), 
 
 —i/.nvarog. 
 silda-loikjan, w.v., lo wonder. 
 silubr, ;(. (94), silver. 
 simlu, adv. (214, n.l), once. 
 sinaps, m. (?), mustard. 
 sincigs, «rf/'(10,n.5; i:is), old. 
 sinteins, adj., daily. sinteinO, 
 adv., always, ever, seiteina 
 (17,n.2). 
 siponeis, m. (92), pupil, disciple. 
 siponjan, tv. v. (187; 1S8), lo be 
 
 a pupil. 
 si tan, St. v. (176,n. 1), lo sit. — 
 Compounds (a) bi-sitan, to sit 
 about, bisitands (115), m., one 
 who dwells near , a neighbor. 
 (b) ga-sitan, to sit down. 
 siujan, w. v. (1S7), to sew. 
 
 si 11 kail, s!.v. (n;in. 1). .'() he sick. 
 
 sinks, adj. (121), sick. 
 
 siinis, /: (Kill), sccinij. sight, 
 vision, apiieanince. 
 
 skaban, st. v. (177, n.l), to shave. 
 
 skadus, «/., shade, shadow. 
 
 -skadwoins, /; (14,ii. I), shadin// 
 (in ga-skadwoins). 
 
 utar-skadwjan , w.v. (II, n.l), to 
 overshadow. 
 
 skaidan, red. v. (179), to sepa- 
 rate. 
 
 ga-s k;iidiian, w.v. (194), to be 
 separated, divorced. 
 
 skalkinon, w. v., to serve. 
 
 skalks, m. (91), servant. 
 
 skaiiian sik, iv. v., to be ashamed 
 
 {«n- 
 
 ga-skiipjan, .v/. t). ( I m, n.2), lo 
 
 Creole, ni'ikc {shape). 
 skattja, m. (SO), nioneij-chnni/cr. 
 skatts, ni. (119,11.1), m'oneij. 
 skaj'jan, si. v. (177, n.2), to do 
 
 harm, scath. 
 skaiida-raips, m.('i), a leathern 
 
 strap, latchct, 
 skanns, adj. ( i;ui,ii.2), Oeauliful. 
 ns-skawjan, w. v. (42, n.2), to 
 
 (re)awiike. 
 skeinan, st. v. (172, ii, 1), to shine, 
 
 to be hrillianl — Coinpoun.il bi- 
 
 skeinan, lo shine round about. 
 skeiroins, /'., e.vplimalinn. 
 ga-skeirjan, w. v., lo explain. 
 skeirs, adj. (7s n.2), clear. 
 skewjau, iV. v., lo ijo. 
 skip, n., ship. 
 af-skiuban,.s<. v. (5(1, n. I ; 17)1, n. I), 
 
 to shove away. 
 skohs, m. (a?), shoe. 
 dis-skroitau, st. v. (172, n.l), lo 
 
 tear to pieces {shreds). 
 dis-skritnan, w. v. (194), lo be 
 
 torn to shreds. 
 skiiggwa, m. ((1^), ?nirror. 
 skill a, in. adj., guilty, liable to 
 
 penalty: subst. (los), debtor. 
 skulan, »/■<;;.-/«•. w. (200), lo owe, 
 
 to be obliyed lo ; skuld ist, it is 
 
 lawful, suitable, permitted; skuld 
 
 wisan, lo be obliged. 
 skiira, f. (15), shower. 
 slahan, st. v. (177, n.l), to strike, 
 
 beat {cf. E. to slay). 
 slabs, m. (i), stroke, plague. 
 af-slaufijan, m. v., to despair. 
 af-slaiif' 11 an, w.v., to be ama- 
 zed. 
 
slawan — swaihra. 
 
 123 
 
 slawan, tv. v., lo he silcnl. — 
 Compniiiid ga-slawan, th: s. 
 
 slepan, red. y. (17!)), lo sleep. 
 
 slops, in. (lll.n. 2), sleep. 
 
 t'ra-slindan, si. v. (174,11.1), lo 
 smalliiiv up. 
 
 sliupan, st. v. (I7;i,n. 1), lo slip. 
 
 smakka, in. (5s,n. t), fig. 
 
 smals, adj., small, lilUe. 
 
 ga-smcitan, st. v. (172, n.l), lo 
 besmear. 
 
 snaga, m., garment, cloak. 
 
 snaiws, m. (91,n. 1), snow. 
 
 sneij'an, st. v. {lVl,u.\), to cut. 
 (cf. E. to snalhe). 
 
 sriiuinjan, m. v., lo hasten. 
 
 s II i u m 11 n cl o s , adv. (2 1 2, a. 2), tvitli 
 more haste. 
 
 sniwan, st. v. (170n.2), to hasten. 
 
 s 11 11 1 r s , adj., wise. 
 
 sokjaii, n>. V. (.'iS; ISO), lo seeic, 
 desire; to inquire into, dispute. 
 
 sokiis, /'. (35; 103), research, 
 question. 
 
 spai'kiilatur (5a; 24,n.2), spy. 
 
 sparwa, m., sparrow. 
 
 spai'irds, f. (ilG), race-course. 
 
 sped u mist s, sup. ( I .')!), n. 1 ), the last. 
 
 spciwan, si. v. (172, n.l), to spit, 
 (cf. E. lo spew). 
 
 spilda, /"., tablet. 
 
 s pill on, w. v., to narrate, tell 
 (spill, ■«., tale) (cf. E. spell). 
 
 spinnan, st. v, (174, n.l), to spin. 
 
 sprauto, adv. (2ll,n. 1), quickly. 
 
 stafs, m. (56, n.l), element. 
 
 s taiga, /"., path, may. 
 
 stain a hs, adj., stony. 
 
 stainelns, adj., of stone, stony. 
 
 st ains, m. (91), .ilone, rock. — As 
 pr. H. = Peter Skeir. 49. 
 
 gtairno, /'., star. 
 
 sa-stal(lan, red. v. (\'^),lo possess. 
 
 standan, sl.v (177, n.3), to stand. 
 — Compounds (a) af-standan, to 
 renounce, fall away, (b) and- 
 standan w. d. , to withstand , op- 
 pose, (o) at-standan, to stand by, 
 come near, approach, (d) ga- 
 standan, to stand, stand firm, 
 stay ; to be restored Mk. Ill, 5. 
 (e) twis-standan(twistandan, comp. 
 §78, n. 5) m. d., to depart from 
 one, bia farewell to. (f) us- 
 standan, to stand up, rise, arise. 
 
 sta|7s, g. stadis, m. (101), stead, 
 place, country, jainis stadis {comp. 
 § 215) on the other side, across. 
 
 sta|7K, <). sta|'is, w. (i?), shore, 
 coast. 
 
 staua, f. (H't), judyment , law-suil, 
 damnation. 
 
 staua, m. (20; MS), judge. 
 
 staua-st61s, m. (a), judgment- 
 seat. 
 
 and-staurran, w. v., to threaten. 
 
 stautan, red. v. (n9,n.1), to thrust, 
 strike. 
 
 steigan, st. v. (174, n. 1), to mount. 
 
 — Compounds (a) iifar-steigan to 
 mount up, grow up Mk. IV. 7. 
 (b) us-steigiin (usteigan 7s,n. 5), 
 to mount up, ascend. 
 
 stibna, f. (97), voice. 
 us-stiggan, si. v. (174, n.l), to 
 
 pluck out (cf. E. to sting). 
 stigqan, St. v. (174, n.l), lo thrust. 
 stilan, St. v. (175, n.l), to steal. 
 stiwiti, n., patience. 
 stiur, m. (78, n. 2; 91, n. 4), steer. 
 stSdjan, w.v., only in compounds 
 
 (a) ana-stSdjan, to begin, (b) du- 
 
 stodjan, th. s. 
 stojan, ?y. «. (2(1; ISO), to judge. 
 
 — Compound ga-stOjan, to 
 judge, determine. 
 
 stols, m. (a), stool. 
 
 straujan, w. v. (42; tS7), to strew. 
 
 striks, m. (a?), stroke, tittle. 
 
 stubjus. Hi. (105), dust. 
 
 ga-suljau, w. v., to found. 
 
 snman, adv. (21 4, n.l), once. 
 
 sums, pron. (102), some, some one; 
 one, plur, some, bi suraata in 
 part. 
 
 sundro, adv., asunder, separately, 
 alone. 
 
 snnja, f. (97,n. 1; 215), truth. 
 
 sunjaba, adv. (219), truly. 
 
 sunjon, 7V. v. (190), lo justify. 
 
 sunna, m., and sunno, f., sun. 
 
 suns, adv., soon, suddenly, imme- 
 diately. 
 
 suns-aiw, adv., immediately. 
 
 suns-ei, conj., as soon as. 
 
 sunus, m. (104), son. 
 
 Slits, adj. (15 n.l; 130), sweet. 
 
 sw a , adv., so. 
 
 swa-ei, conj. ('liS), so that; ihere- 
 fore. 
 
 af-swaggwjan, w. v., to make de- 
 spondent. 
 
 bi-swairban, st. v. (174, n.l), to 
 wipe. 
 
 swaihra, m. (108), father-in- 
 law. 
 
124 
 
 swaihro — triggwa. 
 
 swai'hrn f. (J 12), mnthcv-iii- laic. 
 swa-laul's, ndj. (ICl), so (jreni. 
 
 XD iiniili. 
 sw:i-lciks, mlj. (Kil), of such ii 
 
 kind 01- 'jiiiiliiij, such. 
 s \\" a ni 111 s , III., spimgc. 
 swaran, si. c. (177,ii.l), lo sicciir. 
 
 — Compounds (a) bi-swaraii, lo 
 iidjnru. (b) iifiir-swaran , lo for- 
 
 SIVCllI . 
 
 swaro, iidc, wilhoiit a cause, in 
 
 Ciiin. 
 suiirtis (A) or swarti/.l (B) n. 
 
 (V), ink. 
 s warts, iidj., hliicli (cf. /:'. stcarl). 
 .sua-swC', iidc, so ns.jiist us. as; 
 
 — (■"",/• (il^), so lliiil [also w. 
 infiiiilicc). 
 
 swii, iidv. mid conj. (iJIs), as, jusi 
 
 us: when; so tliiil ; ahoul (with 
 
 liuincnils. 
 swegnjan, tv. v., to rejoice. 
 swcibiin, St. V. (5(i,n.l; 172,n.I), 
 
 lo cense. ^ 
 
 s Weill, II., swine, pig. 
 ■swOrs, adj. (7s,n.'2), honored. 
 s w r s . tidj. ( 1 24, ii. I ), own. 
 s\vO-|'auli, «rfy. (21S), yet, how- 
 
 ecer, though. 
 pi-s\vikuu}7jan, w. v., I o make 
 
 known, niaiiifesl. 
 s w i - k UTil's , iidj., miinifesl, known. 
 swiltaii, «/. i'. (I74,n. ]), iodic. — 
 
 Compound ga-swiltan, Ih. s. 
 s w i n p n an , /v. v., lo become strong. 
 swinj's, adj. (J 14), strong, whole 
 
 Mk. 11. ]7, porverjful, mighty. 
 s wis tar, f. (114), sister. 
 swogatjaii, IV. v., lo sigh. 
 swuint'sl, ;(. (Sll). pond. pool. 
 Syuiaion, pr. n. (:ii)), '^vprnn-. 
 synai;'"ga-fa]is, g. -fadis, m. (i) 
 
 the rider of a synagogue. 
 syiia^Qge, f. (S9), avvayojyi). 
 Syria, pr. «., ^vQia. 
 
 Tag], n., hair. 
 tagr, /(., tear. 
 tahjan, w. v., to tear. 
 taiiiswa, w. adj.., right; taihswO, 
 
 /'., Ilie right hand. 
 taihun, num. (141), ten. 
 taihuncla, ord. numb. (14(i), I he 
 
 tenth. 
 taihun-tehund and -taihund, 
 
 num. (143; comp. 14'^), /( hundred. 
 taiknjan, m.v. (188), to betoken, 
 
 shorn. — Compound us -taiknjan, 
 
 lo distinguish, appoint: to show, 
 
 approve; ust. sik dii, lo conimcnd 
 
 one s self lo. 
 taikiis, f. (lo:!), token, sign. 
 tainjci, f. (112), basket. 
 tains, m. (Ill), livig. 
 tairan, st. v. (17o,n.l); only in 
 
 compounds. (a) dis- tairan, to 
 
 tear asunder, tear to pieces, burst. 
 
 (b) ga-tairaii, to break, destroy, 
 
 cease. 
 taloifia xahitK {a Chaldean, word 
 
 = damsel). 
 talzjaii, 7V. v., lo leach, instruct; 
 
 panic, taliijands, in. (115), leacher. 
 
 master. 
 ga-tanijan, iv.v. {Xi\ IS7), to lame. 
 taui, n. (2ti; '.!.")), deed. 
 taujan, w. v. (1S7), to do, make, 
 
 act, cause. — Compound ga-taii- 
 
 Jaii , th. s. 
 ga-taurnan, tv. v., lo be lorn, be- 
 come void; ga-tai'irnands , Iruiisi- 
 
 lory, void. 
 ga-teilian, si. v. (172n.l), lo tell, 
 
 announce. 
 Teimau]'aius, pr. n. Tip.6i)-io.:. 
 Teitus, pr. n. Titik. 
 tckan, i-ed.v. (181), to touch. — 
 
 Compound at-tClian, th. s. 
 T li e d c in i r , Thoodomirus, /';•, )(; 
 
 ((j,n.2; 7l),n.1). 
 Theodoricus, pr. n. (ISjn.l; 
 
 7(),n.1). 
 Tliendes, pr. n. (Ii^,u.l). 
 Tlieudiocido, pr. n. (18,n. 1). 
 *tigiis. III., decade (142). 
 and-tilon, w. v., lo *6'?-t't' (gatils, 
 
 adj., convenient, fit, til, «., aim). 
 ga-timan, si. v. (175,n. 1), lo suit. 
 timrja, n. (IDS), carpenter. 
 tiuhan, sl.v. (J7;!), to pull, low, 
 
 lug. — Compounds (a) at-tiuhan, 
 
 to pull towards, bring {lo a cer- 
 tain place), (b) us-tiuhan, lo lead 
 
 out, lead away; ie execute, 
 
 finish. 
 -tSjis, adj. (12(j), doing (only in 
 
 compounds). 
 traualns, f., trust, confidence, 
 trauan, m.v. (26; 179, n.2; I'j:)), 
 
 to trust. — Compound ga-trauan, 
 
 lo trust, be courageous. 
 Trail as, dat. Trauadai, pr. n., 
 
 Tqojcci;. 
 trausti, n. (95,n. 1), covenant. 
 triggwa, /'. (117, n. I), covenant, 
 
 alliance. 
 
triggws — ]>m\. 
 
 125 
 
 triggws, adj.[{\b; Vli), true, faith- 
 ful 
 
 ana-trimpan, sl..v.{^\li,\\.\), io 
 approach. 
 
 trill, n. (94,n. 1), tree. 
 
 trudan, st.v. (175, ii. 2), U> Iread. 
 
 tiiggl, «., star, lumiaar]). 
 
 tnggo, f. (HI), tongue. 
 
 tulgj an, m. v., Io confirm. — Com- \ 
 pound ga-tulgjan, ih. s. i 
 
 tulgiis, adj. (131), steadfast. 
 
 tunjins, m., tooth. 
 
 twai, num. (140), two. 
 
 twalib - wintrus, adj. (131), 
 twelve years old. 
 
 twalif, num. (oGn. 1; 141), twelve. 
 
 tweifls, m. (91 n. 2), doubt. 
 
 tweihnai, wum. (147), two apiece, 
 t>vo at a ti?ne. 
 
 twis-standan, see standan. 
 
 Tykekus, pr.n. ((j). 
 
 Tyra, pr. n, Tvqo(;. 
 
 taddaius, iir. n. 0a6SaXoq. 
 
 I'adei, adv. (213,n. 1), whither. 
 
 i'agkjan, aji. v. (209), to think, 
 meditate, consider. }>agkjaii sis, 
 to reason. — Compound and- 
 )?agkjan sik, to remember. 
 'ahan, w.v. (193), to be silent. 
 
 ^ah6, f. (51)), clay, uTjlog. 
 'airh, prep. w. ace. (217), through; 
 by, by means of; jJairli |'6ei, 
 wherefore, for which reason 
 Skeir. 49. 
 
 J'airko, tt. (110), hole. 
 
 ga-J^airsan, st. v. (174,ii. 1), Io 
 wither. 
 
 pun, {_\}rel. (commonly at the be- 
 ginning of a sentence), when, as 
 long as, (2) demonstr. (following 
 the first closely-connected word), 
 then, at that time, thereupon 
 (214,n.]); (3) conj. (218), but, 
 however , therefore, for (imme- 
 diately after uli). 
 
 J'ana-jnais, adv., further, still. 
 
 Jjana-seifis (2l2,n. 1), adv., far- 
 ther, slill; ni |^anasei('s, no 
 longer. 
 
 l?ande, conj. (218), if, because, 
 till. 
 
 uf-banjan, w.v. (li^T), to stretch 
 out. 
 
 J^an-nn, adv. (218), indeed, there- 
 fore. 
 
 J'an-nli, adv. (218), then. 
 
 f-ar, adv. (213, n.l), there. 
 
 ar-ei, adv., where. 
 arihs, arf/ (20,ii. 1), not yet full- 
 ed (said of new cloth). 
 
 y^ar-uh, adv.. there: conj., but 
 (2 IS). 
 
 )?at-ainoi, adv., only. 
 
 j^at-ei, (1) ncul. rel. pron. (157). 
 (2) conj. (21^), that, because, in 
 order that. It often ansivers 
 Greek oxi, when preceding dir eel- 
 quotations. 
 
 ]>abTi) andp&pvd-h, arfw. (2i:{,ii. 1), 
 thence; after thai, then. 
 
 fiau ««rf")'au-li (1) conj., than 
 (after comparatives) , or (in 
 double questions). (2) adv. (210), 
 yet, indeed , perhaps (commonly 
 answering Greek av). 
 
 f>auli-j abal, conj. (2 IS), even if. 
 
 f'aurban, nret.-pr. v. (199), /« 
 want, tieed, to stand in need of. 
 
 f^aiirfts, f. (50,11.4; 10.!), need, 
 necessity. 
 
 fiaurmis", m. (105), thorn. 
 
 I^aurp, H. (94,11.2), village. 
 
 ga-paursnan, w. v. (32), to wither. 
 
 ■-aurstei, f. (32; 113), thirst. 
 aiirsus, adj.l^i'l;\\i\), dry, with- 
 ered. 
 
 fie-ei (157,n. 1; 218), conj., for, 
 because. 
 
 ]? e i ( 1 57, 11. 2) _( 1 ) rel. (= J^atei) after 
 ]3atah;ah, fnglwali, etc. (164, n.l). 
 (2) conj. (218), Ihat, in order 
 that. 
 
 l?eilian, st.v. (172, n.l), to thrive. 
 
 j'eilwo, f., thunder. 
 
 f'eins, pron. (151), thine. 
 
 at-l?insan, st. v. (174, n. 1), to dram 
 towards. 
 
 Jjis-luazuli, pron., followed by a 
 rel. prn. (16l,n. 1,), whoever, who- 
 soever. 
 
 I^iubjo, arff. (211), secretly (like 
 a ihief). . 
 
 piufs, fiiubs (56,n. 1), m. (a), thief. 
 
 l^iiida, f. (97), people; in plur. 
 Ilie Gentiles. ]>sA f»iud6, those 
 of the Gentiles, the Gentiles. 
 
 'iudan-gardi, f. (98), kingdom. 
 
 Mudans, m. (a), king. 
 
 'iudanun, w. v. (190), Io be king. 
 
 Jiiidinassus, m. (105), kingdom. 
 
 '■'bins, m. (91,n.3), servant. 
 
 j^iuK m., good. 
 
 }>iupjan, w.v. (187), to bless. — 
 Compound ga-f'iuf'jan, th. s. 
 
 piwi, /. (OS, n.l), maid-servant. 
 
126 
 
 safjliiihan — nnsels. 
 
 Sa-)?lailian, red.v. (I7ll,n.l), to i 
 
 caress, console. 
 Mat) us, ndj. (l.'il), so/'t. 
 pliuhan, lo flee. — CoJiiiKniitil 
 
 ga-]?liulian, //(. s. 
 I'omas, ;/;•. >i. Bojfiu.:. 
 t^rafstjan, iv v., to console. — 
 
 Compound ga-|:>rafstjan, //(. s. 
 Iragjan, w. v., to run. 
 {rains tei, /. (]!:j). locust. 
 {jreilian, si. v. (172, n.1), lo throng, 
 
 trouble. \ 
 
 )?reis, num. (140), lliree. 
 [Tirtja, ord. numb. (1-1(1; Mil, n. I), 
 
 the third. 
 friskan, si. v. (171, n. I), to thresh. 
 us-jjriutaii, si. v. (I7:f,7i. 1), lo 
 
 trouble, conlemu. 
 'ruts-t'ill. It., leprosy. [ 
 
 Ml, pron. (150), ifiou. ' i 
 
 Jiigkjaii, "«. V. (20'J), lo think; 
 
 impersonal, ]Jiigkcit' mis, it seems 
 
 lo me. melhinks, 1 Ihin/c, suppose. 
 -);iulits, adj. (I-")''), lliinkini) (only 
 
 in eom/iiiund.'!). 
 j'filitii.s. m. (15i>), conscience. 
 j'ulains. /'. (|0!i, n. I), su/fering, 
 
 pnlience. 
 {"iilan, w. V. (Hi:i), lo tolerate, 
 
 suffer. — C'ompoundga.-\>u\&n, Ih. s. 
 jjusundi, 7tnm. (l."i; 145), /". , a 
 
 thousand. 
 f>waban, si. v. (177, n. 1), lo wash, 
 
 wash one's self. 
 ga-)) wastjan, tv. v. to confirm, 
 -u, an enclitic particle denoting a 
 
 question (21 (i), for example, 
 
 skuld-u ist, is it permitted? abu ' 
 
 (af + u) {"US silbin I'll J^ata qij^is, 
 
 say est lliou this thing of thyself? 
 
 Prefixed by ga- (21t!, n. I). — 
 
 Comp. niii. 
 Ubadamirus, ;)r. ?j. (40,n.l). | 
 
 Ubadila, pr. n. t40,n. 1). 
 ubilaba, ado. (210), evilly, ill. i 
 ubils, adj. (124; 138), evil, ill, bad; 
 
 — neut. subsl. )?ata ubil and 
 
 l^ata ubilO. 
 u b i 1- 1 j i s , adj. (126), mischievous, 
 
 (evil -doing). 
 uf (5G,n. 1; 217) prep. w. d. and ace, 
 
 under. 
 iif-ai)?eis, adj. (52,n.2), under 
 
 an oath. 
 iifar, prep. w. d. and ace. (217), 
 
 over, aboi'e, beyond. 
 iit'arassj an, w. v., lo make lo 
 
 abound, increase. 
 
 ufarassus, m., overflorv, rtbuii- 
 dance; dal. ufarassau, adverb, in 
 iibunilitnec. extremely. 
 
 ut'aro, arfi). (21l,n. I), above; prep. 
 w. gen. and dal. (217), over, nbave 
 
 iifta, adv. (2l4,n. 1), often. 
 
 -lib, or -b (comp. 24, n. 2, (rud 112, 
 n. 3 1, enclilic particle (= Lt. que, 
 2 IS), and, also, but. — In com- 
 jiosiliiin ?vilh pronouns and par- 
 ticles it often adds intensity to 
 the signification, comp. sab (154); 
 JiafrS'-b, J?au-b, |'ar-ub, ]?an-ub; 
 — modifying the signif, lua-zub, 
 luarjizuh (104 el seq.). 
 
 ubteigs, Tibtiugs, a^/;'. (15; 10), in 
 good lime, sufficiently early; — 
 adv. filitcigo (15,n.3; 21 1). 
 
 uhtwC), /'. (15; 112), darvn. ;\h- 
 filitwun before day. 
 
 ulbandus, i«.(?), camel. 
 
 un-agands, purtic. (35; 2li2, n.2) 
 fearless. 
 
 un-aud-huli|'s, p.p. (from and- 
 buljan), not uncovered , not dis- 
 closed. 
 
 un-and-soks, adj. (35), irrefut- 
 able. 
 
 undar, prp. w. ace. (217), under. 
 
 undaro, adv. (211, n.1), below; 
 also used as prep. w. d., under. 
 
 und, prep. (217) (1) w. d. for, in- 
 stead of. (2) w. ace, up to, until. 
 und ]7atci (218), luUil, till, as 
 long as. und filu mais, much 
 more. 
 
 un-faurs, adj. (130), lallling, 
 talkative. 
 
 un-fr6)7s, adj. (74, n. 4), injudi- 
 cious, foolish. 
 
 un-ga-nobains, /. (35), inconti- 
 nency. 
 
 un-ga-laubjands, pres. parlic. 
 (from ga-laubjan), unbelieving. 
 
 un-ga,- 8 B.ihjSi.ns, part. pret. (from 
 ga-saihran) not seen, invisible. 
 
 un-bandu- waiirhts, adj. not 
 handmade. 
 
 un- brains, adj. (i), unclean. 
 
 un-bult'6, f, evil spirit, demon.. 
 
 un-karja, w. adj., careless. 
 
 un-kaiireins, /'. (103, n.l), Ihal 
 which is not burdensome. 
 
 *un-le)'s, adj. (74,n.2), poor. 
 
 un-mana-riggws, atlj. (lis), 
 fierce. 
 
 u n s a r , pron. ( 1 24, n. 1 . 4 ; 1 5 1 1, our. 
 
 un-sels, ii<lj. (130), I'oil. wicked. 
 
niitfi — warnijaii. 
 
 127 
 
 iintc, conj. (218), unl.il, as long 
 
 as; for, because, I hat. 
 un- t'iu]?, n., evil. 
 un- walls, afi-j. (5b), blameli'ss. 
 un-weis, adj., iynoraitt, iiiiiic- 
 
 quainted. 
 un-witands, pres. purlic. (frum 
 
 witan) ignorant. 
 ur-rists, /. (30), resurrection. 
 ur-runs, m. (7(?,n.4), decease. 
 ,us (HZ- 78 0., ur- 78,n, 4; for s being 
 
 dropped, see § 7'-,n.5), prep. n>. 
 
 d. ("il7), out, out of , forth from, 
 
 from. 
 us-dau):>s, adj. (74, n. 2), zealous, 
 
 diligent, (sec daudjan). 
 us-drusts, f, a falling away, 
 
 {from driusan). 
 us-fairina, adj. (i:)2,n. 2), gnill- 
 
 less, blameless. 
 us -film a, ?v. adj., frightened, 
 
 amazed. 
 us-gnidja, w. adj. (132, n. 2), 
 
 weary, idle, disheartened. 
 us-haista, m. adj. (()9,n.2), needy. 
 iis-kunj?s, adj., fully known, 
 
 evident. 
 us-lif'a, »z., a person affected with 
 
 palsy. 
 us-mSt, n. (34), tnanner of life 
 
 (conversation). 
 us-skaus, ailj. (]24,n.3), cautious, 
 ns- s ta.ss , f. (\03,n.'i), resurrection. 
 us-waiirhts, adj., just. 
 us-wai'irpa, f. (32), a thing cast 
 
 away, an outcast. 
 nt, adv.(\h\ 2l3n.2), out. ^ 
 fita, adv. (2i3,n. 2), rviihout. 
 fitana and uta|'r5, adv. (213, n. 2), 
 
 from without, without. 
 uz-eta (us-eta? 78,n.4), m., manger. 
 
 -Waddjus, f. (1(15), 7valt (only in 
 
 compounds, as baurgs- waddjus). 
 wadi, 71., bet, pledge. 
 *waggari, ?(.(?), pillow. 
 wabsjan, st.v. (Ill ,u.i), to groiv. 
 *wahstus, m., growth, stature 
 
 (cf. E. to wax). 
 *wahtwO (or wahtwa?)/. (5S,n.2), 
 
 watch. 
 wai, interj. (219), 7Voe.' 
 waian, 7-ed. v. (22; 182), to blow. 
 wai-dOdja, m. (21,n.2), mu'efncltir. 
 wai-fairlujan, iv. v., to mail. 
 wai list a, m., angle, corner. 
 wailits, f. (\\r, iind ■n.\), thing, 
 
 something ; gcneraHij n'i.h the 
 
 7iegative particle iii, as ni wailits, 
 nothing ; ni waihtai, ni in wailitai, 
 not at all (no whit). 
 
 waila (20,3), adv., 7vell, rightly. 
 
 waila-merjan, 7V. v., *t'«; merjan. 
 
 w a 1 1 a - w i z n s , /;, well-being, food. 
 
 wair, m. (fll,n.4), man. 
 
 wairpan, st. v. (174), to thro7V. 
 
 — Compound iis-wairpan w. dat,, 
 or ace, to thro7V out, cast out. 
 
 wairs, compar. adv. (212, n. 1), 
 worse. 
 
 wairs iza, compar. adj. (138), 
 7vorse. 
 
 wair]?an, st. v. (174, a. 1), to be- 
 come (also as auxiliary verb), 
 arise, be born, happen, occur. — 
 Compound fra-wairf^an , see fra- 
 wardjan. 
 
 wairj'ida, f, 7Vorthiness , ability. 
 
 ga-ga-wairf>nan, 7V.v., to be re- 
 conciled (comp. ga-wair]?i, f.). 
 
 wair};s, adj., worth, worthy. 
 
 waja-mGreins, /". (I I3,n.l), blas- 
 phemy. 
 
 w a j a - lu c r j a n , w. v., see merjan. 
 
 wakan, st. v. (177,11.1), to wake. 
 
 — CoTtipound l?airli-wakan (03, 
 n. 1), to watch, keep watch 
 throu.gho7il. 
 
 us - w a k j a n , w. v. (187), to 7vake up. 
 ga-waknan, w. v. (35), to he 
 
 aivnked. 
 Valainir, pr. n. (0,n.2; 40,n. 1). 
 waldan, red. v. (179, n.l), to 
 
 govern, ru'e (wield). 
 waldufni, 71., po7vcr, 7niglti. 
 waljan, w. v. (187), to choose. 
 waltjan, 7V. v., to roll. 
 wamba, f. (97), belly, womb. 
 wamm, »., spot. 
 wandjan, rv.v. (188), to iur7i., Iur7i 
 
 to. -1— Compounds (a) ga-wandjan, 
 
 to turn, turn towards, gaw. sik 
 
 (also without sik), to relU7-n, 
 
 tur7i one's self , to be converted. 
 
 (b) us-wandjan, to turn one's self 
 
 away. 
 waninassus, w?., defect (cf. E. to 
 
 7Vane). 
 *war, adj. (124, n.l), wary, cautious. 
 fra-wardjan, 7V.v., to spoil, ruin 
 
 (if. fra-wairj^'an to be i-uined). 
 ward, /'. , cautiousness, cunning- 
 
 iiess. 
 wargi|'a, /'., condininnthm. 
 warjan, n<. v (ls"i), /" forbid. 
 warujjan, 7V. v. (1^8), 10 7Varm. 
 
128 
 
 wasjan — Zakarias. 
 
 wasjan, w. v. (4S7), to vest, clothe 
 one's self. — Compound ga- was- 
 jan, lo clothe. 
 wasti, f. ((IS), garment: pliii:, 
 
 clothes, clothing. 
 wato, II. (110, n. I), nu/lei: 
 waurd, n. (93), ivord, speech. 
 wiiiirkjan, un.v. (:>(i«), lo work, 
 elfeci, prepare, make. do. — 
 Compnund ga-\MUirliJ;in. th. s. 
 waurius, m., worm. 
 waur.stw, n.. work. 
 w a u r s t w i g- s , adj. , e/fecluat. 
 waur.stwja, m. , workman, la- 
 borer. 
 waursts, /. root. 
 wG^s, III. (OJ, n.-i), shock of a wave, 
 
 billow, ivupc. 
 we ill a, n. (108), priest. 
 M'eihan, st.v. (172), lo fight. 
 weilinan, w. v. (194), to be hallow- 
 ed. 
 weilis, adj.. Italy. 
 we in, /(., wine. 
 
 weipan, st. v. (172, n.l), tn crown. 
 -weltan, st.v. tl72,n. ]; 197,n. 1), 
 to see, only in compounds (a) fra- 
 weitan, to avenge; par tic. tVa- 
 weitands, m., (115), avenger. 
 _(b) in-weitan, lo worship. 
 fair-weitjan, w.v., to look round 
 about with intention, to view with 
 fixed attention {w. g., du or in), 
 weitwodei, f., testimony. 
 weitwOdiJia, f, th. s. 
 '*\Yeitw6]>s, weitwods, }n. ('JO; 
 
 74, n. 2; 117), witness. 
 wenjan, w. v., to hope, expect 
 
 (cf. E. to ween). 
 w§ns,/' (Mi), hope, expectation. 
 ga-widan, st.v. (170, n.l), to join 
 
 together. 
 widuw6, /■., widow. 
 ga- wigau, st. v. (176, u. 1), to move, 
 
 shake. 
 wig-s. III. (91), may. 
 wilja, m. (108), mill. — ~W\\i&,pr.n. 
 
 (40,n.l). 
 wilja-hal|?ei, f. (113, n.2), favor. 
 wiljau, an.v. (205), to mill, wish. 
 wil)?eis, adj. (127), wild. 
 wilwan, st.v. (174,n. 1), lo rob. — 
 Compound dis-wUwan to plunder. 
 -windan, st. v. (174,n.l), to wind; 
 only in compounds bi-windan, lu 
 mind round, wrap. 
 winds, m. (a), wind. 
 
 winnan, si. v. (174,n.l), 1"^"^"' 
 feel pain. 
 
 wis, II., calm (of the seah^j,^.^^ 
 i wisan, si.w. (17(i,nJ; 201; -^y^ 
 
 irn, 3. p. ist; with ni, mf^ ■. 
 |>ate, batist(204,n.3), to be{a"^-f->' 
 to be there, present . remain, fe- 
 lony to (m. g.), to have (w. <'<"■)■ 
 _ 'Compounds (a) at,-wi.saii, '(' Oe 
 there, present, (b) ufar-wisau, t„ 
 he over, to abound. 
 
 witan, m.v. (197, n.l), to look iil, 
 give attention; to match. 
 
 witan, pret.-pr. v. (30; 197), to 
 knom. 
 
 witS}?, g. witSdis, re. (94), lam. 
 
 witubni, n. (30), knowledge. 
 
 wifra, prep. m. ace. (217), against, 
 towards; opposite, before. 
 
 wifrus, m., lamb {wether). 
 
 wlaitOu, tv. v., lo look round about. 
 
 wlits, in. (101, n.l), countenance. 
 
 wokains, /. (35), matching, 
 
 wokrs, »i. (91,n.2), usury'. 
 
 * w 6 1' s , w6ds (74 , n.2), adj., furious, 
 possessed. 
 
 wSpjan, w.v., to call, cry, cry 
 out. — Compound uf-w6pjan 
 (G3,n. 1), lo cry out. 
 
 w f' e i s , adj. {\2S),smeet, pleasant. 
 
 wrakja, f, persecution. 
 
 wmttnj.w. v., logo, travel. 
 
 wrikan, st. v. (r76,n. l)j to per- 
 secute {cf. E. lo wreak) 
 
 ga-wrisqan. st.v. (174,n.l), lo 
 bear fruit. 
 
 wribus, m. (105), herd. 
 
 wrOhjan, m.v. to accuse. 
 
 wiilan, st.v. (173,n.2; 175,n.2), to 
 
 wulfs rn. (91), wolf. 
 
 Wultila, pr. n. (108), Mile wolf,, 
 
 Greek OC^X^pixlcg, 
 wulla, f, rvoo!. 
 
 ^'ril'us^''' «'//■ rvonderful, glo- 
 
 wulhis „,. (105), glory 
 wundnfni,/., ;j,;;„^,/^- 
 
 Xristus,;,r.„. (|_„.4)__y^^^^^, 
 
 Y, see ^ 39. 
 
 axoQ. 
 
 Zaibaidaius, pr.n yta^K ~ 
 Zakarias, pr. n. ^^/^''^"^""'i 
 
 llalle, printed by E. Karras.